Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Ibc 2012
Ibc 2012
, LTD
By:
Camilo De la Barra B.
Civil Engineer, Pontificia Universidad Católica de Chile
April 2012
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The publication of this Manual was made possible by the financial support of
POSCO E&C. The authors greatly appreciate all the advice by Mr. Jae-Heung
Kim, Mr. Jang Ho Choi and Mr. Rodrigo García, all of them from POSCO E&C.
We wish to thank Javiera De la Barra for her valuable collaboration in
improving the quality of the drawings.
DISCLAIMER
The information presented in this Manual is based in design codes from Chile
and United States, engineering principles, and current construction and design
practice, and is for general information only. Under no circumstances does
DICTUC S.A. warrant or certify that the information contained here is free of
errors or deficiencies of any kind.
All the examples solved in this Manual refer to specific codes and standards.
Codes are often modified, so the users of this material have to be aware of the
codes that are in force at the time the Manual is used. Any reader of this
Manual assumes all the responsibility that comes from its use.
This manual may be changed at any time. Staff is encouraged to review this
manual periodically and suggest changes to keep the manual current and to
minimize differences between the manual and actual practices.
The origin of all the specific information, figures, and tables is properly
referenced inside this Manual. Before publishing a hard copy of this Manual, it
shall be verified that the use of the referenced information does not infringe
copyright.
ii
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS
CONTENTS
1. Introduction
2. General information
4. Brace Connections
iii
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS
5. Shear Connections
6. Moment Connections
7.Columns Splices
8. Beam Splices
iv
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS
9. Stoppers
12. Cranes
v
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS
vi
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
1. INTRODUCTION
The response of steel structures subjected to loads and deformations produced
by earthquakes is strongly dependant on the behavior of the connections. The
ductility of the structure, the total strength of the system, the deformation
capacity, the easiness of identifying damage and later repairing, the level of
inelastic incursions (or having a completely elastic response) are
characteristics highly dependent of the solution given to the connections of the
steel members.
The intention of this manual is to present the current design procedures for
connections for different members of steel buildings and to show the minimum
design checks that must be done for a correct design of those connections.
The currently available design methods are the Allowable Stress Design (ASD)
method and the Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) method. The LRFD
method has been used in Europe, Canada and United States for a number of
years. Also, the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), the
organization that prepares the specifications for structural design of steel
buildings, has decided to favor LRFD over ASD. Therefore, in this Manual all
examples are developed using LRFD.
1.1 Contents
The manual is organized into 12 chapters. The first two chapters present a
general description of the design standards and the materials used. Chapters 3
through 8 show the description of different types of connections and design
procedures. Examples are developed for each case, using the international or
the Chilean standards. In Chapters 9 to 12 special cases are discussed, but no
examples are solved.
All the chapters with solved examples of connections have a similar structure:
first, the requirements from international and Chilean design codes are
discussed; then, the design of a connection is proposed and solved; the design
is performed using an international design code, but the effects of the Chilean
code in the final design are always included for discussion; finally, the resulting
design is summarized. In some examples the design forces are taken from the
most stringent conditions between Chilean and international design provisions.
1-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1 – Introduction.
Chapter 12 – Cranes.
1-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
2. GENERAL INFORMATION
In this chapter is summarized general information needed to design
connections in steel structures. The information corresponds to a brief
description of the structural design codes that are used along this manual, a
description of the Chilean and international standards that are used to
characterize the main types of steels used for structural steel construction, and
a summary of the observed performance of steel structures during the 2010
Chile earthquake. Also, brief sections containing information of bolts and welds
for connections, as well as two sections for the general notation and units used
in this manual, are included.
The international codes refer to the standards used in the United States. Those
were chosen because important parts of the Chilean codes are based in the
specifications written by the American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).
The main specifications used for steel design in the United States, and that are
widely used in many countries, are the following:
This standard sets criteria for the design of structural steel buildings and other
structures, which are designed, fabricated, and erected with vertical and
horizontal members that are typical of buildings. It combines the Allowable
Stress Design (ASD) and Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) methods
by defining the way in which the strength is calculated for a given limit state,
and the corresponding values of the safety factor and the resistance factor .
2-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
The Chilean codes related to seismic design of steel constructions are the
following:
This standard specifies the procedures for the design of steel structures for
buildings and also specifies the minimum resistance that the members and
connections must meet. Being a very old standard, is in a review process, and
it is not currently used in building design.
Appendix B specifies that, while there is no official version for the design and
construction of steel buildings, the following standards must be used:
2-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
To avoid collapse, the structures should have large strength and/or large
capacity to absorb energy, beyond the elastic limit of the material. To achieve
the former the structural system should be able to:
2-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
To avoid stoppage of operation of the industry, the structure must also meet
the following requirements during an earthquake more severe than the design
earthquake.
e) All damage must occur at places that are visible and accessible.
This standard defines the load combinations that must used for calculating the
required resistances of structural members. This standard has to be used
together with NCh433.Of1996 Modified in 2009. The load combinations for
designing industrial facilities are defined in NCh2369.Of2003.
2-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Other types of steels used for construction are high-strength low-alloy steels
and alloy-steels. These steels have larger amounts of additional chemical
elements such as chromium, molybdenum, nickel, titanium, vanadium, in
order to, for example, obtain better corrosion resistance, higher strength and
higher toughness.
The most commonly used steel is A36. The yield and tensile strengths of some
of the steels mentioned above are shown in Table 2.2-1.
2-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Minimum
Tensile
yield
Designation strength (Fu) Steel type
strength (Fy)
(ksi)
(ksi)
32 58 to 80
A36 Carbon steel
36 58 to 80
A529 Gr42 42 60 to 85
Carbon steel
A529 Gr50 50 70 to 100
A572 Gr42 42 60
A572 Gr65 65 80
High-strength
A242 42 63
low-alloy steel
High-strength
A588 42 63
low-alloy steel
High-strength
A992 50 to 65 65
low-alloy steel
In Chile only one standard defines the steel for building construction,
NCh203.Of2006 Structural steel - Requirements. This standard defines the
requirements that the different types of steels for building (carbon steel, alloy-
steels, or high-strength low-alloy steels) must meet. Two general types of
steels are defined: structural steel for general construction and structural steel
for constructions subjected to dynamic loads. A dynamic load refers to seismic
loading or any other type of dynamic loads. The yield and tensile strengths of
steels defined in Chile are shown in Table 2.2-2.
2-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Minimum
Tensile
yield
Designation strength (Fu) Steel type
strength (Fy)
(MPa)
(MPa)
Only A250ESP and A345ESP steels can be used for seismic design. These
steels must meet some special requirements:
ASTM A36 and ASTM A572 Gr 50 are steels similar to A250ESP and A345ESP,
respectively. This does not mean that are equivalent. Equivalency must be
checked, taking into account the requirements listed above. Table C.1 of
NCh203.Of2006 presents a list of verifications that must be performed to
verify equivalency. ASTM A992 (Gr50) complies with the requirements from
the Chilean standards.
2-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
On February 27th, 2010, the large Maule earthquake (Mw = 8.8) that affected
Chile was strongly felt at least from Temuco to La Ligua (USGS, 2010), in a
length of about 700 km. The area subjected to large ground shaking is
occupied by 75% of the total country population and three of the largest
population and industrial centers: Santiago, Concepción-Talcahuano, and
Valparaíso-Viña del Mar. About 370.000 houses were damaged or destroyed;
25 bridges collapsed (Hube et al. 2010); ports were damaged due to
liquefaction and lateral spreading (EERI, 2010).
Most of the steel structures in Chile are industrial facilities. Steel buildings for
other uses, like office space or parking garages, which must be designed using
NCh433, are rare. Therefore, most of the structures designed after 2003 were
designed using the seismic design code for industrial facilities, NCh2369,
rather than using NCh433.
Most of the large steel structures that support heavy equipment, like a steam
generating boiler or a large diameter pipe, showed very little damage.
Evidence was found of large displacements at seismic stoppers of large heavy
equipment.
2-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Also, it is proposed that the adequate performance of steel structures was the
result of over strength rather than ductility, which is a consequence of the
application of the seismic code provisions used to design those structures.
References
Herrera, R. A., Beltran, J.F., Aguirre, C., and Verdugo, A., (2012).
Seismic performance of steel structures during the 2010 Maule
earthquake, STESSA 2012, Edited by Federico Mazzolani and Ricardo
Herrera, CRC Press 2011, Pages 37–43.
Hube M., Santa María H., Villalobos F., (2010) Preliminary analisys of
the seismic response of bridges during the Chilean 27 February
earthquake. Obras y Proyectos,Nº8, p. 48-57.
2-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
2-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
1. Bolt sizes
AISC360-05 gives the size of bolts in United States and S.I. units.
AISC Bolts: North American and metric bolts
2-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
2. Holes
The following table for Nominal Hole Dimensions in mm for various bolt
diameters is taken from AISC 360-05 Specification, table J3.3M.
Hole Dimensions
Bolt diameter
Standard Oversize Short-Slot Long-Slot
(Dia.) (Dia.) (Width x Length) (Width x Length)
M16 18 20 18 x 22 18 x 40
M20 22 24 22 x 26 22 x 50
M22 24 28 24 x 30 24 x 55
(a)
M24 27 30 27 x 32 27 x 60
M27 30 35 30 x 37 30 x 67
M30 33 38 33 x 40 33 x 75
Table 2.4-2: Nominal Hole Dimensions (mm) for several bolt diameters (mm).
Re. AISC360-05 Specification, table J3.3M
These standard hole-diameters are used for all hole related limit states, except
tear out.
For the use of standard holes, oversized holes, short-slotted holes and long-
slotted holes; see AISC360-05 Specification, chapter J, section J.3. “Bolts and
threaded parts”, sub-section 2. “Size and Use of Holes”.
2-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
M16 91 114
Table 2.4-3: Minimum Bolt Pretension (kN) for several bolt diameters (mm).
Re. AISC360-05 Specification, table J3.1M.
Note: this pretension is equal to 70% of the minimum tensile strength of bolts,
rounded off to nearest kN, as specified in ASTM specification for A325M and
A490M bolts with UNC.
A325-High-Strength Bolts:
2-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
A490-High-Strength Bolts:
Tip
It is always conservative to consider for bearing type connections threads not
excluded from shear planes.
1. Minimum Spacing
2-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
16 28 22
20 34 26
(d)
22 38 28
24 42(d) 30
27 48 34
30 52 38
36 64 46
Notes: (a) Smaller edge distances are permitted to be used provided section J3.10 of AISC 360-05, as
appropriate, is satisfied. (b) For oversized or slotted holes, see table J3.5M of AISC 360-05. (c) All edge
distances are permitted to be reduced by 3 mm when the hole is at a point where required strength does
not exceed 25 percent of the maximum strength in the element. (d) It is permitted to have 32 mm at the
ends of the beam connection angles and shear end plates.
Table 2.4-4: Minimum edge distance (mm) from center of standard hole to
edge of connected part, for several bolt diameters (mm). Re. AISC360-05
Specification, table J3.4M.
According to AISC360-05, J.3.5, the maximum distance from the center of any
bolt or rivet to the nearest edge of parts in contact shall be 12 times the
thickness of the connected part under consideration, but shall not exceed 150
mm. The longitudinal spacing of fasteners between elements that are in
continuous contact consisting of a plate and a shape or two plates shall be as
follows:
a) For painted members or unpainted members not subject to corrosion,
the spacing shall not exceed 24 times of the thickness of the thinner
plate or 305 mm
b) For unpainted members of weathering steel subject to atmospheric
corrosion, the spacing shall not exceed 14 times the thickness of the
thinner plate or 180 mm.
2-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Taking into account the previous information and Chilean practice, the
following table shows the minimum spacing between bolts centers and
minimum edge distances:
e3 e4
e1 e2
a b c a b c
Table 2.4-5: Usual minimum distances between bolts and plates edges
(Re. ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures, Table 3-1)
Where
Ru
2-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
25 3 15 - - 6 - 15 6
30 3 19 - - 6 - 19 8
35 3 22 - - 6 - - -
40 3,5 25 - - 8 - 25 10
45 4,5 30 - - 8 - - -
50 5 30 - - 10 - 30 10
55 6 35 - - 10 - - -
60 6 35 - - 12 - - -
65 6 40 - - 14 - 35 16
70 6 40 - - 16 - - -
75 8 50 - - 16 - - -
80 8 50 - - 16 - 45 22
90 8 55 - - 20 - - -
100 10 60 - - 24 - 55 27
125 12 70 60 40 24 14 - -
150 14 80 70 50 27 18 - -
175 16 90 80 60 27 20 - -
200 18 100 90 70 30 24 - -
Table 2.4-6: Gages: Angle cross sections – Cold formed and Rolled Shapes.
(Re. ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures, Table 3-1-a)
2-17
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
The following figures show the terms used in Table 2.4-6 (cold formed and
rolled angles respectively):
g >= 3e + 1,5d.
Simple (1 hole) B/3 -2e
Preferably use g = B/2
Table 2.4-7: Recommended gages for folded shapes with stiffened flanges.
(Re. ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures, Table 3-1-b)
2-18
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Aligned bolts:
Entering and tightening Clearance (in.) - Aligned ASTM A325 and A490 Bolts
C3
Nominal Bolt
Socket Dia. H1 H2 C1 C2
Dia.
Circular Clipped
Table 2.4-8: Entering and tightening clearance for aligned ASTM A325 and
A490 Bolts.
H1 H2
C1 C1
C2 C2
H2
fillet
C3
2-19
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Staggered bolts:
Stagger P (in.)
F Nominal Bolt Diameter (in.)
5/8 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/8 1 1/4 1 3/8 1 1/2
1 1 5/8
1 1/8 1 1/2
3 7/8 1 11/16
4 1 3/8
Table 2.4-9: Entering and tightening clearance for staggered ASTM A325 and
A490 Bolts.
2-20
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Where
C1
P
Cf = tightening
clearance
standard
socket
2-21
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
3. Bearing
4. Slip Resistance
Important: Bolts and welds shall not be designed to share force in a joint or
the same force component in a connection.
2-22
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
For bolted joints, according to section 8.5.1, bolts for seismic constructions
shall be type ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 (or equivalent).
According to section 8.5.6, bolts for seismic constructions shall have the
adequate pretension for slip-critical type union. However, the strength of
bolted connections can be calculated as the strength corresponding to bearing
type unions.
2.4.e. References
2-23
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
2-24
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Fillet welds are used for joining parallel plates or T shapes. Fillet welds are
always PJP type.
1. Effective Area
The effective area of a fillet weld shall be the effective length multiplied by the
effective throat. The effective throat of a fillet weld shall be the shortest
distance from the root to the face of the weld.
𝐴𝑤 = 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑙𝑤
the effective throat in a fillet weld (for FCAW, GMAW, SMAW processes) is
shown in the following figure:
teff = 0,707 t t
Figure 2.5-2: Effective width in the fillet weld for FCAW, GMAW, SMAW
processes. 𝑡=leg dimension (named also 𝑡𝑤 ), 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 = effective throat of a fillet
weld.
Note: in SAW process for < 3/8" → 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝑡 , and for 𝑡 ≥ 3/8" → 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝑡 + 0.11"
2-25
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
For fillet welds in holes and slots, the effective length shall be the length of the
centerline of the weld along the center of the plane through the throat.
In case of overlapping fillets, the effective area shall not exceed the nominal
cross-sectional area of the hole or slot, in the plane of the faying surface.
2. Limitations
The minimum size of the fillet welds shall not be less than the size required to
transmit calculated forces, nor the size shown in table J2.4 (see
Table 2.5-). These provisions do not apply to fillet weld reinforcements of PJP
or CJP groove welds.
a
Material of the Thinner Part Joined (mm) Minimum Size of Fillet Weld (mm)
To 6 inclusive 3
Over 6 to 13 5
Over 13 to 19 6
Over 19 8
(a) Leg dimension of fillet welds. Single pass welds must be used
Table 2.5-1: Minimum size of Fillet Welds. (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J2.4).
According to the following figure for fillet welds along edges (Re. AISC 360-05,
J2.2b):
tp tw
2-26
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
If 𝑡𝑝 < 6 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑡𝑤𝑀𝐴𝑋 = 𝑡𝑝
If 𝑡𝑝 ≥ 6 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑡𝑤𝑀𝐴𝑋 = 𝑡𝑝 − 2 𝑚𝑚 (See exception in AISC 360-05, Section J2-2b)
Lap joints:
The lap shall be five times the thickness of the thinner part (plate) joined, but
not less than 25 mm.
For lap joints joining plates or bars subjected to axial stress that use
transverse fillet welds only, see AISC 360-05, section J2.2b.
2-27
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Fillet welds are permitted to be stopped short or extend to the ends or sides of
parts or be boxed except as limited by the following:
1. For lap joints in which one connected part extends beyond an edge of
another connected part that is subject to calculated tensile stress,
fillet weld shall terminate not less than the size of the weld from that
edge.
2-28
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Figure 2.5-8: Details for fillet welds that occur on opposite sides of a common
plane.(Re. AISC 360-05 Commentary, Fig. C-J2.9)
Note: According to AISC 360-05 Commentary, End returns are not essential
for developing the capacity of fillet welded connections and have a negligible
effect on their strength.
2-29
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Groove welds are used for attach top plates. They can be CJP (complete joint
penetration groove welds) or PJP (partial joint penetration groove welds). See
the following figure:
CJP PJP
1. Effective Area
Effective Throat of PJP Groove Welds - Table J2.1 of AISC 360-05 Specification
2-30
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
2. Limitations
Minimum effective throat thickness for PJP groove weld shall not be less than
the size required to transmit calculated forces, nor the size shown in the
following table. Minimum weld size is determined by the thinner of the two
parts joined.
Minimum Effective Throat Thickness of PJP Groove Welds- Table J2.3 AISC
360-05 Specification
Minimum Effective Throat
Material of the Thinner Part Joined (mm)
Thickness (mm) - See table J2.1
To 6 inclusive 3
Over 6 to 13 5
Over 13 to 19 6
Over 19 to 38 8
Over 38 to 57 10
Over 57 to 150 13
Over 150 16
2-31
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Base metal:
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝐵𝑀 𝐴𝐵𝑀
𝐹𝐵𝑀 = nominal strength of the base metal, per unit area (MPa)
𝐴𝐵𝑀 = cross-sectional area of the base metal (mm2)
Weld metal:
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑤 𝐴𝑤
Figure 2.5-10: Shear planes for fillet welds loaded in longitudinal shear.
(Re. AISC 360-05, Fig. C-J2.10).
For these welds, the strength of a joint made by CJP groove welds, whether
loaded in tension or compression, is dependent upon the strength of the base
metal, and no computation of the strength of the CJP groove weld is required.
See Table J2.5.
Note that for CJP welds, the limit state of weld metal strength will never
control since both the welds and the base metal have the same effective area,
and the filler metal is constrained to be stronger than the base metal.
Therefore, only the capacity of the base metal is of concern.
2-32
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
CJP groove welds loaded in tension or compression parallel to the weld axis,
such as for the groove welded corners of box columns, do not transfer primary
load across the joint. In such cases, no computation of the strength of the CJP
groove weld strength is required.
For PJP groove welds, the effective areas for the weld and base metal differ,
with the weld effective area being less than the base metal. If the weld’s
effective throat is small enough, then the weld will control over the base metal
strength. Refer to table J2.5.
Fillet Welds:
Refer to table J2.5, the shear strength of fillet welds is equal to 0.60FEXX and
the resistance factor is 0.75. The strength of the base metal is governed by
J4 and has to be checked.
𝜙 = 0.75
a) For a linear weld group loaded in-plane through its center of gravity:
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑤 𝐴𝑤
𝐹𝑤 = 0.60𝐹𝐸𝑋𝑋 (1.0 + 0.50 sin1.5 𝜃)
2-33
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: a linear weld group is one in which all elements are in a line or are
parallel
Figure 2.5-11: Angle of loading for a linear weld group loaded in plane through
the center of gravity.
b) For weld elements within a weld group that are loaded in-plane and
analyzed using and instantaneous center of rotation method, see
J2.4.
2-34
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
For CJP subject to tension normal to the effective area shall comply with the
requirements for matching filler metal given in AWS D1.1. See Table 2.5-1.
1. CJP groove welded T and corner joints with steel backing left in place,
subject to tension normal to the effective area, unless the joints are
designed using the nominal strength and resistance factor or safety
factor as applicable for PJP weld.
2. CJP welded splices subject to tension normal to the effective area in
heavy sections, as defined in A3.1c and A3.1d of the Specification.
Commonly used electrodes are E60 and E70. EXX means that 𝑭𝑬𝑿𝑿 = XX
ksi.(electrode tensile strength).
2-35
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
2-36
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
1 tbf
6 3
4
5
1 3 3/4 MIN.
tbf
Also see section J1.6 of AISC 360-05: “Beam copes and weld access holes”
2-37
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
The electrodes and solder flux for SMAW process, must meet with AWS A5.1,
A5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.23 and A5.29.
(Re. NCh2369.0f2003, 8.5.1)
The electrodes must have a minimum tenacity of 27 J at -29°C on Charpy
essay, according to ASTM A-6.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)
Groove welds in seismic-resistant unions must be CJP type. (Re.
NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.5).
Important:
Bolts and welds shall not be designed to share force in a joint or the same
force component in a connection.
Demand critical welds are generally CJP welds, or are those welds where the
failure would result in significant degradation in strength and stiffness of the
SRLS. See AISC 341-05 Code, section 7.3 “Welded Connections” and the user
table for examples of welds designated as demand critical.
For desirable details that avoid shared forces between welds and joints see
Fig. C-I-7-1a on the commentary and for problematic bolted/welded
connections see Fig. C-I-7-1b on the commentary.
2-38
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
The following terms listed below are the most commonly used on the examples
of this Manual. Other terms not described in here will be properly defined on
each specific example.
2.6.a. Loads
𝑃𝑆𝑂 , 𝑉𝑆𝑂 , 𝑀𝑆𝑂 : Special operation axial, shear and moment overloads;
defined on NCh2369.0f2003, section 3.1.15.
𝑃𝑆𝐴 , 𝑉𝑆𝐴 , 𝑀𝑆𝐴 : Accidental operation axial, shear and moment overloads;
defined on NCh2369.0f2003, section 3.1.16.
𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑄 , 𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 , 𝑀𝑅𝐸𝑄 : Required axial, shear and moment forces to be transferred
by the connection (unless otherwise stated.)
𝑀𝑝 : Plastic moment.
𝑅𝑛 : Nominal strength.
Note:
Sometimes, 𝑁 or 𝑇 are also used to define axial loads.
2-39
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
𝐻: Story height.
bf
y tf
s
x x h d
tw
y
Figure 2.6-1: Chilean H-Shape section.
2-40
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
𝑘𝑔𝑓
Notation: 𝐻 𝐴 × 𝐵 × 𝐶, where 𝐴 = 𝑑 ; 𝐵 = 𝑏𝑓 ; 𝐶 =weigth in
𝑚
𝑏𝑓 : Flange width.
𝑡𝑓 : Flange thickness.
: Free distance between flanges.
0 : Distance between flange centroids.
𝑑: Section depth.
𝑡𝑤 : Web thickness.
𝑠: Weld fillet used for building the shape.
Note:
In many examples these terms have subscripts to indicate the structural
element such as beam, column, brace, etc.
𝑍: Plastic modulus.
𝐴𝑓 = 𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑓 : Area of one flange.
𝐴𝑤 = 𝑑𝑡𝑤 : Web area.
𝑆: Bending elastic modulus.
Note:
In many examples there are subscripts joining this terms to indicate the
element (beam, column, brace, plate, etc.) property.
2-41
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
1. Fillet welds
2-42
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
2. Groove welds
2-43
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 2: GENERAL INFORMATION
Posco E&C. uses principally the SI system, using Newton (N) or Kilo-Newton
(kN) for forces and millimeters (mm) for distances. For helping in calculations,
a conversion table between the SI unit system and customary United States
unit system is given.
2-44
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
3.1.a. NCh2369.Of2003
Anchor bolts subjected to tension shall have chair (double base plate)
and must be visible to allow for inspection and repair, and the thread
shall have sufficient length to enable retightening of the nuts.
Therefore, anchors shall have a projection of at least 8 diameters and
no less than 250 mm measured from the base plate. The length of
the thread under the nut must be greater than 75 mm. See Figure
3-1.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.6.2)
8d or 350 mm
Shear key
Figure 3-1: Typical detail for the double base plate connection. Adapted from
NCh2369.Of2003; Figure A.1.
3-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
The exception to the previous requirement can be made when the bolts have
enough capacity to resist load combinations in which the seismic forces have
been amplified by 0.5R (but no more than 1.5 times) with respect to the value
indicated on sections 5 and 7 of the Chilean code.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.6.2)
The design of the shear anchor systems shall not take into account
the friction between the base plate and the foundation.
The strengths of the shear keys and the anchor bolts cannot be
added.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, 8.6.6)
3-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Where 𝐻 is the story height and 𝑉𝑢∗ is the shear load calculated using the
combinations of the applicable building code, including the amplified seismic
load.
(1.1𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 , 𝑀𝑢∗ )
𝑀𝑢 ≥ min
Where 𝑀𝑢∗ is the moment calculated using the combinations of the applicable
building code, including the amplified seismic load.
3-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Note:
To understand the hypotheses and origin of these design forces, and how do
the base plate connections work, it is important to read the commentary of
section 8.5 of AISC341-05.
According to AISC 341-05, this strength shall be determined from AISC 360-
05 J3 section, for bolt and threaded parts in connections. Appendix D of
AIC318 code also shows expressions for the tensile and shear strength of the
anchor bolts.
Refer to Appendix D of ACI 318 Code. This is not presented on this example.
There are formulas to be used (in absence of code regulations) for calculating
the design bearing strength of the concrete for the limit state of concrete
crushing (with 𝜙 = 0.6). The nominal bearing strength is determined as follows:
𝑃𝑝 = 0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1
b) On less than the full area of a concrete support:
3-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Note: In the case of the following numerical example, the design of the anchor
bolts will be made according to ACI 318, Appendix D.
- Hole sizes and washer dimensions for anchor rods: from the AISC Manual of
Steel Construction.
-An adequate washer plate should be provided for each anchor rod.
-When large base plates are used (and also when shear keys are used), there
should be grout holes to prevent air pockets (except when the grout is dry-
packed). These grout holes must be placed near the center of the plate.
-Recommended anchor rod holes are presented on table 14-2 of the Manual:
¾ 1 5/16 2 ¼
1 1 13/16 3 3/8
1 ¼ 2 1/16 3 ½
1 ½ 2 5/16 3 1/2 ½
1 ¾ 2 3/4 4 5/8
2 3 1/4 5 3/4
Table 3-1: Recommended Maximum Sizes for Anchor-Rod Holes in Base Plates.
Adapted from Table 14-2 of AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Ed.
3-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Anchor rods:
-Cast-in place anchor rods are generally made from unheaded rod material or
headed bolt material. There are three common types of cast-in-place anchor
rods as seen on Figure 14-8 of the Manual (hooked, headed and headed with
nut).
-Minimum edge distances, embedment length and the design of the anchorage
into the concrete are covered on ACI 318 code.
-When anchor rods are required for a calculated tensile force T (probably due
to large seismic forces), a better anchorage is made with headed anchor rods
(see Figure 14-8b of the Manual).
Washer plates:
-Because base plates typically have holes larger than the oversized holes to
allow for tolerances on the location of the anchor rod, washers are usually
made from ASTM A36 steel plate. They may be round, square or rectangular
and they have holes that generally are 1/16 in larger than the anchor rod
diameter. The thickness must be suitable for the forces to be transferred. See
Table 14-2 of the manual for minimum washer sizes.
Design a base plate connection for the connection shown in Figure 3-2.
Suppose that bending is about the strong axis for the wide flange column
shown. The column is a H 350 x 350 x 165.6 Chilean shape.
Use A345 ESP steel, required for constructions subjected to dynamical loading,
according to NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3. Anchor rods are ASTM F1554 Gr
36. Concrete of the foundation is H30.
3-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
The column is located such that no “free edges” of concrete foundation are
near its position. Story height is 𝐻 = 5 𝑚.
Suppose that the column has been properly designed for resisting the forces
given by the load combinations of the applicable building code including the
amplified seismic load (in this case, the NCh2369.Of2003 Load Combinations
unless otherwise noted). These loads, at the base of the column and about the
major axis of the column are (convention is that compression loads are
positive sign):
Combination 1 (uplift):
𝑀𝑢 = 0 , 𝑁𝑢 = −1000 𝑘𝑁
Note for combination 1:
The uplift combination will typically control de design of anchor bolts since
they take the total of the tensile force and transmit it to the concrete
foundation. The design of the anchor bolts includes the anchorage to concrete.
The reference for that design is Appendix D of ACI 318 Code. Then, the
combinations for determining the uplift force should be taken from ACI 318
Code (or similar). In order to determine the maximum uplift force, typically
the combination 0.9D – 1.4(EH + EV) controls. EH is the horizontal earthquake
action and EV the vertical earthquake action.
Combination 2:
𝑀𝑢 = 500000 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚, 𝑁𝑢 = 1000 𝑘𝑁
Check immediately the AISC 341 requirements for determine the design forces
for combination 2:
1.1𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 = 1299939 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
Combination 3:
𝑀𝑢 = 200000 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚, 𝑁𝑢 = 2000 𝑘𝑁
3-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Check immediately the AISC 341 requirements for determine the design forces
for combination 3:
1.1𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 = 1299939 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
Shear force:
𝑉𝑢 = 150 𝑘𝑁
Check immediately the AISC 341 requirements for determine the shear design
force (the story height is 5000 mm):
2𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥
= 473 𝑘𝑁
𝐻
Therefore:
Notes:
1. For this example, the design of the anchorage to the concrete foundation
(regarding to anchor bolts) will not be taken into account For that topic
refer to Appendix D of ACI 318-05 and ACI 318-11 codes, and make a
ductile design.
2. This example will consider the detailing requirements of NCh2369.Of2003
and the design forces will be taken from the provisions of AISC 341-05
code, as shown above. Note that when NCh2369.Of2003 is used for the
determination of the design forces, appropriate load combinations from
that code shall be used.
3-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Mu
A
Pu
B B
Vu
(Re. ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures, Table 2.1.1)
A345 ESP:
(Re. Table 3, NCh203.Of.2003)
Note: To provide ductility, the anchor bolts must be made from a ductile
material. ASTM F1554 Gr36 bolts have a minimum ultimate elongation of 23%.
3-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
1. Uplift forces
𝑇𝑢 = 1000 𝑘𝑁
Determine the number of bolts and bolt area needed. From ACI 318-08 the
anchor bolt tensile strength is:
Where:
Try anchor rods of 1 ½ in (38 mm). Therefore, 𝐴𝑠𝑒 ,𝑁 = 1.405 𝑖𝑛2 = 906 𝑚𝑚2 . The
required number of bolts is:
𝑇𝑢
𝑛= = 3.7 → 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑛 = 4 𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
𝜙𝐴𝑠𝑒 ,𝑁 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎
Notes:
According to the AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed., use at
least 4 bolts.
The design of the upper base plate and vertical stiffeners (see Figure
3-2) shall be carried out for the anchor bolt tension capacity
computed according to ACI 318 – Appendix D. Note that the ductile
behavior requirement implies that the anchor bolt shall be the first
element to reach the nominal strength. Also, ACI 318 code considers
and additional 0.75 factor for reducing the nominal anchor tensile
strength associated with concrete brittle failure modes (not developed
on this example).
3-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
bedge
g
d N
bf
B
Figure 3-3: Base plate configuration.
Place the anchor bolts complying with the minimum distances as said on ACI
318 Code, App. D:
-Center to center distance between anchor bolts: 𝑠 ≥ 4𝑑𝑎 = 152 𝑚𝑚, with 𝑑𝑎 =
anchor bolt diameter (suppose untorqued cast-in anchor rods).
𝑵 = 𝒅 + 𝟐 𝒃𝒆𝒅𝒈𝒆 + 𝒈 = 𝟕𝟑𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑩 = 𝒔 + 𝟐𝒔𝒆𝒅𝒈𝒆 = 𝟑𝟕𝟓 𝒎𝒎
Note:
No minimum edge distance is considered, because in this example the column
is supposed to be away from pedestal edges.
3-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Y M2
T T
X X M1 M1
A R A
Figure 3-4: (a) Model for the design of the upper plate and vertical stiffener,
(b) Moment diagram due to anchor rods capacity on the upper plate.
From the previous figure, the reactions are (𝑇 = 𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑁 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 = 363 𝑘𝑁 ):
11𝑇
𝑅= = 499 𝑘𝑁
8
5𝑇
𝐴= = 113 𝑘𝑁
16
Maximum moment values are:
5𝑇𝑋 3𝑇𝑋
𝑀1 = = 9914 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑀2 = − = −11897 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
32 16
𝑏𝑢 𝑡 𝑢2
𝜙𝐹𝑦 𝑍 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 = 13274 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚 > 𝑀𝑀𝐴𝑋 = 11897 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚 OK
4
Design the vertical stiffeners as columns. Use an effective length factor k=1.0
(conservative):
3-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
𝒕𝒔 = 𝟐𝟓𝒎𝒎
𝒃𝒔 = 𝒈 + 𝒃𝒆𝒅𝒈𝒆 = 𝟏𝟗𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑡3
𝑠 𝑏𝑠
𝑡𝑠 𝑘𝐿 𝑘𝐻𝑠
𝑟= 𝐼/𝐴 = 12
= = 7.22 𝑚𝑚 . Then, = = 42.3 < 4.71 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 = 113.4
𝑡 𝑠 𝑏𝑠 12 𝑟 𝑟
𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 𝐹𝑦 0.658𝐹 𝑒 = 303 𝑀𝑃𝑎 → 𝜙𝑃𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑏𝑠 𝑡𝑠 = 1294 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑅 = 499 𝑘𝑁 OK
Notes:
Note that vertical stiffeners shall also be checked for the compression
on the base plate for (M,P) combinations (see following sections in
this chapter), therefore the 𝑡𝑠 value shall be checked after again.
3-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
2. M,N combinations
The anchor bolts shall be designed for resisting also the tensile forces coming
from the moment on the base and, if present, the uplift force T (see previous
section). For the calculation of the bearing stress distribution under the base
plate and the forces acting on the anchor bolts, refer to the following figure:
N
d
bf B
bedge P
M
(N/2 -bedge) (N/2 - A/3)
fp
T A
N'
Figure 3-5: Definition of variables for M,N action on a base plate.
Adapted from AISC Design Guide # 1. Figure B.3.
Notes:
There are many different ways of assuming the distribution of bearing
stresses under the base plate (e.g. uniform, linear, parabolic). In this
example it has been assumed a linear distribution as on AISC Design
Guide # 1. For more information see the AISC Design Guide # 1 (2nd
Ed), sections 3.3, 3.4 and Appendix B.
The triangular (linear) distribution does not in and of itself represent
an elastic design.
𝑓𝑝 𝐴𝐵
𝐹𝑉 : 𝑃 + 𝑇 =
2
′
𝑓𝑝 𝐴𝐵 ′ 𝐴
𝑀: 𝑃𝐴 + 𝑀 = 𝑁 −
2 3
𝑁
𝐴′ = − 𝑏𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒 (distance between the tension force and the column center).
2
3-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Solve both equations to obtain a quadratic expression for the bearing distance:
𝑓𝑝 𝐵
𝑓 ′ ± 𝑓 ′ 2 −4 6
(𝑃𝐴′ +𝑀)
𝐴= 𝑓𝑝 𝐵 (minimum of the positive real roots).
3
Where:
𝑓𝑝 𝐵𝑁 ′
𝑓′ = (as a supposition of the design method, to calculate 𝑓𝑝 use the
2
expression for the available bearing strength 𝜙𝑃𝑝 of AISC 360-05, section J8).
𝑓𝑝 𝐴𝐵
The resulting tensile load on the anchor bolts is 𝑇 = − 𝑃. Check it against
2
the tensile capacity of the bolts. Note that if the distance 𝐴 is equal or greater
than 𝑁′, the bolts are not subjected to tension and mostly all the base plate is
under compression. In that case, it is possible to neglect the action of the
bolts.
For the cases when there is mainly compression between the base plate and
the foundation, the Guide proposes a different method of analysis:
𝑀𝑢 𝑁
If 𝑒 = < the base plate is a small base plate and no tension exists. For that
𝑃𝑢 6
case, the base pressures can be evaluated as:
𝑃 6𝑒
𝑓𝑝 𝑀 𝐴𝑋 = 1+ ≤ 𝜙0.85𝑓𝑐′ = 0.6 × 0.85𝑓𝑐′
𝐵𝑁 𝑁
(Full area of a concrete support. AISC 360-05, Eq. J8-1)
After evaluating the compression over the base plate and the tension
on the bolts, check the bending behavior on the base plate (i.e. check
the thickness of the base plate) considering an appropriate critical
section. Also, tension on the bolts shall be checked.
Combination 2:
𝑀𝑢2 = 500000 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚 , 𝑃𝑢2 = 𝑁𝑢2 = 1000 𝑘𝑁
Base plate dimensions from previous section (bending about the strong axis of
the column):
𝑁 = 730 𝑚𝑚 , 𝐵 = 375 𝑚𝑚
3-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
𝐴2
𝜙𝑃𝑝 = 0.60 × 0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 ≤ 0.60 × 1.7𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 (Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J8-2)
𝐴1
𝜙𝑃𝑝 𝐴2
Therefore, 𝑓𝑝 = = 0.60 × 0.85𝑓𝑐′ = 25.5 𝑀𝑃𝑎 ≤ 0.60 × 1.7𝑓𝑐′ = 25.5 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐴1 𝐴1
𝑀𝑢 𝑁
𝑒= = 500 𝑚𝑚 > = 122 𝑚𝑚 → 𝐿𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑒 𝑒𝑐𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 → 𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑜𝑟 𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑠 𝑎𝑐𝑡 𝑖𝑛 𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝑃𝑢 6
𝑁
𝐴′ = − 𝑏𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒 = 295 𝑚𝑚
2
′
𝑓𝑝 𝐵𝑁 ′
𝑓 = = 3156 𝑘𝑁
2
𝑁 ′ = 𝑁 − 𝑏𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒 = 660 𝑚𝑚
The resulting tensile load on the anchor bolts is then (only 2 bolts are
working):
1 𝑓𝑝 𝐴𝐵
𝑇 𝑟𝑜𝑑 = − 𝑃𝑢2 = 208 ≤ 𝜙𝐴𝑠𝑒,𝑁 𝑓𝑢𝑡𝑎 = 272 𝑘𝑁, 𝜙 = 0.75 OK
2 2
ly
lx
Figure 3-6: (a) Section for bending analysis of the base plate (vertical
stiffeners shown), (b) Slab Model (three fixed and one free edges)
Use any reasonable method to solve the maximum moments on the Slab
Model.
3-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Using tables for calculating the slab moments per mm of width (Stiglat &
Wippel book) for the case shown in the figure above.
𝑏𝑓 𝑙𝑦
𝑙𝑦 = 𝑔 + 𝑏𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒 = 190 𝑚𝑚 , 𝑙𝑥 = = 175 𝑚𝑚 , = 1.09 → 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓 = 12.7
2 𝑙𝑥
𝐾
𝐾 = 𝑓𝑝 𝑙𝑥 𝑙𝑦 = 848 𝑘𝑁 → 𝑀𝑀𝐴𝑋 = = 67 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓
(Assume conservatively that the critical value of 𝑓𝑝 is constant all over the
slab).
𝑏𝑡 2
The design condition is that: 𝜙𝐹𝑦 𝑍 𝐵𝐴𝑆𝐸𝑃𝐿𝐴𝑇𝐸 = 0.9 × 𝐹𝑦 ( ) > 𝑀𝑀𝐴𝑋 .
4
4𝑀
𝑡𝑀𝐼𝑁 = = 29.3 𝑚𝑚 → 𝒖𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒃𝒑 = 𝟑𝟎 𝒎𝒎
0.9 ∗ 𝐹𝑦
Check the vertical stiffeners with the force produced by the concrete pressure:
Assume conservatively that 𝑓𝑝 is uniform in all the length of the upper plate
projection on the base plate. The model is the following:
A R A
X X
Figure 3-7: Determination for the concrete pressure reaction on the vertical
stiffeners.
𝑘𝑁 𝑏𝑓
𝑓 = 𝑓𝑝 𝑔 + 𝑏𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒 = 4.85 , 𝑋 = = 175 𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚 2
The reactions are:
Then:
3-17
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Combination 3:
𝑀𝑢3 = 200000 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚 , 𝑃𝑢3 = 𝑁𝑢3 = 2000 𝑘𝑁
Base plate dimensions from previous section (bending about the strong axis of
the column):
𝑁 = 730 𝑚𝑚, 𝐵 = 375 𝑚𝑚
Increase the width of the base plate: use 𝒔𝒆𝒅𝒈𝒆 = 𝟏𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎 → 𝑩 = 𝒔 + 𝟐𝒔𝒆𝒅𝒈𝒆 =
𝟑𝟗𝟓 𝒎𝒎. With this new width, all the verifications for combination 2 are OK.
Now:
𝑃 6𝑒
𝑓𝑝 𝑀𝐴𝑋 = 1+ = 12.64 𝑀𝑃𝑎 < 𝑓𝑝𝐴𝑉𝐴𝐼𝐿 = 12.8 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐵𝑁 𝑁
Check the base plate at an appropriate critical section. See Figure 3-6.
Using tables for the determination of this slab moments (Stiglat & Wippel
book):
𝑙𝑦
𝑙𝑦 = 𝑔 + 𝑏𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒 = 190 𝑚𝑚 , 𝑙𝑥 = 175 𝑚𝑚 , = 1.09 → 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓 = 12.7
𝑙𝑥
𝐾
𝐾 = 𝑓𝑝 𝑀𝐴𝑋 𝑙𝑥 𝑙𝑦 = 420 𝑘𝑁 → 𝑀𝑀𝐴𝑋 = = 33 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓
(Assume conservatively that the critical value of 𝑓𝑝𝑀𝐴𝑋 is constant all over the
slab).
𝑏𝑡 2
The design condition is that: 𝑀𝑛 = 𝜙𝐹𝑦 𝑍 𝐵𝐴𝑆𝐸𝑃𝐿𝐴𝑇𝐸 = 0.9 × 𝐹𝑦 ( ) > 𝑀𝑀𝐴𝑋 .
4
4𝑀
𝑡𝑀𝐼𝑁 = = 21 𝑚𝑚 → 𝒖𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒃𝒑 = 𝟑𝟎 𝒎𝒎
0.9 × 𝐹𝑦
Check the vertical stiffeners with the force produced by the concrete pressure:
Assume conservatively that 𝑓𝑝𝑀𝐴𝑋 is uniform in all the length of the upper plate
projection on the base plate. The model is the same shown in Figure 3-7.
𝑏𝑓
𝑓 = 𝑓𝑝𝑀𝐴𝑋 𝑔 + 𝑏𝑒𝑑𝑔𝑒 = 2.40 𝑘𝑁/𝑚𝑚, 𝑋 = = 175 𝑚𝑚
2
3-18
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Then:
max 𝑅, 𝐴 = 525 𝑘𝑁 < 𝜙𝑃𝑛 = 1294 𝑘𝑁 OK
3. Shear
𝑉𝑢 = 150 𝑘𝑁
Discussion:
When shear keys are used (see limit of 50 kN on the NCh2369.Of2003 code),
the anchor rods are supposed not to resist in shear. The shear is only carried
out by the shear key; and therefore it is necessary to separate the axial-
moment design from the shear design.
The shear key design shall be made considering a uniform stress due to
bearing with concrete (for transferring 𝑉𝑢 from the column to the concrete
foundation). For ductile behavior, the shear key must yield before the concrete
crushes in bearing.
When large earthquakes are expected; the direction of the shear loading is not
known. Therefore, there is the need for a shear key which resists in two
perpendicular directions, and its capacity should be verified in this both
directions.
An example of one of those shear keys is the cruciform shape. In this case it is
not so clear that the plastic behavior under a uniform load will occur near the
fixed edge. The reason is that, there is a very stiff element at the middle of the
face of the plate. Although at both sides of the middle stiff element it can
occur yielding of the plates (ductile behavior), the stiff element can carry more
much load leading to a non-ductile global behavior.
For this case, the capacity of the shear keys shall be determined considering
appropriate boundary conditions and considering the minimum load being able
to be transferred, according to the failure mechanism.
3-19
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
t2 G (grout)
Hsk 1
4
3 2
5
Bsk
Figure 3-8: Assumed yield lines for shear key cruciform shape.
Elevation view.
𝑏𝑡 2 𝑌𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡 𝑡 22
It is known that 𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 = 𝐹𝑦 ( ). It is possible to determine
4 4
on an assumed yield line its length 𝑌𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡 . With this nominal moment,
it is possible to determine the required total shear 𝑉𝑛 to produce a
hinge on the corresponding yield line assuming that this
“concentrated” force is applied at the gravity center of the geometric
shape that is located within the yield line; the stiff perpendicular
element and the grout line (the distance 𝑑 between the yield line and
the gravity center of this shape could be easily estimated, and
𝑀𝑛
therefore 𝑉𝑛 = ).
𝑑
For example, assume that 𝑉𝑢 presented on the example has not been already
amplified by this Ω𝑠𝑘 factor.
3
Therefore use a new 𝑉𝑢 = Ω𝑠𝑘 × 150 𝑘𝑁 = × 150 𝑘𝑁 = 225 𝑘𝑁. (Suppose that 𝑉𝑢
2
came from a shear force reduced by R=3, and for the shear key it has been
considered R*=2<3). The use of an amplification factor like this shall be
discussed within project specifications.
3-20
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
The shear key will be located at the center of the base plate. Consider the
following figures:
B
Bsk
t1
Nsk G
t2 N
Hsk
Vu
𝑉𝑢
The uniform load acting on the face perpendicular to 𝑉𝑢 is 𝑤 =
𝐵𝑠𝑘 −𝑡 2 𝐻 𝑠𝑘 −𝐺
(grout thickness is discounted).
Using only one side of the shear key face, the corresponding model is the
following:
Figure 3-10: Slab model for one side of the shear key face. Two embedded
sides and two free sides.
𝐵𝑠𝑘
𝐿𝑥 = = 125 𝑚𝑚, 𝐿𝑦 = 𝐻𝑠𝑘 = 220 𝑚𝑚
2
3-21
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Note:
If the grout thickness is discounted, then the correct slab model is with a
loaded area in the height 𝐿𝑦 − 𝐺 on the above figure, and not loaded near the
upper fixed edge. In this case, a conservative model has been used
considering all the loaded area in all the height 𝐿𝑦 .
From tables (Stiglat & Wippel book), use 𝐿𝑦 /𝐿𝑥 = 1.76 → 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓 = 3.81
Therefore the relation between the slab moment and the shear 𝑉𝑢 is:
𝑉𝑢
𝑤𝐿𝑥 𝐿𝑦 𝐿𝑥 𝐿𝑦
𝐵𝑠𝑘 −𝑡 2 𝐻 𝑠𝑘 −𝐺
𝑀= =
𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓
𝑁 𝑠𝑘
𝐸
Assuming a plastic behavior in bending ( 2
= 5.21 < 0.38 = 9.15),
𝑡1 𝐹𝑦
𝑡2
𝑀𝑛 = 𝑍𝐹𝑦 = 𝐹 = 50 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
4 𝑦
It is expected that 𝑀𝑛 > 𝑀. In the critical case: 𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀 and then solving for 𝑉𝑢 :
𝑁𝑠𝑘 − 𝑡2 𝐻𝑠𝑘 − 𝐺
𝑉𝑢 = 𝑀𝑛 × 𝑐𝑜𝑒𝑓 × = 264 𝑘𝑁
𝐿𝑥 𝐿𝑦
And therefore, the previous 𝑉𝑢 is the estimated capacity of the shear key.
For ductile behavior, the capacity of the shear key must be lesser than the
concrete bearing strength.
Note: The concrete bearing strength shall be calculated discarding the grout
thickness.
𝐴2
𝜙𝑃𝑝 = 0.60 × 0.85𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1 ≤ 0.60 × 1.7𝑓𝑐′ 𝐴1
𝐴1
(Re. ACI 318-05, 10.14.1 Section)
3-22
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Consider the shear key capacity to design this connection. Assume that the
shear is carried out principally by the portion of the cruciform shape that it is
parallel to the action 𝑉𝑢 . Use fillet welds.
Determine the minimum required welding size. Assume that at each side of
the cruciform shape portion, there is a length 𝐿 of fillet weld (refer to Figure
3-11):
𝑉𝑢
𝑡𝑤 > = 5.74 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑡𝑤 = 6 𝑚𝑚
0.75 × 0.6𝐹𝐸𝑋𝑋 0.707 × 2𝐿
Check with the minimum fillet weld size: Minimum thickness of the parts
joined=𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑡1 , 𝑡2 , 𝑡𝑏𝑝 = 24 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑡𝑤𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 8 𝑚𝑚 → 𝒖𝒔𝒆 𝒕𝒘 = 𝟖 𝒎𝒎.
(Re. AISC 360-05, Table J2.4)
Because 𝑉𝑢 can act in any direction, repeat the same fillet weld on the
perpendicular plate of the cruciform shape.
3-23
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Figure 3-11: Fillet welds scheme on the cruciform shape for a vertical 𝑉𝑢 .
Check rupture of the base metal to develop weld strength for the shear key to
base plate weld
Base plate is thicker than the shear key, therefore this verification is OK.
The connection of the column to the base plate is a bearing type one. As one
alternative, double sided fillet welds are used on a portion of the column web,
and single side fillet welds on the column flanges. Consider the following
figure:
3-24
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
𝑇 𝑈𝑃𝐿𝐼𝐹𝑇
𝑅1 = = 500 𝑘𝑁
2
Assume as an initial trial that the length of the flange fillet welds is 𝐿 = 𝑏𝑓 =
350 𝑚𝑚. The angle between weld axis and load is 𝜃 = 90°.
For the load combinations with moment (2 and 3), the fillet welds on the
flanges shall be capable of transfer:
max(𝑀𝑢 )
𝑅2 = = 1538 𝑘𝑁
𝑑 − 𝑡𝑓
With max
(𝑀𝑢 ) equal to the maximum moment from combinations 2 and 3.
The angle between weld axis and load is 𝜃 = 90°.
𝑉𝑢 = 264 𝑘𝑁
3-25
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Assume as an initial trial that 2𝑇 = 200 𝑚𝑚. The angle between weld axis and
load is 𝜃 = 0°.
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75 × 𝐹𝑤 𝐴𝑤 = 0.75 × 0.6𝐹𝐸𝑋𝑋 0.707𝑡𝑤 2𝑇 > 𝑉𝑢
→ 𝑡𝑤 ≥ 8.6 𝑚𝑚 → 𝒕𝒘 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎
Check the minimum fillet weld size: min 𝑡𝑐𝑤 , 𝑡𝑏𝑝 = 12 → 𝑡𝑤𝑀𝐼𝑁 = 5 𝑚𝑚 OK.
Check also that the fillet welds on the column flange are capable to transfer
the shear capacity of the shear key:
For column:
For column:
3-26
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Notes:
1) Anchorage to concrete has not been designed.
2) Anchor Bolts: 4 bolts ASTMF 1154 Gr. 36 Ø 38 mm.
3) Connections for vertical stiffeners and upper plate
are not designed.
Upper plate
PL 350x190x30 (typ).
A - A plan
A A
B B
Column
H350x350x165.6.
Stiffener plate
grout PL 305x190x25 (typ).
C C
(typ)
20
B - B plan Exterior of C - C plan
flange (Shear key)
10 Shear key to
base plate
10
Base plate L=150 mm
PL 730x395x30
(typ)
10
Column web 10 Shear key to
10 to base plate base plate
L=100 mm 10
L=150 mm
20
Exterior of
flange
3-27
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
This is a special case that is only mentioned for general purposes and is not
included in the numerical example.
Axial Force
The required strength for the brace connection in SCBF systems is given by
section 13.3 of AISC 341-05, which says that:
Tensile forces
For tensile forces, the required strength shall be the lesser of the following:
- The maximum load effect, according by the analysis of the forces that
can be transferred to the brace by the overall system.
Then,
𝑇𝑢 𝑏𝑟𝑎 𝑐𝑒 = min(R y Fy Ag , Tu analysis )
3-28
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
𝑇𝑢 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒 = 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔
Then, if the angle of the brace with respect the horizontal line at the level of
the base plate is 𝜃 (see Figure 3-13), the tensile force acting over the base
plate is:
𝑇𝑢 = 𝑃𝑢 𝑐𝑜𝑙 − 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒 sin
(𝜃)
Where, as has seen before in this manual, the axial solicitation for the column
is determined according to the load combination that gives the greater axial
tension, generally this combination is 0.9D – 1.4(EH + EV). Note that the
connection for the axial loads is positive on compression.
Brace
Base Plate
Compressive forces
For compressive forces, the required strength shall be at least equal or greater
than 1.1𝑅𝑦 𝑃𝑛 , where 𝑃𝑛 is the compressive nominal strength of the brace. Then,
for the base plate the compression force is:
3-29
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
Where in this case, 𝑃𝑢 𝑐𝑜𝑙 is determined according to the load combination that
gives the greatest compressive force for the column.
Shear Force
According to section 8.5b of AISC 341-05, the required shear strength for the
base plate connection is given by the summation of the required strength of
the steel elements at the base plate connection.
For the case of the column at the base plate, the required strength is already
known from the above example. For the braces, the axial tensile required
strength of the brace is:
𝑇𝑢 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒 = 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔
Then:
𝑉𝑢 = 𝑉𝑢 𝑐𝑜𝑙 + 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
cos
(𝜃)
Notes:
It is possible to also consider the compression force in order to
project it and obtain shear force, but since the compression force will
always be less or equal than the tensile required strength of the
brace, generally it is only needed to consider the tensile case.
It is important to also consider the direction of the forces on the brace
and on the base of the column for the proper signs.
Flexural Strength
According to section 8.5 of AISC 341-05, the required flexural strength for
column bases is given by the summation of the required strengths of the steel
elements at the connection.
According to section 13.3b, the required flexural strength of the brace is:
𝑀𝑢 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒 = 1.1𝑅𝑦 𝑀𝑝
The required flexural strength for braces may be neglected if the brace is
detailed in order that it can accommodate the inelastic rotations associated to
the post buckling deformations (braces will develop buckling that eventually
will generate plastic hinges at the ends of the brace). The accommodation of
3-30
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
the inelastic rotations is accomplished using single gusset plate with the brace
terminating before the line of restraint. For more information see Chapter 4 of
this Manual.
Axial Force
The required strength for the brace connection in OCBF systems is given by
section 14.4 of AISC 341-05, which says that:
- For the limit state of bolt slip, the required strength of the bracing
connection shall be determined according to the load combinations
stipulated by the building code, not including the use of the amplified
seismic load. This is because the bolt slip failure does not constitute
a connection failure, and the dissipation of energy that occurs product
of the bolt slip reduces the seismic response.
- For all the other limit states, the required strength is the expected
yield tensile strength of the brace 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 . The required strength needs
not exceed either of the following:
Therefoe the axial uplift design force for the base plate connection, considering
the brace is:
𝑇𝑢 = 𝑃𝑢 𝑐𝑜𝑙 − 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
sin
(𝜃)
Where 𝑃𝑢 𝑐𝑜𝑙 is given by the combination for the column that produces the
maximum uplift effect on the base plate and 𝜃 is the angle between the brace
and the horizontal line on the base plate.
Shear Force
According to section 8.5b of AISC 341-05, the required shear strength for the
base plate connection is given by the summation of the required strength of
the steel elements at the base plate connection.
3-31
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 3: BASE PLATE CONNECTIONS
For the case of the column that arrives to the base plate, the required strength
is already known from the above example. For the braces, the axial required
strength of the brace is:
𝑇𝑢 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒 = 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔
Then:
𝑉𝑢 = 𝑉𝑢 𝑐𝑜𝑙 + 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
cos
(𝜃)
Note:
It is important to consider the direction of the forces acting on the brace and
on the base of the column.
Flexural Strength
According to section 8.5 of AISC 341-05, the required flexural strength for
base plates is given by the summation of the required strengths of the steel
elements at the connection. However, for OCBF it is expected that the brace
will develop limited inelastic deformations. For this reason, it is not necessary
to consider the flexural strength of the brace that arrives to the base plate
connection.
3.4. References
3-32
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
4. BRACE CONNECTIONS
4.1. General Description of Seismic Braced Frames
Steel systems that contain braced frames are very efficient and economical
systems, because they resist lateral forces and displacements trough the axial
strength and stiffness of the brace members, with little or no bending until the
compression braces buckle.
There are several types of braced concentrically systems. Some examples are
graphically presented below:
Inverted Diagonal
V-Bracing V-Bracing V-Bracing
Bracing
Figure 4.1-1: Examples of Concentric Bracing Configurations.
Adapted from AISC 341-05, Fig. C-I-13.1
4-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
limited inelastic deformations. Therefore, they are designed for higher seismic
forces (higher than for SCBF systems) in order to take into account this limited
ductility. The design and construction procedure of OCBF systems is simpler
than in SCBF systems.
For SCBF systems, the use of tension only-bracing is not permitted according
to AISC 341-05 Code. Also, the Seismic Code requires that these systems
balance compression and tension braces. Along any line of bracing, braces
must be oriented so to engage at least 30%, but no more than 70% of the
total lateral force resisted by braces in tension.
4-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
2t
Gusset Plate
Note:
It is recommended to detail a slightly longer distance than the 2𝑡 minimum.
Typically, values from 2𝑡 to 4𝑡 are used due to practical dimensioning
requirements of the gusset plate. The distance shall be measured from a line
perpendicular to the end of the brace member, in order to ensure buckling
perpendicular to the plane of the frame.
4.2.a. NCh2369.0f2003:
There are also specific provisions for braced frames in section 8.3 of
the NCh2369.Of2003 Code. Some of them will be discussed later.
For horizontal braces apply section 8.7 of NCh2369.Of2003.
𝐸
Slenderness of brace members shall be lesser than 1.5𝜋 . This limit
𝐹𝑦
4-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑘𝐿
Slenderness of the brace members: ≤ 4.0 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 (Re. AISC 341-
𝑟
05, Section 13.2a). See the exception on the code for braces with
some specific requirements.
Required strength for braces: see section 13.2b. Note that this
section mentions that when the effective area of the bracing members
is less than the gross area, for example in slotted HSS braces at the
gusset plate, there are tensile strength requirements based upon the
limit state of fracture in the net section.
Lateral force distribution (alternate braces in tension and compression
for redundancy): see section 13.2c.
Column and braces must comply with width-thickness limitations
given in section 8.2b (Seismically Compact Sections, according to
Table I-8-1).
4-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
using a gusset plate, with the brace finishing before the line of
restraint (see detailing requirements in Figure 4.1-2)
Required compressive strength: 𝐶𝑟𝑒𝑞 ≥ 1.1𝑅𝑦 𝑃𝑛 , with 𝑃𝑛 equal to the
nominal compressive strength of the brace. Note that it is necessary
to consider the true effective length of the brace, the connection fixity
(in order to calulate k), and the material overstrength. Brace buckling
capacity stress 𝐹𝑐𝑟 should be based on the actual brace length in lieu
of the traditional work-point to work-point length commonly used in
analysis. Therefore, braces for this analysis are “shorter” and 𝐹𝑐𝑟 is
increased:
Figure 4.2-1: Brace effective length – Adapted from Steel Tips : Design of
Special Concentrically Braced Frames. Cochran & Honeck.
4-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
As said on the AISC 341-05 code, as a minimum one set of lateral braces is
required at the point of intersection of the V (or inverted V) braces; unless the
beam has enough out-of-plane strength and stiffness to ensure stability
between adjacent brace points (prevention of lateral torsional buckling).
K type bracing is not permitted on SCBF systems by the code. This is because
it is not desirable to have columns subjected to unbalanced lateral forces from
the braces, as these forces may contribute to column failures.
𝑘𝐿
For K, V or inverted-V systems: ≤ 4.0 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 (Re. AISC 341-05,
𝑟
Section 14.2). There is a exception in the code for HSS braces filled
with concrete.
According to the code user note, braces that are designed for tension only are
not adequate for K ,V and inverted V configurations.
4-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
For bolt slip limit state: the required strength of the connection shall
be obtained using the load combinations of the applicable building
code, not using the amplified seismic load.
For any other limit state, the required strength is the expected yield
strength in tension: 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 .
Notes:
1. The required strength of the connection does not require to exceed
either the maximum force that can be developed by the system nor a
load effect based upon using the amplified seismic load.
2. The bolt slip limit state does not constitute a connection failure and
the associated energy dissipation can serve to reduce seismic
response. This fact is reflected in that this limit state is designed for a
lower force level than other limit states.
Note that the design of gusset plates shall include consideration of buckling.
Tip:
Limits states of OCBF systems are the same as for the SCBF systems. However
in OCBF systems there are no requirements for ductility at the hinge zone, on
the gusset plates. It is possible to design a connection for “OCBF forces” and
add some ductility requirements from SBCF systems.
4-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
There are many methods for calulating the force transfer on bracing
connections, and there is controversy on which one of those methods provide
safer and more economical connections. According to Thornton (1991), the
Uniform Force Method (recommended by the manual) best predicts both the
available strength and critical limit state of the connection; it also leads to
more economical and simpler designs.
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐
𝑒𝑏 = , 𝑒𝑐 = (half of the beam and column depth). For a column web
2 2
support 𝑒𝑐 ~0.
4-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝛼 : distance from the external face of column flange (or web) to the centroid of
the gusset-beam connection.
𝛽 : distance from the external face of beam flange to the centroid of the
gusset-column connection.
Figure 4.2-5: Column free body diagram and beam free body diagram.
Adapted from AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed.
Fig. 13-2(c) and Fig. 13-2(d)
4-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑉 = vertical component of 𝑃.
𝛼 − 𝛽𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 = 𝑒𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 − 𝑒𝑐
𝑟= 𝛼 + 𝑒𝑐 2 + 𝛽 + 𝑒𝑏 2
𝛽 𝑒𝑏 𝑒𝑐 𝛼
𝑉𝑐 = 𝑃 , 𝑉𝑏 = 𝑃 , 𝐻𝑐 = 𝑃 , 𝐻𝑏 = 𝑃
𝑟 𝑟 𝑟 𝑟
Note:
There are special cases listed on the AISC Manual of Steel Construction for
force transmission on bracing connections:
4-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Note:
Make sure that when using the UFM method for designing the connections
between gusset and column or beam framing members, these connections
shall be centered or nearly centered on the corresponding gusset edge. Note
that it is not necessary to use all the gusset edge length for performing the
connection (for example a welded one); in practice welders generally weld all
the gusset edge length.
For diagonal bracing connections, the available strength is calulated from the
applicable limit states of the bolts, welds and connecting elements; depending
on the specific case that we are analyzing.
3. Desirable details that avoid sharing forces between bolts and welds
Reference:
Steel Tips: Seismic Design and Behavior of Gusset Plates. Abolhassan Astaneh.
1998.
Most of these failures can be related to a non-ductile design and poor detailing
of the gusset plate connections. Therefore, design and detailing of gusset
plates must be made to prevent brittle modes of failure, and to ensure a
desirable ductile behavior.
4-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Whitmore section:
lw lw
As said before, when a bracing member buckles out-of the plane of the braced
frame, the plastic hinge forms in the gusset plate. These plastic hinges need to
be free to rotate, because otherwise the gusset plates could fracture in a small
number of cycles. To ensure free rotation, the recommended detail is that the
bracing member should finish at a distance at least 2𝑡 away from the re-
entrant corner of the gusset plate.
To prevent the free edge buckling of the gusset plate prior to the gusset plates
reaching their maximum compression capacity, it is recommended to comply
𝐿𝑓𝑔 𝐸
with < 0.75 . 𝐿𝑓𝑔 is the length of the free edge of the gusset plate and 𝑡 is
𝑡 𝐹𝑦
Some tips and requirements with regard to ductility issues are given by
Astaneh:
4-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Note that in the case of braces connected with bolts, they may require that the
end of the braces be reinforced to keep the failure out of the reduced section
created by the bolt holes (in the effective area). Also, if hollow structural
sections are used for braces, there is a discount in the net area when they
reach the gusset plates (called knife plates) and may require net section
reinforcement plates. In general, welded connections eliminate the “effective
area” problem.
For the connection between the gusset plate and the beam or column, note
that if flange welds are used, weld access holes shall be discounted.
If welds are used to join gusset plates to the framing members (column or
beam), according to the AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed., the
connection should be designed for the larger of the peak stress and 1.25 (weld
4-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
ductility factor) times the average stress. The weld size needs no to be larger
than to develop the strength of the gusset.
These critical sections can yield under a combination of axial load, bending and
shear. The following interaction equation can be used:
2 4
𝑁 𝑀 𝑉
+ + ≤ 1.0
𝜙𝑁𝑦 𝜙𝑀𝑝 𝜙𝑉𝑦
𝑁, 𝑉, 𝑀 : Axial load, shear load, and bending moment on the critical section.
𝑁𝑦 =yield axial capacity of the cross section (𝐴𝐹𝑦 ), 𝑉𝑦 = yield shear capacity of
the cross section (0.6𝐴𝐹𝑦 ), 𝑀𝑝 = plastic moment capacity, 𝑀𝑝 = 𝑍𝐹𝑦 .
There are some other options like the Von Mises yield criterion, which can be
used for gusset connected edges stresses:
2 2
𝑁 𝑉
+3 ≤ 1.0, with 𝐴 = area of the edge section.
𝜙𝐹𝑦 𝐴 𝜙𝐹𝑦 𝐴
The gusset plate can buckle due to compression just beyond the end of the
bracing member. To compute the buckling capacity is permitted to use
Whitmore’s width.
4-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
The buckling capacity is: 𝑃𝑐𝑟 = 𝐴𝑔𝑤 𝐹𝑐𝑟 , where 𝐹𝑐𝑟 is the critical stress acting on a
unitary width gusset strip parallel to the axis of the brace within the
Whitmore’s effective width (typically the longest strip is used, nevertheless it
is also possible to use an average value of 3 different lengths, the central and
the two extreme strips from the Whitmore section). These strips are treated as
columns. See the following figures:
As recommendations for gusset detailing, at the brace end of the gusset plate,
a minimum of 1” (25 mm) offset from the brace to the gusset sloped edge
should be provided. The sloped angle measured from the brace axis, starting
from this edge, should be greater than 30° in order to maximize the Whitmore
section width for gusset plate compression strength, resulting in thinner gusset
plates.
𝐿𝑔𝑓
Meet the limit for as discussed above. Horizontal or vertical stiffeners could
𝑡
be added to reduce 𝐿𝑓𝑔 . The location of the stiffener must be verified to ensure
that it does not cross the yield line of the gusset plate.
4-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
For ductile behavior, the capacity of the gusset in block shear failure should be
greater than 𝜙(1.1𝑅𝑦 ) times its yielding capacity at the Whitmore’s area.
For ductile behavior, make sure that the tensile capacity of the gusset fracture
on the Whitmore’s net area (𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑤 ) should be greater than 𝜙(1.1𝑅𝑦 ) times
its yielding capacity at the Whitmore’s area.
According to the Chilean code, the connections of the seismic braces shall be
designed to resist 100% of the tensile capacity of the braces, considering their
gross area. The Chilean code does not include the 𝑅𝑦 factor (that accounts for
material over strength) in this calulation (unlike the AISC 341-05 code). This
aspect could be discussed and stipulated on project specifications.
Note that there are some exceptions on AISC 341-05 Code for the
determination of the required strength of the connection relating to “the
maximum force that can be developed by the system”. It is important to check
that this force (and any other possible design force) is larger than the 100%
tensile capacity of the brace (Chilean code requirement) because otherwise the
design would not meet the NCh2369.Of2003 requirements.
4-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
For force transfer, the most used method is the Uniform Force Method (UFM)
described in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed. With the design
force of the brace connection and the application of UFM, it is possible to
obtain the forces on the gusset edges in order to design the respective
connections (bolted or welded) to the beam or column.
When more than one brace arrive to the beam-column connection, all the
forces of those braces must be taken into account, considering the possibility
of braces in tension and compression, and also the different directions of the
forces.
The following limit states are related to a general case (SCBF or OCBF
systems). For a particular system, only the corresponding limit states apply.
4-17
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Note that column or beam web local buckling could be prevented choosing an
adequate thickness of their webs or adding stiffener plates.
Figure 4.3-1: Pipe bracing connection with out of plane hinging details.
Steel Tips: Design of Special Concentric Braced Frames. Cochran & Honeck.
Fig. 6-1b.
4-18
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Figure 4.3-2: H bracing connection with out of plane hinging details, and
without out of plane hinging details. Steel Tips: Design of Special Concentric
Braced Frames. Cochran & Honeck. Fig. 6-1c and 6-1d.
Typically, the difference is located at the connection of the brace with the
gusset plate. If HSS sections are used, the connection is commonly made
reducing the section of the brace and developing a welded connection with the
gusset plate (knife plate). When other sections are used, for example H
sections or L sections, the connection between the brace and the gusset plate
is generally made from a bolted and welded combination.
As noted from the figures above, the “ductility details” include the 2t offset on
the gusset plate.
Typically, when HSS brace sections (for example pipes, square or rectangular
hollow sections) arrive to gusset plates (called knife plate on this cases), a
reduction on the brace section is developed in order to “slot it” into the knife
plate. If this section is left unreinforced, net section fracture will be the
governing limit state and brace ductility may be significantly reduced (see
requirements on section 13.2b of AISC 341-05 for SCBF systems).
A typical detail of the reduced section for HSS sections is shown in the figure
below (from Rafael Sabelli: AISC Seismic Braced Frames):
4-19
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Figure 4.3-3: Typical Detailing of the reduced section at Knife Plate. Adapted
from AISC Seismic Braced Frames: Design Concepts and Connections. Rafael
Sabelli.
According to section 13.2b of AISC 341-05 Code, the expected tensile strength
of the reduced section needs to be greater than the required tensile strength
of the brace. In other words:
𝐴𝑛𝑒𝑡 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦
𝜙𝑅𝑡 𝐹𝑢 𝑈𝐴𝑛𝑒𝑡 ≥ 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 → ≥
𝐴𝑔 𝜙𝑅𝑡 𝐹𝑢 𝑈
Typically, they are bolted connections, using flange splice plates bolted to the
H section and welded to the gusset plate. Also, it is possible to use web plates
attached to the brace member and to the gusset plate.
Note that in this case there is also a reduction on the gross area of the brace
members due to the bolt holes, but unlike the previous case, splice plates are
being added immediately, increasing the net area of the cross section.
For bolted connections, bolts shall be high strength, pretensioned, with class A
faying surface. It is recommended (but not an obligation) to design these
connections as slip critical (class A faying surface) checking also bearing
failure.
4-20
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Note that in the same connection, it is not allowed to share the design forces
between bolts and welds since slip critical bolts may slip under earthquake
loading.
For calculating the average stress on the weld; for example if Uniform Force
Method is used, the weld is subjected to a combination of shear (𝑉) and axial
force (𝑁). If double fillet welds are used (typical case), each one of length 𝐿;
the average shear force on the welded union can be conservatively evaluated
as:
2 2
𝑁 𝑉
𝑅= +
2𝐿 2𝐿
For LRFD design, the requirement is that the design strength of the fillet weld
of unitary length be greater than 𝑅 (it is optional to take into account the angle
𝜃 of the loading with respect to the weld axis). Also, the ductility factor
discussed in 4.2.d (1.25) shall be included for the design. Note also that,
according to the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, the weld size needs not be
larger than to develop the strength of the gusset (this is optional).
Note that the same approach shown before can be used on stresses or forces
format. If there is a bending moment acting on the gusset edge, the stress can
𝑀𝑦
be obtained easily with the formula for slender elements (“elastic
𝐼
𝑁 𝑉
stresses”); and also for axial stress and for shear stress. As a commentary,
𝐴 𝐴
these formulas are not 100% correct for gusset plates, but they are used only
because there is seemingly no other alternative. Note that when there is no
moment on the interface; the peak stress is equal to the average stress.
Double clip angles (L sections) are generally used in bolted gusset to column
(or beam) connections. Prying action occurs on the bolts when they are
subject to tensile forces. Forces within a connection which result from the
4-21
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
These connections shall be designed to transfer the forces on the beam (N, V,
M) obtained from analysis.
4.3.b. Brace to beam column connections with a small offset from the
working point
This case is a variation from the previous case, in which the work-point
location is on the intersection of the center of gravity of brace, beam, and
column members.
But, in order to get smaller gusset plates, sometimes the line of the center of
gravity of the brace does not coincide with the framing members lines,
creating an eccentric working point. Typically, the work-point is located at the
corner of the gusset and therefore this eccentricity will result in a moment that
shall need to be transferred by the column and/or the beam (this extra
moment shall be considered in the design of the framing members and their
connections).
For this case, see the Uniform Force Method, special case 1, as described on
the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Ed.
4.3.c. X Braces
4-22
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Generally, both braces that arrive to an X-brace connection have the same
length and they have similar sectional and material properties. The design
forces are assumed to be the same obtained for bracing connections (as
described above for OCBF or SCBF systems) and it is supposed that one
diagonal is in compression and the other one in tension. Note that the UFM is
not used on this case, because there are only concentrically axial loads.
The problem is that the assumption of one tension diagonal and other
compression diagonal may be unconservative and not realistic for some cases.
According to section 8.3 of NCh2369.Of2003 Code (Braced Frames), the
diagonal elements in an X brace shall be connected at the point of intersection.
This point can be considered fixed in the out-of-plane direction, to calulate the
members out-of-plane buckling lengths when one of the diagonals is
continuous. The assumption made on the Chilean Code, limits the effective
length of the compression diagonal to 0.5 times the diagonal length for simply
supported boundary conditions (recommendations of Picard and Beaulieu).
This may be unconservative in some situations, when the assumption of one
diagonal in tension and the other in compression is not realistic.
For example, when there is a seismic load perpendicular to the plane of the
diagonals, there is the possibility that both braces may fall under compression,
and in that case, the transverse bracing provided by one diagonal to the other
is significantly reduced, and the buckling length should be considered to be
equal to total length of the diagonal. This situation must be considered in the
design of the X brace connection.
4-23
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Limit states for this case are practically the same as the described for beam-
to-column bracing connections, but applicable to this specific case. The
following limit states are related to a general case (SCBF and OCBF systems).
For a particular system, only the corresponding limit states apply.
4-24
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
A problem that occurred on these connections is that the girders are only used
to restrict the buckling effective length of adjacent columns, and have thin
web thickness, as compared to gusset thicknesses at the crossing point.
Therefore, the webs of the girders had to be retrofitted in order to transfer the
loads coming from bracing elements.
The other problem that occurs is related to the overall stability of the complete
brace-gusset-girder system (similar to the problems described above on this
section). For retrofitting, stiffeners are added to the girder web in order to
increase the torsion strength of the system, and also a T shape stiffener is
added for constraining the complete system to work together, to provide
additional torsional stiffness and increase the critical buckling load.
4-25
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
It is important to note that the out of plane buckling is a potential failure mode
(especially when braces are both under compression), and therefore, the
midspan connection should be analyzed and detailed properly to increase the
rotational stiffness.
Use girder webs with thicknesses similar to the gusset thickness (because they
also transfer the brace loads) and vertical stiffeners, if needed, to avoid more
retrofitting. Additionally, if the girders are used for restricting the buckling
effective length of columns, if they are rotated 90° (or they have bigger
sections) they continue to accomplish their mission, and the rotational stiffness
of the connection at midspan increases.
SCBF
The required strength for beams, their connections and supporting
members, shall be calculated considering no support of the braces to
the beam for dead and live loads, using the applicable load
combinations.
(Re AISC 341-05 13.4a)
4-26
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
For the required strength of the connection of the braces, consider the
provisions of the section 13.3 of the AISC 341-05, which have been described
above.
Braces in SCBF shall meet the requirements of section 8.2b of AISC 341-05,
which refer to the seismically compact shapes requirements.
OCBF
Lateral bracing requirements for both flanges of the beam at the connection
shall follow provisions of Appendix A of the AISC 360-05.
(Re AISC 341-05 14.3(2))
4-27
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
For the limit state of bolt slip, the required strength of the
connections shall be taken as the force calulated with the load
combinations stipulated by applicable the building code, not including
the amplified seismic load. On the other hand, for other limit states,
the required strength is the expected yield strength in tension of the
brace: 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 . However the required strength for the connection does
not need to exceed the maximum force that the system can develop,
or a load effect that is based in the use of the amplified seismic load.
(Re. AISC 341-05 14.4)
Note: For V braces and inverted V braces, it is not recommended for the
braces to be designed as tension only members. (Re. AISC 341-05 14.2)
Braces in OCBF systems shall meet the requirements of section 8.2b of AISC
341-05, which refers to seismically compact shape requirements.
NCh2369.Of2003 Provisions:
Both bottom and top flanges of the beam shall be provided with
lateral support in order to resist a lateral load of 2% of the nominal
strength of the flange (0.02𝐹𝑦 𝑏𝑓 𝑡).
(Re NCh2369.Of2003 8.3.5)
Force transfer mechanism for V brace connections is simpler than the case of
beam-column brace connection, in which the gusset plate of the connection is
4-28
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
adjacent to the beam and column. A reasonable method for transferring forces
shall be used.
For V braces and inverted V braces, the gusset plate has only one edge of
connection, so the force transfer is direct. Consider the following connection:
Pu Tu
1 2
w.p.
𝑉 = 𝑃𝑢 cos 𝜃1 + 𝑇𝑢 cos 𝜃2
𝑇 = 𝑇𝑢 sin 𝜃1 − 𝑃𝑢 sin 𝜃2
𝑑𝑏
𝑀= 𝑉
2
Where 𝜃1 and 𝜃2 are the respective angles of the arriving braces with respect
to the beam center line, and 𝑑𝑏 is the depth of the beam. It is important to
notice that the calulation of these forces is totally independent of the
assumptions that are made in order to obtain 𝑃𝑢 and 𝑇𝑢 .
For a general case, the following limit states verifications shall be done:
4-29
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Gusset Verifications:
1. Introduction
Horizontal braces have the function of transfering forces between the frames
that are part of the horizontal forces resisting system, and/or to provide
structural redundancy. Struts are elements that resist only axial loads, and
they have the function of reducing the buckling length of columns, giving
lateral support to beams, and to transfer forces between frames.
2. Horizontal Braces
4-30
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Like all seismic diagonals, they shall be designed for 100% of their
gross section tensile capacity.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 8.5.2)
Limit states used for the case of vertical braces also apply for the case of
horizontal braces.
3. Struts
As the case of horizontal braces, the design of connections for struts does not
introduce any new limit state or provision, however, it is very important to
discuss what a strut is.
What is a strut?
The elements that are part of a floor system have different functions,
according to the structure of the system. There are elements that primarily
behave in a flexural, axial, or combined way. However there are elements that
were intended to work as a beam, but the analysis shows a combined flexural
and axial behavior. A problem may occur if the design is done focusing in the
flexural behavior, not considering the axial force to which the element is
subject to.
4-31
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
From analysis, it is possible to deduct that beam A of the plan view shown in
Figure 4.3-8 can be subjected to axial loads if the diagonal horizontal braces
arriving at beam A have an asymmetric geometry or if the pair of braces work
at different levels of strength. In Figure 4.3-8 another case of elements
considered as beams and that can result having axial forces is shown.
In Figure 4.3-9 there are several elements that are beams, for example beam
B (enclosed in a circle) is clearly subject to transverse loads, which generate
bending moments in the weak axis of the beam. However this beam can also
provide lateral support to the main beams of the system (which are
4-32
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
perpendicular to beam B), and therefore, it can develop important axial forces,
so it shall be considered as a strut while designing.
If the beam has an axial force, it is important to design the element both as a
strut and as beam. If the beam is designed as hinged at the ends (simply
supported condition), the end connections would be designed as shear
connections. But, for example, the shear connections showed in Figure 4.3-10
are not intended for axial loads.
a) b)
Figure 4.3-9: Double Angle Shear Connection: a) Column to beam connection,
b) Beam to beam connection.
Therefore, it is very important to verify the effect of the axial load of the beam
into the connection. Furthermore, the axial resistance of the bolts in this type
of connections, which are subjected to tensile load, is reduced due to the
prying effect in the angle, which generates an increment of the stresses
produced by the tensile forces in the bolts. AISC Manual of Steel Construction
13th Ed. contains several expressions for evaluating the prying effect.
The ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures states that double and
single angle connections are not adequate to resist axial forces, and
recommends the shear tab connection.
4-33
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
4.4. References
Steel Tips:
X-braces information:
A. Picard and D. Beaulieu, 3rd quarter of 1987 and 4th quarter of 1988,
“Design of diagonal cross bracings (Discussion by Sayed Stoman)”.
Engineering Journal, AISC.
S. Stoman, 1989,“Effective length spectra for cross bracings”. Journal
of Structural Engineering, ASCE.
Ali Davaran, 2001, “Effective Length Factor for Discontinuous X-
Bracing Systems”. Journal of Engineering Mechanics.
R. Shankar Nair, 1997 4th quarter, “Practical Application of Energy
Methods to Structural Stability Problems”. Engineering Journal, AISC.
Jiho Moon, Ki-Yong Yoon, Tong-Seok Han, Hak-Eun Lee , 2007, “Out
of Plane Buckling and Design of X-Bracing Systems with
Discontinuous Diagonals”. Journal of Constructional Steel Research.
Rafael Sabelli and Douglas Hohbach, 1999, “Design of Cross Braced
Frames for Predictable Buckling Behavior”. Journal of Structural
Engineering, ASCE.
4-34
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369.Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). All welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements shown in the code.
(Re.NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)
The decision of using OCBF or SCBF design must be done considering the
seismic force strength level required and a discussion with the seismic
reviewer. According to common design practice, the OCBF system was chosen
for this example.
Use NCh2369.Of2003 for the calculation of loads. Suppose that the unfactored
loads on the brace are:
4-35
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Compression case:
Tension case:
Suppose that brace, column, and beam sections are adequate to resist and
transfer the factored forces obtained from the structural analysis.
Column
Beam
Figure 4.5-1: Connection to be designed. Frontal and plan view of column and
clip angles.
Gusset
Brace
4-36
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Brace section:
Column section:
Beam section:
Material properties:
Use for members, gusset, clip angles and splice plates A250 ESP
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎, 𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎
WELDS: E70 electrode.
Width-thicknesses limitations:
4-37
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑏𝑓 𝐸
𝜆𝑓 = = 7.95 ≤ 0.30 = 8.5
2𝑡𝑓 𝐹𝑦
𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑓 𝐸
𝜆𝑤 = = 30.6 ≤ 1.49 = 42.1
𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
In the Chilean NCh2369.Of2003 Code, there are similar requirements at
section 8.3, Braced Frames:
𝑏𝑓 𝐸𝑘 𝑐 4
𝜆𝑓 = = 7.95 ≤ 0.64 = 15.4 with 0.35 ≤ 𝑘𝑐 = = 0.72 ≤ 0.763
2𝑡 𝑓 𝐹𝑦
𝑡𝑤
𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑓 𝐸
𝜆𝑤 = = 30.6 ≤ 1.49 = 42.1
𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
Column (built-up sections):
𝑏𝑓 𝐸𝑘 𝑐 4
𝜆𝑓 = = 10.2 ≤ 0.64 = 15.4 with 0.35 ≤ 𝑘𝑐 = = 0.68 ≤ 0.763
2𝑡 𝑓 𝐹𝑦
𝑡𝑤
𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑓 𝐸
𝜆𝑤 = = 33.8 ≤ 1.49 = 42.1
𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
Both column and brace sections meet the most stringent requirements of both
codes.
According to the Chilean code the slenderness of the bracing elements must be
less than 1.5𝜋 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 ~4.71 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 .
Therefore, using 𝐿𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒 = 6800 𝑚𝑚, and remembering that is more accurate to
use the actual brace length in lieu of the traditional work-point to work-point
length:
𝑘𝑥 = 1.0 (in – plane buckling)
𝑘𝑦 = 1.0 (out-of-plane buckling)
𝑘𝐿𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑘𝐿𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
Then: = = 73.7 < 4.71 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 = 133.2 OK
𝑟 𝑚 í𝑛 𝑟𝑦
4-38
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Calculate the compressive strength of the brace: 𝜙𝑃𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑔 = 3115 𝑘𝑁, with
𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.658𝐹 𝑒 × 𝐹𝑦 = 188 𝑀𝑃𝑎.
2. Design forces
For bolt slip limit state in OCBF systems: the required strength of the
connection shall be obtained using the load combinations of the
applicable building code, not using the amplified seismic load (Ω0
factor).
As commented before, the Chilean code does not impose the slip critical limit
state check for bolts (only requires for bolts to be prestressed to 70% of the
tensile nominal strength of the bolts).
For any other limit state, check only in tension for the expected yield
strength of the brace: 𝑇𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 . Note that this requirement is a
little more stringent than the NCh2369.2003 requirement.
The required strength of the connection does not require exceeding either the
maximum force that can be developed by the system, nor the load calculated
using the amplified seismic load on load combinations.
The design done here will be conservative, so the required strength of the
connection will be taken as the larger value between the required tensile and
compressive forces (except for slip-critical limit state). For the design forces,
the most stringent conditions between NCh2369.Of2003 and AISC 341-05 will
be chosen.
Note that the design of gusset plates shall include consideration of buckling
(the compressive force must be considered).
4-39
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
According to the previous comments, divide the design forces for tension and
compression cases on the brace.
(𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 , 𝑇𝑢𝐶𝑂𝑀𝐵𝑂𝑆 )
𝑇𝑢 = max
𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 4615 𝑘𝑁
Note:
Use 𝑅𝑦 = 1.0 instead of 𝑅𝑦 = 1.5 for A250 ESP steel (similar to ASTM A36),
according to AISC 341 table I-6-1. With this, the design is unconservative
respect to AISC 341-05 requirements but still meets the NCh2369.Of2003
code.
Note:
If using a design force as 𝑇1 equal to the maximum force that can be developed
by the system or load effect based upon using the amplified seismic load, in
order to comply with NCh2369.Of2003 requirements, check that 𝑇1 to be
greater than 𝑇2 which is the 100% of the brace tensile capacity. Always
discuss, in a previous design stage, with the seismic reviewer about the design
forces for brace connections.
4-40
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
The design forces are (except for slip critical limit state):
𝑻𝒖 = 𝟒𝟔𝟏𝟓 𝒌𝑵
𝑷𝒖 = 𝟑𝟏𝟏𝟓 𝒌𝑵
The connection is going to be a bolted one. First, distribute the brace force
proportionally to web and flange areas:
𝑇𝑢 𝐴𝑤 𝑇𝑢 𝑡 𝑤
Force on the web: 𝑇𝑢𝑤 = = = 765 𝑘𝑁. Similarly: 𝑃𝑢𝑤 = 516 𝑘𝑁
𝐴𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝐴𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
𝑇𝑢 𝑏 𝑓 𝑡 𝑓
Force on each flange: 𝑇𝑢𝑓 = = 1925 𝑘𝑁. Similarly: 𝑃𝑢𝑓 = 1299 𝑘𝑁
𝐴𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
Flanges:
𝑆𝐶 𝑏 𝑓 𝑡𝑓
𝑇𝑢𝑓 = 1925 𝑘𝑁, and for slip-critical limit state: 𝑇𝑢𝑓 = 𝑇𝑢𝐶𝑂𝑀𝐵𝑂𝑆 × = 943 𝑘𝑁.
𝐴𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
4-41
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑠𝑐
𝑘𝑁 𝑇𝑢𝑓
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 149 → 𝑁𝐵 = = 6.3. Use 𝑵𝑩 =10 bolts in the flange, distributed on 2
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡 𝜙𝑅 𝑛
rows of 5 bolts each one.
Shear check:
𝑇𝑢𝑓
For single shear on bolts, use (two shear planes). Therefore:
2
T uf
= 963 𝑘𝑁 ≤ 𝜙𝐹𝑛𝑣 𝐴𝑏 𝑁𝐵 , 𝜙 = 0.75 (Re. AISC 360-05, J3.6)
2
Use 𝜙=0.75 (LRFD), 𝐿𝑐 = clear distance in the direction of the force between
the edge of the hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material,
try 𝒕 = 𝟐𝟐 𝒎𝒎 (flange plate thickness), 𝐹𝑢 = 400 𝑀𝑃𝑎, 𝑑=nominal bolt diameter
= 22 mm. Place the bolts on the flange plate (see Figure 4.5-3).
e3 (N b -1)*e1 e3 e3 (N b -1)*e1 e3
h
b/2 bf b
b/2
bg i
Gusset Brace
g
gap
The values of the distances 𝑒1 , 𝑒3 , 𝑔 (bolts gage) , , and 𝑖 are shown in the
following table:
4-42
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
e1 (mm) 70
e3 (mm) 40
g (mm) 182
h (mm) 34
i (mm) 30
Table 4.5-1
Note: in order to comply with the requirements of AISC 360-05 code for bolt
8
spacing between bolts and distance to the edges, use 𝑒1 > 𝑑 (preferably 3d).
3
Also note that the “i” dimension is measured from the fillet toe of the brace
web.
Bolts shall have a gage so that perforations do not enter into the zone of the
fillet toe of the brace web.
𝒃 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎 𝒕 = 𝟐𝟐 𝒎𝒎
Note that this plate thickness is the same as the brace flange thickness.
Additional geometry checks:
𝑏 𝑏
𝑔 + + + 2 = 350 𝑚𝑚 = 𝑏𝑓
2 2
𝑡𝑤 𝑏𝑓
𝑖 + + 𝑏 + + 𝑠 = 175 𝑚𝑚 =
2 2
OK
With the above values:
2.4𝑑𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 465 𝑘𝑁
Interior bolts:
4-43
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑑 𝑜𝑙𝑒
1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 296 𝑘𝑁 , with 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒3 − and 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 is 24 mm diameter, of the
2
standard hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M).
Considering all the bolts for the flange brace side (N° of exterior bolts =2, N°
of interior bolts =10-2=8):
𝑇𝑢𝑓
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 3231 𝑘𝑁 > = 963 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Remember that the number of slip planes is 2 and the inner flange plates and
outer flange plates are the same thickness.
Web side:
𝑆𝐶 𝑡 𝑤
𝑇𝑢𝑤 = 765 𝑘𝑁 and for slip-critical limit state: 𝑇𝑢𝑤 = 𝑇𝑢𝐶𝑂𝑀𝐵𝑂𝑆 × = 375 𝑘𝑁
𝐴𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
𝑅𝑛 = 𝜇𝐷𝑢 𝑠𝑐 𝑇𝑏 𝑁𝑠
(Per bolt)
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq.J3-4)
Then:
𝑘𝑁 𝑠𝑐
𝑇𝑢𝑤
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 149 → 𝑁𝐵 = = 2.5 Use 𝑵𝑩 =4 bolts in the web, distributed in 2 rows
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡 𝜙𝑅 𝑛
of 2 bolts each one.
Shear check:
𝑇𝑢𝑤
For single shear in bolts, use (two shear planes):
2
T uw
= 383 𝑘𝑁 ≤ 𝜙𝐹𝑛𝑣 𝐴𝑏 𝑁𝐵 , 𝜙 = 0.75 (Re. AISC 360-05, J3.6)
2
For ASTM A490 Bolts with threads included in the shear plane:
4-44
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Use 𝜙=0.75 (LRFD), 𝐿𝑐 = clear distance in the direction of the force, between
the edge of the hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material,
try 𝑡 = 10 𝑚𝑚 (web plate thickness; note that this is equal to brace web
thickness), 𝐹𝑢 = 400 𝑀𝑝𝑎 , 𝑑 = nominal bolt diameter = 22 mm.
Place the bolts on the web plate (see Figure 4.5-4Figure 4.5-4):
e3 e1*(Nb-1) e3
e3 e1 *(Nb-1) e3
web plate
e4
b g
e4
Figure 4.5-4: Bolts positions scheme on web plate. Note: 𝑁𝑏 means the
number of bolts per row.
e1 (mm) 80
e3 (mm) 50
g (mm) 90
e4 (mm) 60
Table 4.5-2
Assume trial values for plate dimensions (see Figure 4.5-4Figure 4.5-4):
4-45
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
The dimensions of each web plate must fit in the brace web height.
𝒃 = 𝟐𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎 𝒕 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎
Interior bolts:
Exterior bolts:
𝑑 𝑜𝑙𝑒
1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 182 𝑘𝑁 , with 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒3 − and 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 is 24 mm diameter, from the
2
standard hole for M22 bolts. (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M)
Considering all the bolts for the flange brace side (N° of exterior bolts =2, N°
of interior bolts =4-2=2):
𝑇𝑢𝑤
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 590 𝑘𝑁 > = 383 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
The number of slip planes is 2 and both left and right web plates are the same
size.
Brace side:
Compression
𝐿 = 2𝑒3 + 𝑔𝑎𝑝 5 𝑚𝑚 = 85 𝑚𝑚
4-46
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Check one of the two flange plates per side (i.e. take 1 of a total of 4 flange
𝑃 𝑢𝑓 𝑡
plates on the flange). Therefore the design force is = 325 𝑘𝑁. Use 𝑟 = =
4 12
𝑘𝐿
6.35 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑘 = 1.0 to obtain = 13.4 < 25 → Ch. J applies.
𝑟
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.4)
Therefore,
𝑃 𝑢𝑓
𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 → 𝜙𝑃𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝑏𝑡 = 495 𝑘𝑁 > = 325 𝑘𝑁 OK
4
𝑇𝑢𝑓
𝜙𝑇𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝑏𝑡 = 495 𝑘𝑁 > = 481 𝑘𝑁 OK
4
𝑇𝑛 = 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒 → 𝜙𝑇𝑛 = 0.75𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒
𝑇𝑢𝑓
𝜙𝑇𝑛 = 488 𝑘𝑁 > = 481 𝑘𝑁 OK
4
Block shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤ 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡
𝜙 = 0.75, 𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0
4-47
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 10
For this connection, the number of bolts per side is 𝑁𝑏 = = =5
2 2
Then:
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 𝑡 𝑒3 + 𝑁𝑏 − 1 𝑒1 = 7040 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐴𝑔𝑣 − 𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡 𝑁𝑏 − 0,5 = 4466 𝑚𝑚2
𝑏
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = − 0,5𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡 = 814 𝑚𝑚2
2
0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 1397 𝑘𝑁 > 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 1382 𝑘𝑁
𝑇𝑢𝑓
→ 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1036 𝑘𝑁 > = 481 𝑘𝑁 OK
4
Compression
𝑃𝑢𝑤
Check one of the two web plates. Therefore the design force is = 258 𝑘𝑁.
2
𝑡 𝑘𝐿
Use 𝑟 = = 2.9 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑘 = 1.0 to obtain = 36.4 > 25 →Ch. E applies.
12 𝑟
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.4)
4-48
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑘𝐿 𝐹𝑦
= 36.4 < 4.71 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 = 133.2 → 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 𝐹𝑦 (0.658𝐹 𝑒 ) = 233 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝑟
𝜋2𝐸 𝑃𝑢𝑤
𝐹𝑒 = 𝑘𝐿 2
= 1492𝑀𝑃𝑎 . Then 𝜙𝑃𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑔 = 0.9𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑏𝑡 = 440 𝑘𝑁 > = 258 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
𝑟
𝑇𝑢𝑤
𝜙𝑇𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝑏𝑡 = 473 𝑘𝑁 > = 383 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
𝑇𝑛 = 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒 → 𝜙𝑇𝑛 = 0.75𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒
𝑇𝑢𝑤
𝜙𝑇𝑛 = 474 𝑘𝑁 > = 383 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Block shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
4-49
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 4
For this connection, the number of bolts per side is 𝑁𝑏 = = =2
2 2
Then:
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 2𝑡 𝑒3 + 𝑁𝑏 − 1 𝑒1 = 2600 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐴𝑔𝑣 − 2𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡 𝑁𝑏 − 0,5 = 1820 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 𝑔 − 𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡 = 640 𝑚𝑚2
0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 693 𝑘𝑁 > 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 646 𝑘𝑁
𝑇𝑢𝑤
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 485 𝑘𝑁 > = 383 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Gusset side:
Determine the dimension for this splice plates (Figure 4.5-3Figure 4.5-3):
The positions of the bolts are already known from the previous design on the
brace side.
4-50
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 486 𝑘𝑁 , with 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒1 − 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 and 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 is the 24 mm diameter of the
standard hole for M22 bolts. (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M)
Exterior bolts:
𝑑 𝑜𝑙𝑒
1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 296 𝑘𝑁 , with 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒3 − and 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 is the 24 mm diameter of the
2
standard hole for M22 bolts. (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M)
Considering all the bolts for the flange brace side (N° of exterior bolts =2, N°
of interior bolts =10-2=8):
Compression
𝑡 𝑘𝐿
Use 𝑟 = = 6.35 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑘 = 1.0 to obtain = 23.6 < 25 →Ch. J applies
12 𝑟
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.4)
4-51
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Figure 4.5-7: Block shear conservative scheme for gusset flange plate.
𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 10
For this connection, the number of bolts per side is 𝑁𝑏 = = =5
2 2
Then, being conservative:
4-52
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝒕𝒈 = 𝟐𝟐 𝒎𝒎 > 𝒕𝑩𝑹𝑨𝑪𝑬
𝒘 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎
Therefore, filler plates will be required to perform the union between the web
of the brace and the gusset plate. The thickness of the filler plates will be
𝒕𝒇 = 𝟔 𝒎𝒎 → 𝒕𝑩𝑹𝑨𝑪𝑬
𝒘 + 𝟐𝒕𝒇 = 𝒕𝒈 . According to section J5 of AISC 360-05
Specification, there is a reduction on the shear strength of the bolts only if the
fillers have 𝑡𝑓 > 6 𝑚𝑚.
Bolts are already placed from the previous design (web splice plate).
Note that the gusset thickness is more than twice the thickness of the web
plates. The web plates were designed to resist 𝑇𝑢𝑤 /2 ; so the gusset can resist
𝑇𝑢𝑤 .OK
Block shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
Consider the following figure:
Figure 4.5-8: Block shear conservative scheme for the gusset plate.
4-53
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 4
The number of bolts per side is 𝑁𝑏 = = =2
2 2
Then:
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 2𝑡 𝑒3 + 𝑁𝑏 − 1 𝑒1 = 5720 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐴𝑔𝑣 − 2𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡 𝑁𝑏 − 0,5 = 4004 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 𝑔 − 𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡 = 1408 𝑚𝑚2
0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 1524 𝑘𝑁 > 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 1421 𝑘𝑁
Limit states of tension (yielding and rupture on the Whitmore’s section) and
buckling on the Whitmore’s section will be shown next.
For OCBF systems, there are no specific requirements for checking the shear
lag of the brace bolted section, so there is no need to check this requirement.
Plus, there are splice plates that can act as “reinforcement” of the net area.
5. Gusset plate
These plates are going to be welded to the gusset (one at each side of the
gusset). First, calculate the length along the gusset for these plates. Refer to
Figure 4.5-3Figure 4.5-3.
𝐿𝑔𝑠 = 2𝑒3 + 𝑁𝑏 − 1 𝑒1 + 𝐴 = 470 𝑚𝑚
Use double fillet welds for each one of the 2 plates, E70 electrode (𝐹𝐸𝑋𝑋 =
482 𝑀𝑃𝑎 ) and assume that all of the 𝐿𝑔𝑠 length will be welded; so 𝑳𝒘 = 𝑳𝒈𝒔 =
𝟒𝟕𝟎 𝒎𝒎. Use 𝒕𝒘 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎 to obtain:
𝑇𝑢𝑓
𝜙𝑅𝑛𝑊𝐸𝐿𝐷𝑆 = 0.75 × 2 × 0.6𝐹𝐸𝑋𝑋 × 0.707𝑡𝑤 × 𝐿𝑤 = 1443 𝑘𝑁 > = 963 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Check the gusset and the flange plate rupture for the weld strength
The base metal of the gusset is on shear due to the development of the
strength of the welds for the connection designed above.
Rupture:
4-54
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75 ∗ 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 0.75 × 0.6 × 𝐹𝑢 (2𝐿𝑤 )𝑡𝑔𝑢𝑠𝑠𝑒𝑡 = 3722 𝑘𝑁 > 𝜙𝑅𝑛𝑊𝐸𝐿𝐷𝑆 = 1443 𝑘𝑁
OK
Also check the same flange splice plate on shear rupture:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75 × 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 0.75 × 0.6 × 𝐹𝑢 𝐿𝑤 𝑡𝑝𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑒 = 1861 𝑘𝑁 > 𝜙𝑅𝑛𝑊𝐸𝐿𝐷𝑆 = 1443 𝑘𝑁
OK
Check the gusset at Whitmore’s Area
First, calculate the gusset dimensions and place the brace connections within
the gusset:
Lgs
L B
1
Brace CL
Ly
db/2
dc/2
Lx
Lx1
Figure 4.5-9: Parameters for the definition of the gusset plate’s geometry.
The brace has an angle 𝜶 = 𝟒𝟔° with respect to the horizontal. Knowing that
the working point of the brace is located at the intersection of the working
lines of beam and column, the distance 𝐿𝑥1 , measured from the column flange
to the line of action of the brace, is known a priori:
1 𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐
𝐿𝑥1 = − tan 𝛼 = 64.7 𝑚𝑚
tan 𝛼 2 2
The distance 𝐿𝑔𝑠 on Figure 4.5-9Figure 4.5-9, corresponds to the length of the
flange plate to the gusset connection.
𝐿𝑔𝑠 = 470 𝑚𝑚
4-55
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Assume the following parameters for the distances 𝐿1 (from the end of the
brace to gusset connection to the beam flange), 𝐿𝑥 (horizontal distance for the
gusset dimension) and 𝐿𝑦 (vertical distance for the gusset dimension):
𝑳𝟏 = 𝟒𝟑𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑳𝒙 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑳𝒚 = 𝟖𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎
Note that the distances mentioned above must be defined in order to comply
with basic geometry relations:
𝑑𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
𝐿𝑦 ≥ 𝐿1 + 𝐿𝑔𝑠 sin 𝛼 + + 𝑡𝑔𝑠 cos 𝛼
2
𝑑𝑏𝑟𝑎𝑐𝑒
𝐿𝑥 ≥ 𝐿1 + 𝐿𝑔𝑠 cos 𝛼 + + 𝑡𝑔𝑠 sin 𝛼
2
Once the basic geometry of the gusset is defined, it is possible to calculate the
coordinates of all the important points and also the Whitmore’s area. For this
task, it is useful to use an calculation sheet that shows these points in one
plot. The Whitmore’s area is measured from the beginning of the flange plate
to gusset connection, using the 30° angle:
L gs
B
Brace CL
L1
30°
Ly
30°
L whit
A
db/2
dc/2 Lx
L x1
4-56
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
With 𝑡𝑔𝑠 equal to the gusset flange plate thickness, 𝑡𝑔𝑠 = 22 𝑚𝑚.
The values of gusset free edges distances (𝐴 and 𝐵 on the figures above) are
calculated using simple geometry relations: 𝐴 = 217 𝑚𝑚, 𝐵 = 545 𝑚𝑚
Plotting the several points defined by the variables already shown, it is noted
that a small portion of the Withmore’s width falls within the beam (mainly
within the flange). In the design process it is preferably that the Whitmore’s
width be located within the gusset plate. In this case, as the beam flange is
very thick (40 mm) compared to the gusset thickness, and a very small part of
the beam web is affected, the properties of the gusset plate will be used for
the entire Whitmore’s width (it simplifies calculations).
Then:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑤 = 4637 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑇𝑢 = 4615 𝑘𝑁 OK
As the connection at the end of the flange gusset splice plates is a welded one,
there is no need to do this check because it will not control.
Use as buckling length the distance 𝐿1 = 430 𝑚𝑚 (note that this is not the
longest line from the end of the brace-gusset connection to the gusset edge;
but it is near to the average distance of the “three lines” option).
𝑡𝑔 𝑘𝐿
Use 𝑘 = 0.65 and 𝑟 = = 6.35 𝑚𝑚 to obtain = 44 > 25 → Ch. E applies. Then:
12 𝑟
𝜋2 𝐸 𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑒 = = 1019 𝑀𝑃𝑎 → 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.658𝐹 𝑒 𝐹𝑦 = 225 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝑘𝐿 2
𝑟
4-57
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
For all the limit states, except for bolt slip critical, the design forces are:
𝑇𝑢 = 4615 𝑘𝑁
𝑃𝑢 = 3115 𝑘𝑁
Parameters for UFM:
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐
𝑒𝑏 = = 300 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒𝑐 = = 225 𝑚𝑚
2 2
𝜃 = 90° − 𝛼° = 90° − 46° = 44° (angle of the brace with respect to the vertical
line).
𝛼 = 530 𝑚𝑚
𝛽 = 480 𝑚𝑚
𝛼 − 𝛽𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 = 66.5 𝑚𝑚
𝑒𝑏 𝑡𝑎𝑛 𝜃 − 𝑒𝑐 = 64.7 𝑚𝑚
𝑟= 𝛼 + 𝑒𝑐 2 + 𝛽 + 𝑒𝑏 2 = 1086 𝑚𝑚
𝛽 𝑒𝑏 𝑒𝑐 𝛼
𝑉𝑐 = 𝑃 , 𝑉𝑏 = 𝑃 , 𝐻𝑐 = 𝑃 , 𝐻𝑏 = 𝑃
𝑟 𝑟 𝑟 𝑟
4-58
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
And the directions of the forces over the gusset plate are shown in the
following figure:
H uc H uc
V uc
V uc
H ub
V ub
H ub V ub
Tension case:
𝑃 = 𝑇𝑢 = 4615 𝑘𝑁
𝐴 = 𝐿𝑥 𝑡𝑔 or 𝐿𝑦 𝑡𝑔 (Edge area)
𝐿𝑥 edge:
𝐿𝑦 edge:
4-59
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝐴 edge:
𝐿𝑔𝑓 𝐴 𝐸
= = 9.8 ≤ 0.75 = 21.1 → no need for stiffener
𝑡 𝑡𝑔 𝐹𝑦
𝐵 edge:
𝐿𝑔𝑓 𝐵
= = 24.8 > 0.75 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 = 21.1 → stiffener needed
𝑡 𝑡𝑔
There are several possibilities for improving this edge stability, refer to the
general discussions of braces. A special design (stiffener, increasing the gusset
thickness or changing gusset dimensions) will not be made on this example,
but it is recommended to add a stiffener at the edge.
This connection is going to be fillet welded (double sided, E70 electrodes). Use
as effective length of the welds 𝐿𝑤 = 930 𝑚𝑚. Check that this connection is
within the 𝐿𝑥 distance and that there is an offset on the gusset corner:
𝐿𝑤
𝛼+ = 995 𝑚𝑚 ≤ 𝐿𝑥 = 1000 𝑚𝑚 OK
2
𝐿𝑤
𝑂𝑓𝑓𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑥 = 𝑂𝑥 = 𝛼 − = 65 𝑚𝑚
2
2 2
Then 𝑅𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁 = 𝐻𝑢𝑏 + 𝑉𝑢𝑏 = 2589 𝑘𝑁
The 1.25 ductility factor for this welded edge connection has been used,
following the recommendations of AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th Ed.
4-60
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
It is important to also check the gusset rupture and the beam flange rupture
(base metals) due to the development of the welds strength:
Gusset rupture:
This limit state must be checked for tension and compression forces. The
tension case controls. It is noted that the concentrated force to be resisted is
not applied at a distance from the beam end that is greater to the depth of the
beam (𝛼 = 580 𝑚𝑚 < 𝑑 = 600 𝑚𝑚).
Use 𝑡𝑏𝑤 = 10 𝑚𝑚, 𝑘 = 𝑡𝑏𝑓 + 𝑠 = 40 + 6 = 46 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑁 = max 𝑡𝑏𝑓 , 𝑘 = 46 𝑚𝑚 to
obtain:
𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁 𝐶𝑂𝑀𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑆𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1.0 × { 2.5𝑘 + 𝑁 𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑏𝑤 = 403 𝑘𝑁 < max 𝑉𝑢𝑏 , 𝑉𝑢𝑏 = 1275 𝑘𝑁
So, there is the need of adding stiffeners (or increasing the beam web
thickness). That design will not be done on this example (refer to Chapter 6 of
Moment Connections and section J10 of AISC 360-05 Specification for more
information about the design of stiffeners for concentrated forces).
This limit state only applies for compression forces. The concentrated
compressive force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the beam end
𝑑
that is greater than its half depth (𝛼 = 580 𝑚𝑚 > = 300 𝑚𝑚).
2
1.5
2
𝑁 𝑡𝑏𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑏𝑓
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75 × 0.80𝑡𝑏𝑤 1+3 →
𝑑𝑏 𝑡𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑏𝑤
4-61
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝐶𝑂𝑀𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑆𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 873 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑢𝑏 = 861 𝑘𝑁 OK
This connection consists of 2 clip angles welded to the gusset plate, and
bolted to the column flange (one clip angle each side of the gusset plate).
B A-A
B
e3 t
Bolted side
t
B-B
(N bolt side -1)
L
e3
B
A A
g
e3 e3
ASTM A490 M22 bolts, and according to the table J3.3M of AISC 360-05 code,
the hole diameter is 24 mm.
4-62
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑵𝑻𝑶𝑻𝑨𝑳
𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒔 = 𝟐𝟐 (total number of bolts, considering 2 clip angles)
𝑵𝒓 = 𝟏 (number of rows in each clip angle)
𝟏 𝑵𝑻𝑶𝑻𝑨𝑳
𝑵𝑺𝑰𝑫𝑬
𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒔 =
𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒔
= 𝟏𝟏 (number of bolts on each row of each clip angle)
𝟐 𝑵𝒓
𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
The tension case controls (𝐻𝑢𝑐 = 957 𝑘𝑁 and 𝑉𝑢𝑐𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁 = 2041 𝑘𝑁). Forces in
each bolt are:
𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
𝐻𝑢𝑐
𝑇𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 𝑇𝑂𝑇𝐴𝐿 = 43 𝑘𝑁
𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
𝑉𝑢𝑐𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 𝑇𝑂𝑇𝐴𝐿 = 93 𝑘𝑁
𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
Check direct shear in the bolts (𝐴𝑏 = 380 𝑚𝑚2 for M22 bolts):
Place the bolts at the connection and calculate other required distances:
𝟖
Refer to Figure 4.5-12Figure 4.5-12. Use 𝒆𝟏 = 𝟔𝟎 𝒎𝒎 > 𝒅𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒕 , 𝒆𝟑 = 𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎, 𝒆𝟒 =
𝟑
𝟒𝟎 𝒎𝒎 > 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆
𝒈 = 𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑆𝐼𝐷𝐸
𝐿 = 2𝑒3 + 𝑒1 (𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 − 1) = 700 𝑚𝑚 → 𝛽 + 𝐿/2 = 830 𝑚𝑚 ≤ 𝐿𝑦 = 850 𝑚𝑚 OK
It is also noted that both clip angles fall within the column flange width and
that no interruption is made on the column fillet web toe area.
4-63
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Bolts are subjected to shear and tension components for the tension case,
which controls the design.
For the slip critical limit state, as said on AISC 341-05 for OCBF systems, the
required strength of the connection is obtained using the load combinations of
the applicable building code, not considering the amplified seismic load (Ω0
factor). Nevertheless, in this case, the design for all the slip critical limit states
has been made conservatively using a Ω0 = 2.0 factor. Therefore, the procedure
done with the UFM for the design forces, must be done equally with the design
forces for the slip-critical limit state (tensile case controls, 𝑇𝑢𝐶𝑂𝑀𝐵𝑂𝑆 = 2260 𝑘𝑁)
Applying the UFM to this force, the design forces for slip critical limit state on
the gusset to column connection are:
𝑉𝑢𝑐𝑠𝑐 = 999 𝑘𝑁
𝑠𝑐
𝐻𝑢𝑐 = 468 𝑘𝑁
Use 𝜇 = 0.35 (class A faying surface), 𝐷𝑢 = 1.13 , 𝑠𝑐 = 1.0 (standard holes),
𝑇𝑏 = 221 𝑘𝑁 (table J3.1M on AISC 360-05), and 𝑁𝑠 = 1.0 (number of slip planes
on each angle). Then:
𝑅𝑛 = 87.4 𝑘𝑁
According to section J3.9 of AISC 360-05, when combined tension and shear
slip critical connections are performed, the previous available strength per bolt
must be reduced by the factor 𝑘𝑠 .
𝑇𝑢
𝑘𝑠 = 1 − = 0.91, with 𝑁𝑏 = 11 (number of bolts carrying the applied tensile
𝐷𝑢 𝑇𝑏 𝑁𝑏
𝑠𝑐
𝐻𝑢𝑐
force 𝑇𝑢 = ; the check will be for one angle).
2
𝑠𝑐
𝑉𝑢𝑐
Using 𝜙 = 0.85 → 𝜙𝑘𝑠 𝑅𝑛 × 𝑁𝑏 = 748 𝑘𝑁 > = 500 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
4-64
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
′ ′ 𝐹𝑛𝑡 𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑛𝑡 𝐴𝑏 , 𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 1.3𝐹𝑛𝑡 − 𝑓 ≤ 𝐹𝑛𝑡 . Use 𝜙 = 0.75 and 𝑓𝑣 = = 244 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝜙𝐹𝑛𝑣 𝑣 𝐴𝑏
(required shear stress on each bolt).
𝑘𝑁
𝑅𝑛 = 152 → 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 114 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 93 𝑘𝑁 OK
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
Use 𝑡 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 14 𝑚𝑚
Interior bolts
1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 242 𝑘𝑁, with 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒1 − 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 and 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 is 24 mm diameter, from
standard hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M). Then 𝜙𝑅𝑛 =
0.75𝑅𝑛 = 182 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 93 𝑘𝑁.
Exterior bolts:
𝑑 𝑜𝑙𝑒
1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 255 𝑘𝑁, with 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒3 − and 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 is 24 mm diameter, from standard
2
hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M). Then 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75𝑅𝑛 =
191 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 93 𝑘𝑁
𝐻𝑢𝑐
𝑇 = 𝑇𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = = 43 𝑘𝑁 (required tensile strength per bolt)
𝑁𝐵
𝑑𝑏 = 22 𝑚𝑚 (bolt diameter)
𝑑 ′ = 24 𝑚𝑚 (hole diameter, use standard hole)
𝑝 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑒1 , 𝑒4 = 40 𝑚𝑚
𝐹𝑢 = 400 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐵 = 𝜙𝑇𝑛𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 0.75𝑇𝑛𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 0.75𝐹𝑛𝑡 𝐴𝑏 = 222 𝑘𝑁
𝑑′
𝛿 = 1 − = 0.4
𝑝
The number of bolt rows is 𝑵𝒓 = 𝟏 on each angle. Refer to the following figure:
4-65
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
g
q
T+q
b' a'
b a
Therefore, the required thickness for the angle in order to have adequate
fitting strength and stiffness and bolt strength is:
4.44𝑇𝑏′
𝑡𝑚í𝑛 = = 13.76 𝑚𝑚 < 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 14 𝑚𝑚 OK
𝑝𝐹𝑢 (1+𝛿𝛼 ′ )
The design will be made for each of the 2 angles. Therefore, the design force
1
is: 𝑅 = 2 = 1127 𝑘𝑁. Use 𝐿 = 𝐿 = 700 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑡 = 12 𝑚𝑚 (maximum
𝑉𝑢𝑐2 + 𝐻𝑢𝑐 𝑤 𝑤
2
permitted) to obtain:
4-66
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Shear Yielding
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.2)
𝑉𝑢𝑐
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1.0 × 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 1.0 × 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐿𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 1470 𝑘𝑁 > = 1020 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Shear Rupture
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.2)
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75 ∗ 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒
𝑆𝐼𝐷𝐸 𝑉𝑢𝑐
0.75 × 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑔 − 𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 1043 𝑘𝑁 > = 1020 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 = 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 + 2 𝑚𝑚 𝑑𝑎𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑒 = 26 𝑚𝑚
Block Shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
Refer to the following figure:
𝑆𝐼𝐷𝐸
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 𝑒3 + 𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 − 1 𝑒1 = 9100 𝑚𝑚2
𝑆𝐼𝐷𝐸
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐴𝑔𝑣 − 𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 − 0,5 𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 5278 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 54𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 − 0,5𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 574 𝑚𝑚2
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 1496 𝑘𝑁 < 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 1594 𝑘𝑁
4-67
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑽𝒖𝒄
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75𝑅𝑛 = 1122 𝑘𝑁 > = 1020 𝑘𝑁 OK
𝟐
Column flange strength
This limit state must be checked for tension and compression forces. The
tension case controls. It is noted that the concentrated force to be resisted is
applied at a distance from the column end that is greater to the depth of the
column.
Use 𝑡𝑐𝑤 = 12 𝑚𝑚, 𝑘 = 𝑡𝑐𝑓 + 𝑠 = 22 + 6 = 28 𝑚𝑚, and 𝑁 = max 𝑡𝑐𝑓 , 𝑘 = 28 𝑚𝑚 to
obtain
𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁 𝐶𝑂𝑀𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑆𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1.0 × { 5𝑘 + 𝑁 𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑐𝑤 = 504 𝑘𝑁 < max 𝐻𝑢𝑐 , 𝐻𝑢𝑐 = 957 𝑘𝑁
So, there is the need of adding stiffeners (or increasing the column web
thickness). That design will not be done in this example (refer to Chapter 6 of
Moment Connections and section J10 of AISC 360-05 Specification for more
information about the design of stiffeners for concentrated forces).
This limit state only applies for compression forces. It is noted that the
concentrated compressive force to be resisted is applied at a distance from the
column end that is greater than its half depth.
1.5
2
𝑁 𝑡𝑏𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑐𝑓
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75 × 0.80𝑡𝑐𝑤 1+3
𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑐𝑓 𝑡𝑐𝑤
𝐶𝑂𝑀𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑆𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 889 𝑘𝑁 > 𝐻𝑢𝑐 = 646 𝑘𝑁 OK
4-68
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
7. Beam-to-column connection
The controlling combination is when the brace is in tension; suppose that the
required end reaction on the beam is 𝑅 = 50 𝑘𝑁 and the drag force on the beam
is 𝐴𝑏 = 0 𝑘𝑁. Therefore, forces present in the connection are the following
Axial force:
Shear force:
𝑠𝑐
𝑆𝑒𝑎𝑟 𝑠𝑐 = 𝑅𝑣𝑠𝑐 = 𝑅 − 𝑉𝑢𝑏 = 50 − 861 = 811 𝑘𝑁
Axial force:
This connection consists of 2 clip angles welded to the beam web and bolted
to the column flange (one clip angle each side of the beam web).
Calculate trial dimensions for the angle shape (Figure 4.5-12Figure 4.5-12):
Choose angles with 𝑩 = 𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎 and 𝒕 = 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆 = 𝟏𝟖 𝒎𝒎. The thickness of the
column flange is 𝒕𝒄𝒇 = 𝟐𝟐 𝒎𝒎.
4-69
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Initial try:
𝑵𝑻𝑶𝑻𝑨𝑳
𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒔 = 𝟏𝟒 (Total number of bolts, considering the 2 clip angles)
𝑵𝒓 = 𝟏 (Number of rows on each clip angle)
𝟏 𝑵𝑻𝑶𝑻𝑨𝑳
𝑵𝑺𝑰𝑫𝑬
𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒔 =
𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒔
= 𝟕 (Number of bolts on each row of each clip angle)
𝟐 𝑵𝒓
𝑅
𝑇𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 𝑇𝑂𝑇𝐴𝐿 = 68 𝑘𝑁
𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
𝑅𝑣
𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 𝑇𝑂𝑇𝐴𝐿 = 88 𝑘𝑁
𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠
Check direct shear on the bolts (𝐴𝑏 = 380 𝑚𝑚2 for M22 bolts):
𝟖
Refer to Figure 4.5-12. Use 𝒆𝟏 = 𝟔𝟎 𝒎𝒎 > 𝒅𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒕 , 𝒆𝟑 = 𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎, 𝒆𝟒 = 𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎 > 𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒈𝒍𝒆
𝟑
𝒈 = 𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑆𝐼𝐷𝐸
𝐿 = 2𝑒3 + 𝑒1 (𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 − 1) = 460 𝑚𝑚
Check that the clip angle falls within the beam height:
It is also noted that both clip angles fall within the column flange width and
that no interruption is made on the column fillet web toe area.
4-70
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Use 𝜇 = 0.35 (class A faying surface), 𝐷𝑢 = 1.13, 𝑠𝑐 = 1.0 (standard holes),
𝑇𝑏 = 221 𝑘𝑁 (table J3.1M on AISC 360-05) and 𝑁𝑠 = 1.0 (number of slip planes
on each angle). Then:
𝑅𝑛 = 87.4 𝑘𝑁
According to section J3.9 of AISC 360-05, when there is combined tension and
shear in slip critical connections, the previous available strength must be
reduced by a factor 𝑘𝑠 .
𝑇𝑢
𝑘𝑠 = 1 − = 0.86, with 𝑁𝑏 = 7 (number of bolts carrying the applied tension
𝐷𝑢 𝑇𝑏 𝑁𝑏
𝑅𝑠𝑐
𝑇𝑢 = ; the check will be performed for 1 angle).
2
𝑅𝑣𝑠𝑐
Then, using 𝜙 = 0.85 → 𝜙𝑘𝑠 𝑅𝑛 × 𝑁𝑏 = 451 𝑘𝑁 > = 405 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Use the design forces for all the other limit states.
′ ′ 𝐹𝑛𝑡 𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑛𝑡 𝐴𝑏 , 𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 1.3𝐹𝑛𝑡 − 𝑓 ≤ 𝐹𝑛𝑡 . Use 𝜙 = 0.75 and 𝑓𝑣 = = 230 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝜙𝐹𝑛𝑣 𝑣 𝐴𝑏
(required shear stress on each bolt). Therefore:
𝑘𝑁
𝑅𝑛 = 166 → 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 124 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 88 𝑘𝑁 OK
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
Interior bolts:
1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 311 𝑘𝑁 , with 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒1 − 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 and 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 is 24 mm diameter, from
standard hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M). Then 𝜙𝑅𝑛 =
0.75𝑅𝑛 = 233 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 88 𝑘𝑁.
Exterior bolts:
4-71
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑑 𝑜𝑙𝑒
1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 328 𝑘𝑁 , with 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒3 − and 𝑑𝑜𝑙𝑒 is 24 mm diameter from the
2
standard hole for M22 bolts (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.3M). Then 𝜙𝑅𝑛 =
0.75𝑅𝑛 = 246 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑢𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 88 𝑘𝑁.
𝑝 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑒1 , 𝑒4 = 50 𝑚𝑚
𝐹𝑢 = 400 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐵 = 𝜙𝑇𝑛𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 0.75𝑇𝑛𝐵𝑂𝐿𝑇 = 0.75𝐹𝑛𝑡 𝐴𝑏 = 222 𝑘𝑁
𝑑′
𝛿 = 1 − = 0.52
𝑝
Now, the number of bolt rows is 𝑵𝒓 = 𝟏 on each angle. Refer to Figure 4.5-13.
Then:
𝑔 = 𝑒4 = 50 𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒
𝑏 = 𝑒4 − = 41 𝑚𝑚
2
𝑎 = 68 𝑚𝑚
′
𝑑𝑏
𝑏 =𝑏− = 30 𝑚𝑚
2
𝑑 𝑏 𝑑𝑏
𝑎′ = min 𝑎 + ; 1.25𝑏 + = 62.25 𝑚𝑚
2 2
And calculate:
𝑏′
𝜌= = 0.48
𝑎′
1 𝐵
𝛽= − 1 = 7 > 1 → 𝛼′ = 1
𝜌 𝑇
Therefore, the required thickness for the angle, so to have adequate fitting
strength and stiffness and bolt strength is:
4.44𝑇𝑏′
𝑡𝑚í𝑛 = = 17.26 𝑚𝑚 < 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 18 𝑚𝑚 OK
𝑝𝐹𝑢 (1+𝛿𝛼 ′ )
4-72
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
The design will be made for each angle. Therefore, the design force is 𝑅 =
1
𝑅𝑣2 + 𝑅2 = 776 𝑘𝑁. Use 𝐿𝑤 = 𝐿 = 460 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑡𝑤 = 11 𝑚𝑚 to obtain:
2
Shear Yielding
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.2)
𝑅𝑣
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1.0 × 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 1.0 × 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐿𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 1242 𝑘𝑁 > = 613 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Shear Rupture
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.2)
Block Shear
(Re. AISC 360-05, J4.3)
𝑆𝐼𝐷𝐸
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 𝑒3 + 𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 − 1 𝑒1 = 7380 𝑚𝑚2
𝑆𝐼𝐷𝐸
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐴𝑔𝑣 − 𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 − 0.5 𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 4338 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 68𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 − 0.5𝑑𝑐𝑎𝑙𝑐 𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑙𝑒 = 990 𝑚𝑚2
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 1437 𝑘𝑁 < 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 1503 𝑘𝑁
𝑅𝑣
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75𝑅𝑛 = 1078 𝑘𝑁 > = 613 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
4-73
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Therefore stiffeners for the column are needed. The design of them is not done
on this example. For major information refer to section J10 of AISC 360-05
Specification and Chapter 6 of Moment Connections on this Manual.
10
Detail 1
10
Detail 3
Detail 2
Gusset plate: t = 22 mm
10
10
46°
12
Detail 4
12
Notes:
- Stiffener and doubler plates for column and beam
are not designed
-Welds: E70 electrodes
4-74
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Detail 1
PL t=22 mm 20 M22 ASTM A490
PL 725X100X22
Gusset
Brace
Detail 2
Note:
A A
A - A:
4-75
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
A A
A - A:
4-76
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
In this example design is going to be done according to the provision for OCBF
systems.
The acting forces on the brace for the design are obtained from loads
combinations that consider earthquake but not including the amplified seismic
load.
𝑇𝑢 = 4500 𝑘𝑁
𝑃𝑢 = 4000 𝑘𝑁
Brace section
4-77
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Beam section
Weld properties
According to section 8.2b of AISC 341, braces shall comply with the following:
𝜆 < 𝜆𝑝𝑠
𝑏 𝐸
𝜆= < 𝜆𝑝𝑠 = 0.30 = 7.22
2𝑡 𝐹𝑦
𝐸 𝑃𝑢 𝐸
𝜆= < 𝜆𝑝𝑠 = 1.12 2.33 − ≥ 1.49 = 35.87
𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦 0.9𝑃𝑦 𝐹𝑦
4-78
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
In this example,
Brace web:
𝝀 = 𝟔. 𝟖 < 𝝀𝒑𝒔 OK
Brace flange:
𝝀 = 𝟏𝟔 < 𝝀𝒑𝒔 OK
3. Design forces
Tensile Force:
Where 𝑅𝑦 is taken from the table I-6-1 of AISC 341-05 (similar to ASTM
A572Gr50 steel), which in the case of A345 ESP, is 𝑅𝑦 = 1.1:
𝑇𝑢 = 6564 𝑘𝑁
Compression force
𝐶𝑢 = 𝐴𝑔 𝐹𝑐𝑟
𝑘𝐿 𝐸
= 56 < 4.0 = 96.3 (Re. Section 14.2 AISC 341-05)
𝑟𝑦 𝐹𝑦
𝑘𝐿 𝐸
If < 4.71 = 113.4:
𝑟 𝐹𝑦
4-79
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.658𝐹 𝑒 𝐹𝑦
𝜋2 𝐸
𝐹𝑒 = 2 = 629 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝑘𝐿
𝑟𝑦
Therefore:
And:
𝐶𝑢 = 4738 𝑘𝑁
And for the slip critical failure, the design forces on braces shall be considered
as (from load combinations, since it is allowed for the slip critical limit state):
𝑇𝑢𝑠𝑐 = 4500 𝑘𝑁
𝐶𝑢𝑠𝑐 = 4000 𝑘𝑁
𝑉 = 𝐶𝑢 cos 𝜃 + 𝑇𝑢 cos 𝜃
𝑇 = 𝑇𝑢 sin 𝜃 − 𝐶𝑢 sin 𝜃
𝑑𝑏
𝑀= 𝑉
2
Then,
𝑉 = 7992 𝑘𝑁
𝑇 = 1291 𝑘𝑁
𝑀 = 1598344 𝑘𝑁 ⋅ 𝑚𝑚
𝑯𝟏𝒈 = 𝟒𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑯𝟐𝒈 = 𝟑𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑳𝑩𝒂𝒔𝒆 = 𝟏𝟕𝟔𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑩𝒈 = 𝟏𝟑𝟎𝟏 𝒎𝒎
4-80
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
The web and the flanges of the brace have to be connected to the gusset
plate. The calculation of the force distribution in the brace between the web
and flanges of the brace is:
𝑇𝑢 = 𝑇𝑢𝑤 + 2𝑇𝑢𝑓
𝐴𝑤 = 4096 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑓 = 6600 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑤
𝑇𝑢𝑤 = 𝑇 = 1554 𝑘𝑁
𝐴 𝑢
𝐴𝑓
𝑇𝑢𝑓 = 𝑇𝑢 = 2505 𝑘𝑁
𝐴
For the slip critical type of failure, the distribution of forces is:
𝐴𝑤
𝑇𝑢𝑤𝑠𝑐 = 𝑇 = 1066 𝑘𝑁
𝐴 𝑢
𝐴𝑓
𝑇𝑢𝑓𝑠𝑐 = 𝑇𝑢 = 1717 𝑘𝑁
𝐴
For the flange connection of the brace, we use a cover plates per each flange,
bolted to the brace and welded to the gusset.
4-81
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Use bolts M24 (24 mm of diameter, standard holes of 27 mm), ASTM A490
bolts, threads included in the shear plane. Even though NCh2369.Of2003 does
not require to verify the slip critical type of failure, in some project
specifications is common to verify this type of failure anyway.
𝜇 = 0.35
𝑠𝑐 = 1.00
𝐷𝑢 = 1.13
Also, the tensile nominal strength for M24 ASTM 490 bolts is:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 86 𝑘𝑁
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical
failure is: 𝑁𝐵 ≥19.88. Use 𝑁𝐵 = 20.
4-82
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝐴𝑏 = 452 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
Then:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 140 𝑘𝑁
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection is: 𝑁𝐵 > 17.83.
Then, 𝑵𝑩 = 𝟐𝟎 is OK.
Consider that the flange is connected to the gusset plate with two plates (at
each side of the gusset plate). It is reasonable that cover plates do not have a
width greater than the width flange. The following relation shall be
accomplished:
Try with a plate of length 𝑳𝒑𝒇 = 𝟏𝟏𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎, 𝒃𝒑𝒇 = 𝟏𝟑𝟓 𝒎𝒎 wide (in order to cover
the entire flange) and a thickness 𝒕𝒑𝒇 = 𝟑𝟒 𝒎𝒎.
4-83
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
20 M24 A490
Then:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟒𝟐𝟓 𝒌𝑵
Then, the plate is not strong enough. Try changing the thickness of the plate,
use 𝒕𝒑𝒇 = 𝟑𝟔 𝒎𝒎, then
4-84
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Interior bolts
According to chapter J3.10 of the AISC 360-05, the bearing strength of the
plate is:
𝐿𝑐 = 64 𝑚𝑚 − 27 𝑚𝑚 = 37𝑚𝑚
Then,
𝑹𝒏 = 𝟕𝟏𝟗 𝒌𝑵 < 𝟗𝟑𝟑 𝒌𝑵 → 𝑹𝒏 = 𝟕𝟏𝟗 𝒌𝑵
Exterior bolts
27
𝐿𝑐 = 46 𝑚𝑚 − = 32.5 𝑚𝑚
2
Then,
2505
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝝓 𝟗 × 𝟕𝟓𝟗 𝒌𝑵 + 𝟏 × 𝟓𝟖𝟓 𝒌𝑵 = 𝟓𝟑𝟐𝟗 𝒌𝑵 > 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
The nominal strength for the bearing limit state in the brace is:
4-85
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝜙 = 0.75
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
Where 𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary of the AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05 C-J4.2). The values of 𝐴𝑛𝑣 , 𝐴𝑛𝑡 and𝐴𝑔𝑣 are obtained
from the following figure:
Therefore,
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 64 × 9 + 46 𝑡 = 22392 𝑚𝑚2
side
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐴𝑔𝑣 − 𝑁𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑠 − 0.5 × 27 × 𝑡 = 13158 𝑚𝑚2
135
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 𝑚𝑚 − 0.5 × 27 𝑡 = 1944 𝑚𝑚2
2
Then:
𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟓
𝑹𝒏 = 𝟒𝟒𝟐𝟕 𝒌𝑵 < 5510 𝒌𝑵 → 𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟑𝟑𝟐𝟏 𝒌𝑵 > 𝒌𝑵 OK
𝟐
Use a two fillet weld between the gusset plate and the flange plate. Consider
t 𝑤 = 12 𝑚𝑚. The nominal strength of the weld is:
4-86
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑒𝑥𝑥 𝐴𝑤
𝜙 = 0.75
Then
𝐴𝑤 = 𝐿𝑤 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓
𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 2 × 0.707 × 𝑡𝑤 = 17 𝑚𝑚
𝐿𝑤 = 438 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑤 = 7432 𝑚𝑚2
Therefore:
𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟓
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟔𝟎𝟓 𝒌𝑵 > 𝒌𝑵 OK
𝟐
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛 𝑏𝑝
𝜙 = 0.75
Therefore:
𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟓
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟑𝟏𝟗𝟑 𝒌𝑵 > 𝒌𝑵 OK
𝟐
Therefore:
𝟐𝟓𝟎𝟓
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟓𝟑𝟐𝟏 𝒌𝑵 > 𝒌𝑵 OK
𝟐
4-87
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
For the web connection of the brace, use two cover plates bolted to the brace
and to the gusset. Since the thickness of the gusset plate is greater than the
thickness of the web of the brace, we have to use fillers in order of
accommodate the plates of the connection. The reduction factor for the use of
fillers is,
(Re. section J.5 AISC 360-05)
𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑙𝑙 = 1 − 0.0154 𝑡 − 6
Where 𝑡 is the total thickness of the fillers. Considering two fillers 7 mm thick
each one:
𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑙𝑙 = 0.877
Use M24 bolts (24 mm diameter, standard holes of 27 mm), ASTM A490
bolts, threads included in the shear plane. Even though NCh2369.Of2003 do
not require to verify the slip critical type of failure, in some projects
specifications require verification of this type of failure.
𝜇 = 0.35
𝑠𝑐 = 1.00
𝐷𝑢 = 1.13
Also, the tensile nominal strength for the M24 ASTM 490 bolts is:
4-88
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical
failure is: 𝑁𝐵 ≥7.03. Use 𝑁𝐵 = 8.
𝐴𝑏 = 452 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
Then:
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection is: 𝑁𝐵 > 6.31. Use 𝑁𝐵 =
8.
Try plates 𝑳𝒑𝒘 = 𝟓𝟒𝟎 𝒎𝒎 long, 𝒃𝒑𝒘 = 𝟐𝟒𝟎 𝒎𝒎 wide, 𝒕𝒑𝒘 = 𝟏𝟒 𝒎𝒎 thick.
4-89
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
16 M24 A490
Then,
1554
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟎𝟒𝟑 𝒌𝑵 > 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Then,
1554
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟔𝟎 𝒌𝑵 > 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Interior bolts
4-90
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝐿𝑐 = 64 𝑚𝑚 − 27 𝑚𝑚 = 37 𝑚𝑚
Then,
Exterior bolts
27
𝐿𝑐 = 46 𝑚𝑚 − = 32.5𝑚𝑚
2
Then,
1554
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝝓 𝟔 × 𝟐𝟖𝟎 𝒌𝑵 + 𝟐 × 𝟐𝟒𝟔 𝒌𝑵 = 𝟏𝟔𝟐𝟕 𝒌𝑵 > 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
The nominal strength for the bearing limit state in the brace is:
𝟏𝟔𝟗𝟔
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖 × 𝝓 × 𝟒𝟏𝟓 = 𝟐𝟒𝟖𝟖 𝒌𝑵 > 𝒌𝑵 OK
𝟐
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
(Re. AISC360-05, J4-5)
4-91
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0, according to the commentary of the AISC 360-05 specification (AISC
360-05 C-J4.2). The values of 𝐴𝑛𝑣 , 𝐴𝑛𝑡 , and 𝐴𝑔𝑣 are obtained from the following
figure.
Then:
1554
𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟑𝟏𝟖 𝒌𝑵 < 1613 𝒌𝑵 → 𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟗𝟖𝟖 𝒌𝑵 > 𝒌𝑵 OK
2
The connection to the gusset plate is exactly the same, but for the limit state
of bearing, it has to be considered the thickness of the gusset plate. Since the
gusset plate is thicker than the brace web, by inspection that limit state does
not control the design.
According to the force transfer mechanism, the design forces for the weld are:
𝑉 = 7992 𝑘𝑁
𝑇 = 1291 𝑘𝑁
𝑀 = 1598344 𝑘𝑁 ⋅ 𝑚𝑚
Use the elastic method for the calculation of the maximum stress in the weld.
(Re. Chapter 8 AISC Manual of Steel Construction)
4-92
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑀 𝑤𝑒 𝑇
𝑓𝑥 = +
𝐼𝑥 2 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓
𝑉𝑢
𝑓𝑦 =
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓
𝐹𝑢 = 𝑓𝑥2 + 𝑓𝑦2
where 𝐼𝑥 is the inertia of the weld and 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 is the effective area of the weld.
Use 26 mm fillet weld size; the height of the weld 𝑤𝑒 is equal to the length
of the base of the gusset on the beam. Then,
𝐹𝑤 = 0.60𝐹𝑒𝑥𝑥
𝜙 = 0.75
Then,
2 2 2 2
1 𝑇 𝑀 𝑤𝑒 𝑉 𝑇 𝑀 𝑤𝑒 𝑉
𝑓𝑎𝑣𝑔 = + + + − +
2 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐼𝑥 2 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐼𝑥 2 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓
4-93
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛 𝑏𝑝
𝜙 = 0.75
Therefore:
Then,
The maximum distributed tensile force for the interface between beam and
gusset plate is given by:
𝑇 𝑀 𝑤𝑒
𝑝𝑡𝑥 = 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 +
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐼𝑥 2
And the length of the gusset base that is subject to tensile loads is given by:
𝑓𝑡
𝐿𝑡 = 𝐿𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒
𝑓𝑡 + 𝑓𝑐
𝑇 𝑀 𝑤𝑒
𝑓𝑡 = + = 104 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐼𝑝 2
𝑇 𝑀 𝑤𝑒
𝑓𝑐 = − = 64 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐼𝑝 2
4-94
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Then,
𝐿𝑡 = 1088 𝑚𝑚
𝑝𝑡𝑥 = 3.829 𝑘𝑁/𝑚𝑚
1
𝑅𝑢 = 𝐿𝑡 𝑝𝑥 = 2084 𝑘𝑁
2
And the nominal strength for web local yielding is (considering that the load is
applied at a distance greater than 𝑑/2 from the end of the member)
Where 𝑘 is the distance between the face of the flange and the toe of the fillet
weld of the beam. 𝑁 is the distance in which the load is applied, then:
𝑘 = 36 𝑚𝑚
𝑁 = 𝐿𝑡 = 1088 𝑚𝑚
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟕𝟎𝟎𝟐 𝒌𝑵 > 2418 𝑘𝑁 OK
The maximum compressive force for unit of length in the interface beam-
gusset is given by:
𝑇 𝑀 𝑤𝑒 𝑘𝑁
𝑝𝑐𝑥 = 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 − = 2.362
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐼𝑥 2 𝑚𝑚
𝐿𝑐 = 𝐿𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒 − 𝐿𝑡 = 672 𝑚𝑚
1
𝑅𝑢 = 𝑝𝑐𝑥 𝐿𝑐 = 793 𝑘𝑁
2
The nominal strength for web crippling, (considering that the load is applied at
a distance greater than 𝑑/2 from the end of the member) is:
4-95
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
1.5
𝑁 𝑡𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡 𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.80𝑡𝑤2 1 + 3 (Re. J10-4 AISC 360-05)
𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤
𝜙 = 0.75
𝑁 = 𝐿𝑐
Therefore,
Since the last two verifications have considered the beam, it has to be verified
a load combination that considers 𝑃𝑢 = 0.3𝑃𝑛 (Re AISC 341 14.3(1)), then, the
forces on the connection between the beam and the gusset are
𝑉 = 5646 𝑘𝑁
𝑇 = 3636 𝑘𝑁
𝑀 = 1129289 𝑘𝑁 ⋅ 𝑚𝑚
𝑇 𝑀 𝑤𝑒
𝑓𝑡 = + = 116 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐼𝑥 2
𝑇 𝑀 𝑤𝑒
𝑓𝑐 = − = −3 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐼𝑝 2
𝑅𝑢𝑐 = 2.96 𝑘𝑁
𝑅𝑢𝑡 = 3633 𝑘𝑁
As it can be seen, both are lesser than the nominal resistances, but it is
important to verify this because the tensile force will increase if a smaller
compressive force is considered and web local yielding can occur.
Considering that the Whitmore area is the result of projecting the width of the
connection between the brace and the gusset plate in 30 degrees until the end
of the connection, then:
4-96
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Consider
Then:
Then,
Furthermore,
𝑡𝑔𝑝
𝑟= = 8.66 𝑚𝑚
12
Considering 𝐾 = 1.2, because is only one edge of the gusset restrained, the
slenderness is
𝑘𝐿
= 61.8 > 25
𝑟
𝑘𝐿 𝐸
As < 4.71 = 113.4:
𝑟 𝐹𝑦
4-97
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.658𝐹 𝑒 𝐹𝑦
𝜋2 𝐸
𝐹𝑒 = = 517 𝑀𝑝𝑎
𝑘𝐿 2
𝑟
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 261 𝑀𝑃𝑎
Then,
According to the geometry of the gusset connection, there are two free edges:
𝐻1𝑔
𝐿𝑓𝑔 1 = = 466 𝑚𝑚
𝑠𝑒𝑛 𝜃 + 30°
1 𝐵𝑔
𝐿𝑓𝑔 2 = = 674 𝑚𝑚
2 𝑠𝑒𝑛(𝜃 − 30°)
Then, according to Astaneh, the maximum free edge length that does not
generates buckling is:
𝐸
𝐿𝑓𝑔𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.75𝑡𝑔𝑝 = 542 𝑚𝑚
𝐹𝑦
4-98
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
Then, the first free edge complies with the requirements. The second one
does not comply, so stiffeners have to be provided as shown in Figure 4.6-8.
STIFFENERS
(NOT DESIGNED)
Designed Connection
PL1100X135X38
H300X300X135.8
M24
12 TYP
t = 30 mm
12
M24
M24
STIFFENERS
(NOT DESIGNED)
26
2 PL540X240X14 26
TYP
H400X400X219.0
4-99
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 4: BRACE CONNECTIONS
4-100
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5. SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.1. Shear tab beam-to-column connection (single plate
connection)
1. NCh2369.Of2003:
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements shown in the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to 70% of the nominal tensile strength. Always
the nominal strength shall be verified as a bearing type connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.6)
For field joints, see requirements of section 8.5.8.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.8)
Check applicable limit states for bolts (part 7 of the AISC Construction
Manual).
Check applicable limit states for welds (part 8 of the AISC Construction
Manual).
Check applicable limit states for the connecting elements (part 9 of the
AISC Construction Manual).
5-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
The horizontal edge distance, 𝐿𝑒 , must be equal to or greater than 2𝑑𝑏 for
both the plate and the beam web.
The vertical edge distance, Lev, must satisfy requirements from table J3.4
of AISC 360-05 specification. (Minimum edge distances from center of
STD hole to edge of connected part, for more information, see AISC
Manual of Steel Construction)
𝑑𝑏
The thickness of the plate and the beam web must satisfy 𝑡 ≤ + 1.6 𝑚𝑚
2
Furthermore, in the conventional configuration, the connection plate must be
welded on both sides for the connection with the column flange. It is
recommended that the length of the connecting plate must be greater than
one half of the depth of the beam.
Following the requirements described above, the connection must be verified
for bolt shear, block shear rupture, bearing, shear yielding and shear rupture.
The advantage of the conventional configuration is that neither buckling of the
plate nor the eccentricity of the bolts has to be verified. If STD holes are used
and the number of bolts is less than 10, plate buckling limit state will not
control for the conventional configuration.
a Leh
n - 1 @ 3" Lev
L
L ev
Figure 5.1-1: General provisions for the shear tab connection conventional
configuration. From AISC Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Ed, figure 10-1
5.1.c. Example
5-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝑉𝐷 = 90 𝑘𝑁 𝑉𝐿 = 120 𝑘𝑁
H400X300X83.5
H300X300X87.3
PL HxBxt
H300x300x87.3
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
H400x300x83.5
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
5-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes.
2. Design Forces
3. Bolts
Use M20 bolts (20 mm of diameter, standard holes of 22 mm), ASTM A490
threads included in the shear plane. Even though NCh2369.Of2003 does not
require to verify the connection as slip critical, sometimes project
specifications do require it.
Tip:
It is important to notice that following the requirements for conventional shear
tab configurations, as defined on AISC Manual of Steel Construction 13th
edition, the thicknesses of the connecting plate and beam web are controlled
by the size of the bolt.
𝜇 = 0.35
𝑠𝑐 = 1.00
𝐷𝑢 = 1.13
Also, the tensile nominal strength for M20 ASTM 490 bolts is
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 60 𝑘𝑁
5-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical
strength is: 𝑁𝐵 ≥ 4.98. Use 𝑁𝐵 = 5 bolts.
Where 𝐴𝑏 is the nominal gross area of the bolt, and in this example the
threads are supposed to be not excluded from the shear plane, then:
𝐴𝑏 = 314 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 97 𝑘𝑁
The number of bolts required for the connection is: 𝑁𝐵 > 3.1.
𝐿𝑀𝐼𝑁 = 4 × 60 𝑚𝑚 + 2 × 34 𝑚𝑚 = 308 𝑚𝑚
𝐵𝑀𝐼𝑁 = 2 × 34 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑑𝑐
With 𝑑𝑐 the gap between the column and the beam, use 𝑑𝑐 = 12 mm, then:
𝐵𝑀𝐼𝑁 = 2 × 34 𝑚𝑚 + 12𝑚𝑚 = 80 𝑚𝑚
𝐿𝑒 = 40 𝑚𝑚 ≥ 2𝑑𝑏 = 40 𝑚𝑚 OK
𝑎 = 50 𝑚𝑚 < 88 𝑚𝑚 OK
5-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Interior bolts
𝐿𝑐 = 60𝑚𝑚 − 22𝑚𝑚 = 38 𝑚𝑚
Exterior bolts
5-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝑑𝑏
𝑡 = 8𝑚𝑚 < + 1.6 𝑚𝑚 = 11.6 𝑚𝑚 OK
2
The nominal strength for the shear yielding limit state is:
The nominal strength for the shear rupture limit state is:
Where 𝐴𝑛𝑣 is the net area of the plate, which considers the reduction of the
section due to bolt holes, the calculation diameter for M20 holes is:
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤ 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 (Re. AISC360-05, J4-5)
5-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝜙 = 0.75
Where Ubs = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary in AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05 C-J4.2). The values of 𝐴𝑛𝑣 , 𝐴𝑛𝑡 and 𝐴𝑔𝑣 are obtained
from the following figure:
Then:
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐿 − 50 𝑚𝑚 − 4.5 × 𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡 = 1456 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 𝐿 − 50 𝑚𝑚 𝑡 = 2320 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 40 𝑚𝑚 − 0.5𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡 = 224 𝑚𝑚2
𝑅𝑛 = 2.4𝑑𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑢
𝜙 = 0.75
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟔 𝒌𝑵
5-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Tip:
In this case it only has to be verified the bearing strength of the beam web
because there is no cope in the end of the beam; however if the beam is coped
in the end it has to be verified the tear out limit state.
9. Weld shear
The weld used for the connection between the plate and column flange are two
lines of welds parallel to the shear for both sides of the plate of connection,
(see Figure 5.1-53), then the eccentricity between the weld and the bolts line
is:
𝑒 = 50 𝑚𝑚
Since there are shear and moment acting on the connection, it is used an
elastic method for the calculation of the maximum stress for the weld.
𝑀 𝑤𝑒
𝑓𝑥 = (Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Chapter 8)
𝐼𝑥 2
𝑉𝑢
𝑓𝑦 =
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓
𝑓𝑢 = 𝑓𝑥2 + 𝑓𝑦2
Where 𝐼𝑥 is the inertia of the weld and 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 is the effective area of the weld.
Use 6 mm fillet welds , and the length of the weld, 𝑤𝑒 , is equal to the
length of the plate minus two times the thickness of the plate, 𝑤𝑒 = 324 𝑚𝑚 ,
therefore:
5-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
6
6
H400X300X83.5
H300X300X87.3
PL 340x90x8
5-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.1.d. References
5-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369. Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements of the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to a 70% of the nominal tensile strength.
Always the nominal strength shall be verified as a bearing type
connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
Part 10 of the AISC construction manual requires the following verifications for
shear single angle connections:
Check applicable limit states for bolts, part 7 of the AISC Construction
Manual.
Check applicable limit states for the connecting elements, part 9 of the
AISC Construction Manual.
Furthermore, the AISC Construction Manual has the following verifications for
single angle connections:
Always consider the eccentricity for the bolts in the angle leg attached to
the support. For the calculation of the nominal resistance of bolts subject
to eccentric loads, use the provisions of part 7 of AISC manual of Steel
Construction.
Consider eccentricity when there are two rows of bolts or when the
eccentricity is greater than 3 in (76 mm).
5-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.2.c. Example
Design a shear single angle all bolted connection between a column flange and
a beam as shown in Figure 5.2-1. Use A250ESP steel, required for
constructions subject to dynamics loads, according to NCh203.Of2006 code,
Table 3.
𝑉𝐷 = 110 𝑘𝑁
𝑉𝐿 = 150 𝑘𝑁
H450X250X111.8
H300X300X87.3
5-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
H300x300x87.3
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
H450x250x111.8
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
BOLTS: ASTM A490 bolts, threads included in the shear plane, STD holes.
2. Design Forces
3. Bolts
For the angle leg attached to the beam the verifications to be done will be bolt
shear, bolt bearing and the solicitation will be the design shear established on
the previous section, but for bolts attached to the column it is important to
consider the eccentricity of the connection and the design force will be
different.
Try M24 bolts (24 mm of diameter, standard holes of 27 mm, refer to Bolted
Connections section on this manual).
5-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝜇 = 0.35
𝑠𝑐 = 1.00
𝐷𝑢 = 1.13
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟔 𝒌𝑵
The number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical failure
is: 𝑁𝐵 > 4.32. Use 𝑁𝐵 = 5.
Where 𝐴𝑏 is the nominal gross area of the bolt. Threads are not excluded from
shear plane:
𝐴𝑏 = 452 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝒌𝑵 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
The number of bolts required for the connection considering shear nominal
strength is: 𝑁𝐵 > 2.67.
5-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝐻𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 4 × 64 𝑚𝑚 + 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 = 320 𝑚𝑚
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑑𝑐
With 𝑑𝑐 the spacing between the column and the beam, use 𝑑𝑐 = 12 𝑚𝑚, then:
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 + 12𝑚𝑚 = 76 𝑚𝑚
Use a L80 x 80 x t x 320 angle, with “t” the thickness of the angle leg.
Corresponds to the distance between the shear plane of the bolts attached to
the beam and the line of bolts attached to the column (see Figure 5.2-2),
then:
𝑒1 = 48 𝑚𝑚
Correspond to the distance between the line of bolts attached to the beam and
the face of column flange.
A A
A-A
Figure 5.2-2: Dimensions of bolts (equal to the connection of the leg attached
to the column).
5-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Then, there is no need of consider the eccentricity of the bolts attached to the
beam.
Interior bolt
Considering a angle thickness 𝒕 = 𝟖 𝒎𝒎, then the bearing strength of the plate
is:
𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 ≤ 2.4𝑑𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 184 𝑘𝑁 (Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
𝜙 = 0.75
𝐿𝑐 = 64 𝑚𝑚 − 27 𝑚𝑚 = 37 𝑚𝑚
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟎𝟔 𝒌𝑵 < 138 𝑘𝑁
Exterior bolt
27
𝐿𝑐 = 32 𝑚𝑚 − = 18.5 𝑚𝑚
2
Then,
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟓𝟑 𝒌𝑵 ≤ 𝟏𝟑𝟖 𝒌𝑵
5-17
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
According to the AISC Construction Manual, part 7, there are two methods for
the calculation of the force in bolts with eccentricity, the instantaneous center
of rotation method and the elastic method. We use the elastic method, which
is more conservative than the instantaneous center of rotation since the first
does not consider the ductility of the bolts and the redistribution of stresses.
The elastic method is simpler.
Then,
2 2
𝑟𝑢 = 𝑟𝑝𝑥 + 𝑟𝑚𝑥 + 𝑟𝑝𝑦 + 𝑟𝑚𝑦 (Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, part 7)
𝑉𝑢
𝑟𝑝𝑦 =
𝑁𝐵
𝑉𝑢 𝑒𝑐𝑦
𝑟𝑚𝑥 =
𝐼𝑝
𝑟𝑚𝑦 = 𝑟𝑝𝑥 = 0 (There are only shear forces and there is no axial force in the
beam)
Where 𝐼𝑝 and 𝑐𝑦 are the polar moment of inertia with respect to the center of
gravity of the bolts and 𝑐𝑦 is the maximum distance of a bolt of the connection
with respect to the center of gravity of the system. Considering the disposition
shown in the Figure 5.2-3, we have:
𝑁𝐵
5-18
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
y
x
Then:
𝑟𝑝𝑦 = 75 𝑘𝑁
𝑟𝑚𝑥 = 56 𝑘𝑁
𝑟𝑢 = 94 𝑘𝑁
The strength of the bolts is the minimum between the bearing of the holes and
the shear strength for bolts, then:
Then,
5-19
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 = 27 𝑚𝑚 + 2 𝑚𝑚 = 29 𝑚𝑚
Then,
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐻 − 𝑁𝐵 𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡 = 1400 𝑚𝑚2
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟓𝟐 𝒌𝑵 < 372 𝑘𝑁
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤ 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 (Re. Section J4-5 AISC 360-05)
𝜙 = 0.75
Where 𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary of the AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05, C-J4.2). The values of 𝐴𝑛𝑣 , 𝐴𝑛𝑡 and 𝐴𝑔𝑣 are
obtained from the following figure:
5-20
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Then,
Then:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟒𝟎𝟑 𝒌𝑵 < 452 𝑘𝑁
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟒𝟎𝟑 𝒌𝑵 > 372 𝑘𝑁 OK
𝑅𝑛 = 2.4𝑑𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑢
𝜙 = 0.75
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟑𝟖 𝒌𝑵
Tip
In this case it has to be verified only the bearing strength of the beam web
because there is no cope in the end of the beam; however if the beam would
be coped in the ends then the tear out and the block shear limit states shall
also be verified.
The leg of the angle that is attached to the column is subjected to bending
with respect to the axis of the beam; therefore, the leg of the angle is subject
to a flexural solicitation given by:
𝑀𝑢 = 𝑒1 × 𝑉𝑢 = 48 × 372 = 17856 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
Flexural yielding
5-21
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝐻2 𝑡
𝑍𝑥 = = 307200 𝑚𝑚3
4
𝝓𝑴𝒏 = 𝟔𝟐𝟏𝟐𝟎 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 OK
Flexural rupture
For the flexural yielding, we have that the nominal strength is given by:
Then,
𝑁𝐵
𝐻2 𝑡
𝑍𝑥 𝑛𝑒𝑡 = −𝑡 𝑦𝑖 𝑑 = 173568 𝑚𝑚3
4
𝑖=1
Where 𝑦𝑖 is the position of the center of the bolt’s holes and 𝑑 is the hole
diameter. Then,
𝝓𝑴𝒏 = 𝟓𝟐𝟎𝟕𝟎 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 OK
Connection Designed:
A A
H300X300X87.3
10 M24 A490
L80X80X12X320
H450X250X111.8
A-A
H300X300X87.3
L80X80X12X320
5-22
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.2.d. References
5-23
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369. Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements shown in the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to 70% of the nominal tensile strength. Always
the nominal strength shall be verified as a bearing type connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
For double angle connections where the bolts are in one row through the
web of the supported beam, it is not necessary to consider the eccentricity
effects on the bolts; however, in welded connections, eccentricity shall be
always considered.
To provide for flexibility, the maximum angle thickness for use with
workable gages should be limited to 15 mm.
It is recommended that the minimum angle length must be greater than
one half of the beam T- dimension.
5-24
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.3.c. Example
Design a shear double angle all bolted connection between a column flange
and a beam shown in Figure 5.3-1. Use A250 ESP steel, required for
constructions subject to dynamics loads, according to NCh203.Of2006 code,
Table 3.
𝑉𝐷 = 110 𝑘𝑁
𝑉𝐿 = 150 𝑘𝑁
H300X300X87.3
A A
H450X250X111.8
A-A
H300X300X87.3
H300x300x87.3
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
5-25
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝑡𝑤 = 8 𝑚𝑚, 𝑡𝑓 = 22 𝑚𝑚
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear plane, STD holes.
2. Design Forces
3. Bolts
For the angle legs attached to the column there will be twice the number of
bolts than in the angle legs attached to the beam. However for the bolts
attached to the beam there are two slip planes so whatever of both cases that
we will verify, the final design will lead to the same number of required bolts.
The verifications to be done will be bolt shear, bolt slip critical failure, bolt
bearing and the solicitation will be the design shear established in the previous
section.
𝜇 = 0.35
𝑠𝑐 = 1.00
𝐷𝑢 = 1.13
Also, the tensile nominal strength for M24 ASTM 490 bolts is:
5-26
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Since there is a double angle connection between the column flange and the
beam, we have two slips planes (and also the number of bolts in the
connection to the column is twice than the connection to the beam, so the
resistance for both connections will be the same), then 𝑁𝑆 = 2.0.
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟕𝟐 𝒌𝑵
The number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical failure
is: 𝑁𝐵 > 2.16. Use 𝑁𝐵 = 3 bolts for the legs attached to the beam and 𝑁𝐵 = 6 for
the legs attached at the column.
𝐴𝑏 = 452 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟒𝟎 𝒌𝑵
But it has to be considered that there are two bearing points between the
connecting angle and the bolts, therefore for one bolt:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟒𝟎 𝒌𝑵
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering shear
nominal strength is: 𝑁𝐵 > 1.55.
The slip critical limit state controls the design, therefore use 𝑵𝒃 = 𝟑 bolts for
the legs attached to the beam and 𝑵𝑩 = 𝟔 bolts for the legs attached at the
column.
5-27
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝐻𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 64 𝑚𝑚 + 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 = 192 𝑚𝑚
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑑𝑐
With 𝑑𝑐 the spacing between the column and the beam, use 𝑑𝑐 = 12 𝑚𝑚, then:
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 + 12𝑚𝑚 = 76 𝑚𝑚
Interior bolts
5-28
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝐿𝑐 = 64 𝑚𝑚 − 27 𝑚𝑚 = 37 𝑚𝑚
Exterior bolts
27
𝐿𝑐 = 51 𝑚𝑚 − = 37.5 𝑚𝑚
2
Then,
Given that there are two angles at the connection, the total capacity of the
connection is:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟕𝟔 𝒌𝑵
Given that there are two angles at the connection, the total capacity of the
connection is:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐 × 𝟐𝟕𝟔 𝒌𝑵 = 𝟓𝟓𝟐 𝒌𝑵 > 372 𝑘𝑁 OK
5-29
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 = 27 𝑚𝑚 + 2 𝑚𝑚
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤ 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 (Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)
𝜙 = 0.75
Where 𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary in AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05, C-J4.2). The values of 𝐴𝑛𝑣 , 𝐴𝑛𝑡 and 𝐴𝑔𝑣 are
obtained from the following figure:
5-30
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Then:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟏𝟔 𝒌𝑵 < 224 𝑘𝑁
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟏𝟔 𝒌𝑵
𝑅𝑛 = 2.4𝑑𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑢
𝜙 = 0.75
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟑𝟖 𝒌𝑵
Tip
In this case it only has to be verified the bearing strength of the beam web
because there is no cope in the end of the beam; however if the beam is coped
in the end it has to be verified the tear out limit state.
5-31
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Designed connection
H300X300X87.3
A A
9 M24 A490
H450X250X111.8 A-A
H300X300X87.3
2 L80X80X8X230
References
5-32
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369. Of2003:
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements show in the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to a 70% of the nominal tensile strength.
Always the nominal strength shall be verified as a bearing type
connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
Check applicable limit states for bolts (part 7 of the AISC Manual of Steel
Construction).
Check applicable limit states for the connecting elements (part 9 of the
AISC Manual of Steel Construction).
Always consider the eccentricity for the bolts in the angle leg attached to
the support. For the calculation of the nominal resistance of bolts subject
to eccentrically loads, use the dispositions of part 7 of AISC Manual of
Steel Construction, 13th edition.
Consider eccentricity when there are two rows of bolts or when the
eccentricity, e, is greater than 3 in. (76 mm)
5-33
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.4.c. Example
Design a shear single angle all bolted connection between a beam web and a
girder shown in the Figure 5.4-1. Use A250ESP steel, required for
constructions subject to dynamics loads, according to NCh203.Of2006 code,
Table 3.
The beam and the girder are respectively Chilean H300 x 150 x54.8 and
H250x150x52.5 built-up sections. Suppose that the connection only transfers
shear forces and assume that the sections have been designed to resist those
forces.
𝑉𝐷 = 40 𝑘𝑁
𝑉𝐿 = 60 𝑘𝑁
H250X150X52.5
Girder
H300X150X54.8
H300x150x54.8
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
5-34
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
H250x150x52.5
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads include in the shear plane, STD holes.
2. Design Forces
3. Bolts
For the angle leg attached to the girder the verifications must include bolt
shear, bolt bearing; the solicitation will be the design shear, but for bolts
attached to the beam we have to consider the eccentricity of the connection
and the design force will be different.
𝜇 = 0.35
𝑠𝑐 = 1.00
𝐷𝑢 = 1.13
Also, the tensile nominal strength for M20 ASTM 490 bolts is:
5-35
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟔𝟎 𝒌𝑵
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical
failure is: 𝑁𝐵 > 2.4. Use 𝑁𝐵 = 3.
𝐴𝑏 = 314 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟗𝟕 𝒌𝑵
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering shear
nominal strength is: 𝑁𝐵 > 1.48.
𝐻𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 60 𝑚𝑚 + 2 × 34 𝑚𝑚 = 188 𝑚𝑚
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 34 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑑𝑐
With 𝑑𝑐 the spacing between the girder and the beam, we use 𝑑𝑐 = 12 𝑚𝑚:
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 34 𝑚𝑚 + 12𝑚𝑚 = 80 𝑚𝑚
5-36
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Now that we have the dimensions of the angles we can determine the
eccentricity of the connection:
Considering the distance between the shear plane of the bolts attached to the
girder and the centerline of the bolts attached to the beam, the eccentricity is:
𝑒1 = 46 𝑚𝑚
Considering the distance between the shear plane of the bolts attached to the
beam and the centerline of the bolts attached to the girder, the eccentricity is:
𝑒2 = 34 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑑𝑐 = 46 𝑚𝑚 < 3" = 76 𝑚𝑚
(Re. Part 10 Manual of Steel Construction)
Then there is no need to consider the eccentricity of the bolts attached to the
beam.
A A
Beam web
A-A
5-37
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Interior bolt
Considering that the angle thickness is 𝑡 = 8 𝑚𝑚, the bearing strength of the
angle leg is:
𝐿𝑐 = 60 𝑚𝑚 − 22 𝑚𝑚 = 38 𝑚𝑚
Then, we have:
Exterior bolt
22
𝐿𝑐 = 40 𝑚𝑚 − 𝑚𝑚 = 29 𝑚𝑚
2
Then,
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟑 𝒌𝑵 ≤ 𝟏𝟏𝟓 𝒌𝑵
According to the AISC Manual of Steel Construction, part 7, there are two
methods for the calculation of the force in bolts with eccentricity: the
5-38
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Then,
2 2
𝑟𝑢 = 𝑟𝑝𝑥 + 𝑟𝑚𝑥 + 𝑟𝑝𝑦 + 𝑟𝑚𝑦 (Re. AISC Construction manual, chapter 7)
𝑉𝑢
𝑟𝑝𝑦 =
𝑁𝐵
𝑉𝑢 𝑒𝑐𝑦
𝑟𝑚𝑥 =
𝐼𝑝
𝑟𝑚𝑦 = 𝑟𝑝𝑥 = 0
(There are only shear forces and no axial force is present on the girder)
Where 𝐼𝑝 and 𝑐𝑦 are the polar moment of inertia with respect to the center of
gravity of the bolts and the maximum distance of a bolt of the connection with
respect to the center of gravity of the system. Then, with the disposition
shown in Figure 5.4-3:
𝑁𝐵
y
x
5-39
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Then:
𝑟𝑝𝑦 = 48 𝑘𝑁
𝑟𝑚𝑥 = 55 𝑘𝑁
𝑟𝑢 = 73 𝑘𝑁
The strength of the bolts is the minimum between the bearing of the holes and
the shear strength for bolts, then:
The nominal strength for the shear yielding limit state is:
Then,
𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 = 22 𝑚𝑚 + 2 𝑚𝑚
Then,
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐻 − 𝑁𝐵 𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡 = 1024 𝑚𝑚2
5-40
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤ 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 (Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)
𝜙 = 0.75
Where 𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary of the AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05, C-J4.2). The values of 𝐴𝑛𝑣 , 𝐴𝑛𝑡 and 𝐴𝑔𝑣 are
obtained from the following figure:
Then:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟗𝟔 𝒌𝑵 ≥ 196 𝑘𝑁
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟗𝟔 𝒌𝑵 > 𝟏𝟒𝟒 𝒌𝑵 OK
In this example it is necessary to cope the top flange of the girder. First define
the dimensions of the cope:
5-41
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
The dimensions of the cope are given by the section properties of the beam,
then:
𝑑𝑐 = 𝑡𝑓 𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 + 2 𝑚𝑚 = 20 𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑓 𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑡𝑤 𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚
𝑐= − + 2 𝑚𝑚 = 74 𝑚𝑚
2 2
𝑒 = 𝑐 + 12 𝑚𝑚 = 86 𝑚𝑚
With the dimensions of the cope, proceed with the calculation of the tear out
and bearing nominal strengths.
The nominal strength of the tear out and bolt bearing limit states is:
𝐿𝑐 = 60 𝑚𝑚 − 22 𝑚𝑚 = 38 𝑚𝑚
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟐 𝒌𝑵 < 86 𝑘𝑁
5-42
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟕𝟑 𝒌𝑵 < 86 𝑘𝑁
We have that for the angle leg attached to the beam, the flexural solicitation
is:
𝑀𝑢 = 𝑒1 × 𝑉𝑢 = 46 × 144 = 6624 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
Flexural yielding
𝑀𝑛 = 𝜙𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥
𝜙 = 0.9
𝐻2 𝑡
𝑍𝑥 = = 80000 𝑚𝑚3
4
𝝓𝑴𝒏 = 𝟏𝟖𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 OK
Flexural rupture
For the flexural rupture, the nominal strength is given by the expression
obtained from the chapter 15 of the AISC construction manual:
𝑀𝑛 = 𝜙𝐹𝑢 𝑍𝑥 𝑛𝑒𝑡
𝜙 = 0.75
𝑁𝐵
𝐻2 𝑡
𝑍𝑥 𝑛𝑒𝑡 = −𝑡 𝑦𝑖 𝑑 = 58880 𝑚𝑚3
4
𝑖=1
𝝓𝑴𝒏 = 𝟏𝟕𝟔𝟔𝟒 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 OK
5-43
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Where 𝑦𝑖 is the distance to the center of the connection to the center of the
bolt hole, and 𝑑 is the dimension of the bolt hole.
According to
Figure 5.4-5, the flexural required strength for the coped girder is:
𝑀𝑢 = e × 𝑉𝑢 = 12384 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝜋2 𝐸 𝑡𝑤 2
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 𝑓𝑘, 𝜈 = 0.3
12 1 − 𝜈 2 𝑜
2𝑐 𝑐
𝑓= if ≤ 1.0
𝑑 𝑑
𝑜 1.65 𝑐
𝑘 = 2.2 if ≤ 1.0
𝑐 𝑜
𝒄 = 𝟕𝟒 𝒎𝒎 < 𝟐𝒅 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎 OK
𝒅𝒄 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒎𝒎 < 𝟎. 𝟐𝒅 = 𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎 OK
Additionally, 𝑆𝑛𝑒𝑡 :
𝑜 = 𝑑 − 𝑑𝑐 = 230 𝑚𝑚
𝑡 𝑤 𝑜2 −𝑡 𝑓2 𝑡 𝑓2 𝑏 𝑓
+
2 2
𝑥= = 45.82 𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑤 𝑜 − 𝑡𝑓 + 𝑡𝑓 𝑏𝑓
3 2 2
𝑡𝑤 𝑜 − 𝑡𝑓 𝑜 + 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑓
𝐼𝑥 = + 𝑜 − 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤 𝑥 − + 𝑡𝑓 𝑏𝑓 𝑥 − = 16199094 𝑚𝑚4
12 2 2
5-44
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝐼𝑥
𝑆𝑛𝑒𝑡 = = 87952 𝑚𝑚3
𝑜 − 𝑥
𝒄 𝟕𝟒 𝒎𝒎
= = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟗𝟔 OK
𝒅 𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝒄 𝟕𝟒 𝒎𝒎
= = 𝟎. 𝟑𝟐 OK
𝒉𝒐 𝟐𝟑𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑘 = 14.29
𝑓 = 0.592
𝑭𝒄𝒓 = 𝟏𝟎𝟒𝟎 𝑴𝑷𝒂
Flexural rupture:
𝝓𝑴𝒏 = 𝟐𝟔𝟑𝟖𝟓 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 > 12384 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚 OK
Flexural buckling:
𝝓𝑴𝒏 = 𝟖𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟑 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 > 𝟏𝟐𝟑𝟖𝟒 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 OK
Since the girder is coped at the top end, in this example we have to also verify
the block shear nominal strength of the girder web.
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤ 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 (Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)
𝜙 = 0.75
Where 𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary of the AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05, C-J4.2). The values of 𝐴𝑛𝑣 , 𝐴𝑛𝑡 and 𝐴𝑔𝑣 are
obtained from the following figure:
5-45
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Then,
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 165 𝑚𝑚 − 2.5𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡𝑤 = 630 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 165 𝑚𝑚 𝑡𝑤 = 990 𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 34 𝑚𝑚 − 0.5𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡𝑤 = 132 𝑚𝑚2
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟓𝟑 𝒌𝑵 > 150 𝑘𝑁
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟓𝟎 𝒌𝑵 > 𝟏𝟒𝟒 𝒌𝑵 OK
Tip
In this example the girder was coped at only the top end, but if the beam was
coped at both ends it shall be also verified the shear rupture and shear
yielding of the beam web.
Designed Connection
H250X150X52.5
L80X80X8X200
6 M20 A490
H300X150X54.8
Figure 5.4-7: Single angle connection. Connection to the beam is the same.
5-46
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
References
5-47
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369. Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding shall
comply with the requirements shown in the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to 70% of the nominal tensile strength. Always
the nominal strength shall be verified as a bearing type connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
For double angle connections where the bolts are in one row it is not
necessary to consider the eccentricity effects on the bolts; however, in
welded connections, eccentricity shall be always considered.
To provide for flexibility, the maximum angle thickness for use with
workable gages should be limited to 15 mm.
It is recommended that the minimum angle length must be greater than
one half of the beam T-dimension.
5-48
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.5.c. Example
Design a shear double angle all bolted connection between a beam web and a
girder shown in the Figure 5.5-1. Use A250 ESP steel, required for
constructions subject to dynamics loads, according to NCh203.Of2006 code,
Table 3.
The beam and the girder are a Chilean H300 x 150 x 54.8 and a H 250 x 150 x
52.5 built-up sections. Suppose that the connection only transfers shear forces
and assume that the sections have been designed to resist those forces.
𝑉𝐷 = 40 𝑘𝑁
𝑉𝐿 = 60 𝑘𝑁
H250X150X52.5
H300X150X54.8
Figure 5.5-1: General view of the connection.
5-49
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear plane, STD holes.
2. Design Forces
3. Bolts
For the angle legs attached to the girder web there will be twice the number of
bolts than in the angle legs attached to the beam. However for the bolts
attached to the beam there are slip planes so whatever of both cases that we
will verify, the final design will lead to the same number of required bolts. The
verifications to be done will be bolt shear, bolt slip critical failure, bolt bearing
and the solicitation will be the design shear established in the previous section.
Try M20 bolts (20 mm of diameter, standard holes of 22 mm, refer to Bolted
Connections section 2.4 on this Manual)
𝜇 = 0.35
𝑠𝑐 = 1.00
𝐷𝑢 = 1.13
Also the tensile nominal strength for M20 ASTM 490 bolts is:
5-50
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟐𝟎 𝒌𝑵
The number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical
resistance is: 𝑁𝑏 > 1.2. Therefore use 𝑁𝐵 = 2 bolts for the legs attached to the
girder and 𝑁𝐵 = 4 bolts for the legs attached at the beam.
𝐴𝑏 = 314 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟗𝟕 𝒌𝑵
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟗𝟒 𝒌𝑵
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering shear
nominal strength is: 𝑁𝐵 > 0.74.
The slip critical resistance controls the design; use 𝑵𝒃 = 𝟐 bolts for the legs
attached to the girder and 𝑵𝒃 = 𝟒 bolts for the legs attached to the beam.
𝐻𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 1 × 60 𝑚𝑚 + 2 × 34 𝑚𝑚 = 128 𝑚𝑚
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 34 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑑𝑐
5-51
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
With 𝑑𝑐 the spacing between the column and the beam; use 𝑑𝑐 = 12 𝑚𝑚:
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 34 𝑚𝑚 + 12𝑚𝑚 = 80 𝑚𝑚
Interior bolts
Considering that the plate thickness is 𝒕 = 𝟔 𝒎𝒎, we have that the bearing
strength of the angle is:
𝐿𝑐 = 60 𝑚𝑚 − 22 = 38 𝑚𝑚
Then:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟏 𝒌𝑵 < 85 𝑘𝑁
External bolts
5-52
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Then:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟓𝟏 𝒌𝑵 ≤ 𝟖𝟓 𝒌𝑵
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟏 𝒌𝑵 + 𝟓𝟏 𝒌𝑵 = 𝟏𝟑𝟐 𝒌𝑵
Given that the shear force is resisted by the two angles of the connection, the
total capacity of the connection is:
Given that the shear force is resisted by the two angles of the connection, the
total capacity of the connection is:
𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 = 22 𝑚𝑚 + 2 𝑚𝑚 = 24 𝑚𝑚
Then,
5-53
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤ 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 (Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)
𝜙 = 0.75
Where 𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary in AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05, C-J4.2). The values of Anv, Ant and Agv are obtained
from the following figure:
In this it is necessary to cope the top flange of the girder. First define the
dimensions of the cope:
5-54
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
The dimensions of the cope are given by the section properties of the beam,
then:
𝑑𝑐 = 𝑡𝑓 𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 + 2 𝑚𝑚 = 20 𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑓 𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑡𝑤 𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚
𝑐= − + 2 𝑚𝑚 = 74 𝑚𝑚
2 2
𝑒 = 𝑐 + 12 𝑚𝑚 = 86 𝑚𝑚
With the dimensions of the cope, proceed with the calculation of the tear out
and bearing nominal strengths.
The nominal strength of the tear out and bolt bearing limit states is:
𝐿𝑐 = 60 𝑚𝑚 − 22 𝑚𝑚 = 38 𝑚𝑚
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟐 𝒌𝑵 < 86 𝑘𝑁
𝑑𝑔𝑖𝑟𝑑𝑒𝑟 22
𝐿𝑐 = – 𝑑𝑐 − 30 𝑚𝑚 − 𝑚𝑚 = 64 𝑚𝑚
2 2
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟑𝟖 𝒌𝑵 > 86 𝑘𝑁
5-55
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟔 𝒌𝑵
According to Figure 5.5-4, the flexural moment that it has to be used for
verifying the resistance of the coped beam is:
𝑀𝑢 = 𝑒𝑉𝑢 = 12384 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
Rupture strength
𝑀𝑛 = 𝐹𝑢 𝑆𝑛𝑒𝑡
𝜙 = 0.75
Buckling strength
𝜋2 𝐸 𝑡𝑤 2
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 𝑓𝑘, 𝜈 = 0.3
12 1 − 𝜈 2 𝑜
2𝑐 𝑐
𝑓= if ≤ 1.0
𝑑 𝑑
𝑜 1.65 𝑐
𝑘 = 2.2 if ≤ 1.0
𝑐 𝑜
𝒄 = 𝟕𝟒 𝒎𝒎 < 2𝒅 = 𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎 OK
𝒅𝒄 = 𝟐𝟎 𝒎𝒎 < 𝟎. 𝟐𝒅 = 𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎 OK
𝑜 = 𝑑 − 𝑑𝑐 = 230 𝑚𝑚
5-56
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝑡 𝑤 𝑜2 −𝑡 𝑓2 𝑡 𝑓2 𝑏 𝑓
+
2 2
𝑥= = 45.82 𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑤 𝑜 − 𝑡𝑓 + 𝑡𝑓 𝑏𝑓
3 2 2
𝑡𝑤 𝑜 − 𝑡𝑓 𝑜 + 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑓
𝐼𝑥 = + 𝑜 − 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤 𝑥 − + 𝑡𝑓 𝑏𝑓 𝑥 − = 16199094 𝑚𝑚4
12 2 2
𝐼𝑥
𝑆𝑛𝑒𝑡 = = 87952 𝑚𝑚3
𝑜 − 𝑥
𝒄 𝟕𝟒 𝒎𝒎
= = 𝟎. 𝟐𝟗𝟔 OK
𝒅 𝟐𝟓𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝒄 𝟕𝟒 𝒎𝒎
= = 𝟎. 𝟑𝟐 OK
𝒉𝒐 𝟐𝟑𝟎 𝒎𝒎
𝑘 = 14.29
𝑓 = 0.592
𝑭𝒄𝒓 = 𝟏𝟎𝟒𝟎 𝑴𝑷𝒂
Then:
Flexural rupture:
𝝓𝑴𝒏 = 𝟐𝟔𝟑𝟖𝟓 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 OK
Flexural buckling:
𝝓𝑴𝒏 = 𝟖𝟐𝟑𝟐𝟑 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 OK
Since the girder is coped at the top end, in this example it is necessary to
verify the block shear nominal strength of the girder web.
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤ 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 (Re. J4-5 AISC 360-05)
𝜙 = 0.75
Where 𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary in AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05, C-J4.2). The values of 𝐴𝑛𝑣 , 𝐴𝑛𝑡 and 𝐴𝑔𝑣 are
obtained from the following figure:
5-57
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Then, the connection does not comply with the requirements. If the angle is
placed 30 mm below the actual position, as is shown in the next figure:
5.5-6: New Block Shear failure path for the new position of the angle.
5-58
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Tip
In this example the girder was coped at only the top end, but if the beam was
coped at both ends it should be also verified the shear rupture and shear
yielding of the girder web.
Designed Connection
H250X150X52.5
Beam web
A A
6 M20 A490
A-A
H300X150X54.8
References
5-59
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369. Of 2003:
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements show in the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to a 70% of the nominal tensile strength.
Always the nominal strength shall be verified as a bearing type
connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
Check applicable limit states for bolts (part 7 of the AISC Construction
Manual).
Check applicable limit states for the connecting elements (part 9 of the
AISC Construction Manual)
5-60
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5.6.c. Example
Design a shear stiffened seated all bolted connection between a column flange
and a beam shown in the Figure 5.6-2. Use A250ESP steel, required for
constructions subject to dynamics loads, according to NCh203.Of2006 code,
Table 3.
𝑉𝐷 = 110 𝑘𝑁
5-61
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝑉𝐿 = 150 𝑘𝑁
H450X250X108.7
H300X300X87.5
H300x300x87.3
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
H450x250x111.8
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear plane, STD holes.
5-62
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
2. Design Force
3. Bolts
The verifications to be done will be bolt shear and bolt slip critical failure. The
solicitation will be the design shear.
𝜇 = 0.35
𝑠𝑐 = 1.00
𝐷𝑢 = 1.13
Also the tensile nominal strength for M22 ASTM A490 bolts is:
For one bolt, the nominal strength for the slip critical limit state is:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟕𝟒 𝒌𝑵
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical
failure is: 𝑁𝑏 > 5.02. Use 𝑁𝐵 = 6.
5-63
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Where 𝐴𝑏 is the nominal gross area of the bolt, and threads are supposed to be
not excluded from the shear planes:
𝐴𝑏 = 380 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
𝒌𝑵
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟏𝟕
𝒃𝒐𝒍𝒕
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering shear
nominal strength is: 𝑁𝐵 > 3.17.
𝐻𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 66 𝑚𝑚 + 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 = 196 𝑚𝑚
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 = 64 𝑚𝑚
5-64
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
But it is convenient that the angles support all the base of the beam, so try
with an L 125 x 80 x 10 x 200 angle.
For the seat plate we follow the recommendations of Section 13.9 from “Steel
Structures” of Vinnakota. The thickness of the plate generally is between the
9.5 and 12.7 mm. Then use a thickness 𝒕𝒑 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎. For the length of the plate
use the width of the beam’s flange (250 mm); finally, for the width of the
plate use the same width of the angles, 80 mm, so consider a plate PL 250 x
80 x 10. Latter it will be necessary to verify if the width of the plate satisfies
the requirements for supporting the beam, since if the support is not large
enough failure of the connection due web crippling or local yielding of the
beam web can occur. For the connection between the plate and the angles
use the maximum fillet weld size permitted, which is the smaller thickness of
the elements connected minus 2 mm (Re. AISC 360-05, J2.2b). In this case
the thickness of the angles and the plate is 8 and 10 mm respectively, so use
𝒘 = 𝟖 𝒎𝒎 for the fillet weld. Welds are not permitted for the connection of the
plate and the flange of the beam (part 10 AISC Manual of Steel Construction).
Use two M22 bolts. See the following figure:
PL 250X80X10
8 8
5-65
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝜙 = 1.00
Where 𝑘 is the distance from the edge of the beam flange to the toe of the
fillet, and 𝑁 is the length of bearing that support the beam. The value of 𝑁
must be greater than 𝑘 for end beam reactions.
𝑘 = 𝑡𝑓 + 5 𝑚𝑚
𝑘 = 27 𝑚𝑚
𝑁 = 80 𝑚𝑚 − 𝑑𝑐 = 68 𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑤 = 8 𝑚𝑚
Then:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟕𝟏 𝒌𝑵 < 372 𝑘𝑁
Then, the connection does not comply with the requirements, so change the
plate to PL 250 x 135 x10 and change the angles to L 125 x 135 x 10 x
200. Then,
𝑁 = 135 𝑚𝑚 − 𝑑𝑐 = 123 𝑚𝑚
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟑𝟖𝟏 𝒌𝑵 > 372 𝑘𝑁 OK
𝐸
𝜆𝑝 = 0.56 = 15.83 (Re. AISC 360-05, table B4.1 case 3)
𝐹𝑦
𝑾 𝟏𝟑𝟓
𝝀= = = 𝟏𝟑. 𝟓 < 𝝀𝒑 OK
𝒕 𝟏𝟎
𝑅𝑛 = 1.8𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑝𝑏
𝜙 = 0.75
5-66
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Where 𝐴𝑝𝑏 is the bearing projected area. Salmon recommendation is that the
bearing area must be taken equal to:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟖𝟐𝟓 𝒌𝑵 OK
Tip:
If a welded plate was used as stiffener it should also considered the effect of
the eccentricity of the load into the calculation of the bearing strength. The
eccentricity generates additional stresses on the stiffener.
1.5
4𝑁 𝑡𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.40𝑡𝑤2 1 + − 0.2
𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤
𝜙 = 0.75 (Re. AISC 360-05, J10-5b)
𝑑 = 450 𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑤 = 8 𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑓 = 22
𝑁 = 135 𝑚𝑚 − 𝑑𝑐 = 123 𝑚𝑚
Therefore:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟔𝟗 𝒌𝑵 < 372 𝑘𝑁
Then, the nominal strength does not comply with the requirements, so use a
pair of stiffeners
5-67
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
110 × 103
𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓 = = 9166 𝑚𝑚3
12
𝐴𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓 = 110 × 10 = 1100 𝑚𝑚2
𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓
𝑟= = 2.88 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓
𝑘𝐿
= 140 > 25 (Section J4.4 AISC 360-05)
𝑟
Then, the design shall be done according the dispositions of the chapter E of
the AISC 360-05:
𝑘𝐿 𝐸
= 140 > 4.71 = 133, then:
𝑟 𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.877𝐹𝑒
𝜋2 𝐸
𝐹𝑒 = 2 = 101 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝑘𝐿
𝑟
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 89 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓
𝜙 = 0.9
Then,
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 88 𝑘𝑁
Then, the nominal strength of the two stiffener of the beam is:
5-68
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Interior bolt
Consider that the plate thickness is 𝒕 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎, the bearing strength of the
angle leg is:
𝐿𝑐 = 66 𝑚𝑚 − 24 = 42 𝑚𝑚
Then,
Exterior bolt
24
𝐿𝑐 = 34 𝑚𝑚 − = 22 𝑚𝑚
2
Then,
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟕𝟗 𝒌𝑵 ≤ 𝟏𝟓𝟖 𝒌𝑵
𝑅𝑛 = 2.4𝑑𝑡𝑓 𝐹𝑢
𝜙 = 0.75
5-69
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟐𝟏 𝒌𝑵
Tip:
By inspection it can be seen that tear out limit state does not control the
design.
For the top angle selection use the recommendations of chapter 10 of the AISC
Manual of Steel Construction. Use an L 100 X 100 X 6 X 250 angle. This
angle is connected to the beam by two bolts M20. This requires a minimum
space between bolts of 60 mm and a minimum distance to the edge of 34 mm,
requirements that are accomplished with the angle selected.
Designed connection
2 STIFFENERS
PL 406X110X10
H450X250X108.7
H300X300X87.5 8
PL 250X135X10
2 L125x135X20X200
6 M22 A490
5-70
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
References
5-71
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369. Of2003:
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements show in the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.1)
Bolts must be prestressed to a 70% of the nominal tensile strength.
Always the nominal strength shall be verified as a bearing type
connection.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003 8.5.6)
Check applicable limit states for bolts (part 7 of the AISC Manual of Steel
Construction).
Check applicable limit states for the connecting elements (part 9 of the
AISC Manual of Steel Construction).
5-72
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
According to section 13.3 of this book, bolts of the seat angle are
subject to shear and tension simultaneously, so their design shall be
made according to the provisions of the AISC 360 J3.7.
5.7.c. Example
Design a shear Unstiffened seated all bolted connection between the column
flange and the beam shown in the Figure 5.7-2. Use A250ESP steel, required
for constructions subject to dynamics loads, according NCh203.Of2006 code,
Table 3.
𝑉𝐷 = 100 𝑘𝑁
𝑉𝐿 = 150 𝑘𝑁
5-73
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
H450X250X111.8
H300X300X87.3
H300x300x87.3
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
H450x250x111.8
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads include in the shear plane, STD holes.
2. Design Forces
5-74
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
3. Bolts
The verifications to be done will be bolt shear and slip critical failure. Try M22
bolts (22 mm of diameter, standard holes of 24 mm).
Slip Critical
Also the tensile nominal strength for M22 ASTM 490 bolts is:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟕𝟒 𝒌𝑵
The number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical failure
is: 𝑁𝑏 > 4.86. Use for this type of failure 𝑁𝐵 = 6.
𝐴𝑏 = 380 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
5-75
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟏𝟏𝟕 𝒌𝑵
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering shear
nominal strength is: 𝑁𝐵 > 3.07.
𝐻𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 66 𝑚𝑚 + 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 = 196 𝑚𝑚
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 + 66 𝑚𝑚 = 130 𝑚𝑚
For the leg attached to the beam we have to consider only two bolts for
stability issues. The minimum dimensions of the leg are:
𝐻𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑑𝑐
𝐵𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 + 66 𝑚𝑚 = 130 𝑚𝑚
With 𝑑𝑐 the spacing between the column and the beam. Use 𝑑𝑐 = 12 𝑚𝑚:
𝐻𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 2 × 32 𝑚𝑚 + 12 𝑚𝑚 = 76 𝑚𝑚
However, it is convenient that the seat angle cover all the flange of the beam
so try with an angle L200 x 80 x 10 x 250.
5-76
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Even though the design of the shear connection was done with a slip critical
failure approach, for the interaction of shear and tension in the bolts, produced
by the eccentricity of the shear force, it will be used the bearing type of failure
instead of slip critical.
For the calculation of the eccentricity, suppose that the shear force is
distributed uniformly in the seat angle in which is supported.
𝑀𝑢 = 𝑉𝑢 𝑒1
80 − 12
𝑒1 = 12 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑚𝑚 = 46 𝑚𝑚
2
𝑀𝑢 = 16560 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
T1
T2
x dp1
d p2
2
𝐵𝑥 2
= 2𝐴𝑏 𝑑𝑝𝑖 − 𝑥
2
𝑖=1
𝐵 = 250 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑏 = 380 𝑚𝑚2
𝑑𝑝 1 = 200 𝑚𝑚 − 34 𝑚𝑚 = 166 𝑚𝑚
𝑑𝑝2 = 200 𝑚𝑚 − 34 𝑚𝑚 − 66 𝑚𝑚 = 100 𝑚𝑚
𝑑3 = 200 𝑚𝑚 − 34 𝑚𝑚 − 2 × 66 𝑚𝑚 = 34 𝑚𝑚
Where the summation considers that there are two rows of bolts in tension.
Then,
5-77
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝑥 = 34.6 𝑚𝑚
2 2 𝑥3𝐵 𝑥2
𝐼 = 𝑑𝑝1 − 𝑥 2𝐴𝑏 + 𝑑𝑝2 − 𝑥 2𝐴𝑏 + + 𝑥𝐵 = 19824582 𝑚𝑚4
12 4
𝑦𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑑𝑝1 − 𝑥 = 131.4 𝑚𝑚
𝑀𝑢 𝑦𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝐹𝑢 = = 109 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐼
𝑇𝑢 = 𝐴𝑏 𝐹𝑢 = 42 𝑘𝑁
Now, using the provisions of the AISC 360-05, we calculate 𝑘𝑠 , factor that
modifies the slip strength of the bolt:
𝑇𝑢
𝑘𝑠 = 1 − (Re. AISC 360-05, J3-5a)
𝐷𝑢 𝑇𝑏 𝑁𝑏
Where 𝑁𝑏 is the number of bolts that stands the tensile force, which in this
case corresponds to 1, since we calculate the tensile strength for one bolt.
𝑘𝑠 = 0.831
𝑉𝑢
𝑅𝑢 𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡 = = 60 𝑘𝑁
6
The nominal tensile stress modified to include the effects of shearing stress is:
5-78
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
′ 𝐹𝑛𝑡
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 1.3𝐹𝑛𝑡 − 𝑓 ≤ 𝐹𝑛𝑡 (Re. AISC 360-05, J3.7)
𝜙 𝐹𝑛𝑣 𝑣
𝜙 = 0.75
Where:
𝑉𝑢
𝑓𝑣 = = 163 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐴𝑏 𝑁𝐵
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.2)
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC 360-05, Table J3.2)
Therefore:
Where 𝑘 is the distance from the edge of the beam flange to the toe of the
fillet weld, and 𝑁 is the length of bearing that supports the beam. The value of
𝑁 must be greater than 𝑘.
Then:
Then, the nominal strength does not accomplish with the requirements, so use
a pair of stiffeners that will be designed later.
5-79
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
1.5
4𝑁 𝑡𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.40𝑡𝑤2 1 + − 0.2
𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤
𝜙 = 0.75 (Re. AISC 360-05, J10-5b)
𝑑 = 450 𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑤 = 8 𝑚𝑚
𝑡𝑓 = 22
𝑁 = 80 𝑚𝑚 − 𝑑𝑐 = 68 𝑚𝑚
Therefore:
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟒𝟓 𝒌𝑵
Then, the nominal strength does not accomplish with the requirements, then
we require the use of stiffeners
𝑃𝑢 = max(𝑉𝑢 − 𝜙𝑅𝑛 𝑤𝑒𝑏 𝑐𝑟𝑖𝑝𝑝𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔 , 𝑉𝑢 – 𝜙𝑅𝑛 𝑤𝑒𝑏 𝑙𝑜𝑐𝑎𝑙 𝑦𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 ) = 360 𝑘𝑁 − 269 𝑘𝑁 = 91 𝑘𝑁
110 × 103
𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓 = = 9166 𝑚𝑚3
12
𝐴𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓 = 110 × 10 = 1100 𝑚𝑚2
𝐼𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓
𝑟= = 2.88 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓
𝑘𝐿
= 140 > 25 (Section J4.4 AISC 360-05)
𝑟
5-80
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
The design shall be done according to the provisions of the chapter E of the
AISC 360-05:
𝑘𝐿 𝐸
= 140 > 4.71 = 133, then:
𝑟 𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.877𝐹𝑒
𝜋2 𝐸
𝐹𝑒 = 2 = 101 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝑘𝐿
𝑟
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 89 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓
𝜙 = 0.9
Then,
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 88 𝑘𝑁
Then, the nominal strength of the two stiffeners of the beam is:
Considering that the plate thickness is 𝒕 = 𝟏𝟎 𝒎𝒎, the bearing strength of the
angle is:
𝑅𝑛 = 2.4𝑑𝑡𝐹𝑢 (Re. AISC 360-05, J3-6a)
𝜙 = 0.75
5-81
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
𝑅𝑛 = 2.4𝑑𝑡𝑓 𝐹𝑢
𝜙 = 0.75
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟐𝟐𝟏 𝒌𝑵
Then, considering that the gross shear area of the angle is:𝐴𝑔 = 𝐵𝑡 = 250 × 10 =
2500 𝑚𝑚2 :
𝝓𝑹𝒏 = 𝟑𝟕𝟓 𝒌𝑵 > 372 𝑘𝑁 OK
11. Flexural yielding of the leg attached to the beam of the angle
The design moment corresponds to the design shear multiplied by the distance
between the point of application of the force and the critical section that is
going to be verified. AISC does not give any recommendation for the
determination of the point of application of the shear force and the critical
section.
5-82
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
Tip
The 3/8” distance is a conservative assumption for the measure of the fillet toe
of the angle.
Critical section
On the other hand, the point of application of the force is given by considering
the reaction at the center of the bearing distance 𝑁 required according to the
solicitation (it can also be considered the force applied at the center of the
bearing distance that it is effectively being use in the design, but this leads to
thicker angles). This means that we have to calculate from the web crippling
and the local yielding of web of the beam the required 𝑁 and with that value
calculate the eccentricity 𝑒.
𝑉𝑢
𝑁𝑟𝑒𝑞 = − 2.5𝑘 = 112 𝑚𝑚
𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑤
Web Crippling
𝑉𝑢 1 𝑑
𝑁𝑟𝑒𝑞 = −1 1.5 + 0.2
𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡 𝑓 𝑡𝑤 4
𝜙0.4𝑡𝑤2
𝑡𝑤 𝑡𝑓
𝑁𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 329 𝑚𝑚
5-83
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
In this case, the effective bearing distance used in the design is less than 𝑁𝑟𝑒𝑞
(This is because the use of stiffeners), do it is used 𝑁𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 80. Then, the
eccentricity is:
𝑁𝑟𝑒𝑞
𝑒 = 𝑑𝑐 + − 𝑡 + 9.51 𝑚𝑚 = 32.5 𝑚𝑚
2
Then:
𝑀𝑢 = 𝑉𝑢 𝑒 = 11700 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
And:
𝜙𝑀𝑛 = 1406 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝑁𝑟𝑒𝑞
𝑒 = 𝑑𝑐 + − 𝑡 + 9.51 𝑚𝑚 = 17.5 𝑚𝑚
2
Then:
𝑀𝑢 = 𝑉𝑢 𝑒 = 6300 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
Then:
𝝓𝑴𝒏 = 𝟖𝟕𝟖𝟖 𝒌𝑵 − 𝒎𝒎 OK
Tip
The use of unstiffened seated connections leads to thick angle connections for
some beams, due to of the flexural failure of the seat. The AISC dispositions
does not recommend any limit for the use of this type of connections but if the
thickness of the angles become a problem, the alternative is to switch from a
5-84
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
For the top angle selection use the recommendations of Part 10 of the AISC
Manual of Steel Construction We use an L 100 X 100 X 6 X 250 angle. This
angle is connected to the beam by two M20 bolts. This requires a minimum
space between bolts of 60 mm and a minimum distance to the edge of 34 mm,
requirements that we accomplish with the angle selected.
Designed Connection
L100X100X6X250
2 M20 A490
2 STIFFENERS
PL 406X110X10
H450X250X111.8
H300X300X87.3
L200X80X25X250
References
5-85
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 5: SHEAR CONNECTIONS
5-86
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
6. MOMENT CONNECTIONS
This chapter is devoted to the design of moment connections for Special
Moment Frames (SMF). Five examples of moment connections are developed,
which correspond to prequalified connections according to the AISC 358 and
its supplement n°1. The examples developed are: Bolted extended end-plate
moment connection (unstiffened and stiffened); Reduce beam section (RBS);
bolted flange plate moment connection (BFP); welded unreinforced flange-
welded web connection. Also, a commentary for welding in moment
connections is added. The BFP connection is the most used in the Chilean
practice, and for that reason, in the corresponding example is included a
discussion section evaluating the main differences between the Chilean
practice and the AISC provisions.
1. NCh2369.Of2003
6-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
2. AISC 341-05
Some limitations shall be considered for the member shapes, see sections
2.3.1 and 2.3.2 of AISC 358.
6-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
When available strengths are calculated according to AISC 358, use for ductile
limit states 𝜙𝑑 = 1.0 , and for non-ductile limit states 𝜙𝑛 = 0.9. If AISC 360 is
used for calculating available strengths, use the reduction factors stipulated
there.
Plastic Hinge Location and Probable Maximum Moment at Plastic Hinge (𝑀𝑝𝑟 )
This location is shown for each individual connection. For the 𝑀𝑝𝑟 calculation
see Eq. 2.4.3-1.
Welding Requirements:
Bolt Requirements:
Use only ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts. They shall be pretensioned high
strength bolts.
(Re. AISC 358-05, 4.1)
6.1.b. Example
Design a bolted extended and unstiffened end plate moment connection for
the beam to column border connection shown in Figure 6.1-1 and 6.1-2. Use
A250 ESP steel, required for constructions subjected to dynamical loading,
according to NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3.
The sections used are H 450 X 150 X 68.4 for the beam and H 450 x 250 x
149.8 for the column (both sections are Chilean Shapes). Use standard holes
6-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
for bolts. Suppose that the beams and columns have been properly designed
for resisting the forces given by the load combinations of the applicable
building code (including seismic load).
column beam
end - plate
continuity
plates
6-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes.
1. Prequalification limits
The minimum and maximum values of the several parameters for the design
of these connections are shown now (the notation of AISC 358 is presented,
see Figure Figure 6.1-3):
Note: the beam flange thickness is 150 mm, which is little lesser than the
minimum value of 152 mm. The difference of 2 mm is accepted.
6-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
t wc twb bbf
bcf bp
g
dc
de pfo
t fb
pfi
t fc tp
d
Figure 6.1-3: Notation (used on AISC 358-05) for the extended end plate
beam-to-column moment connection. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Fig. 6.2
2. Beam Limitations
See also:
Section 6.4.5: Clear span to depth ratio for SMF systems is required to be
𝐿𝑛
> 7.0 (suppose this is OK).
𝑑
Section 6.4.6: Width-thickness ratios for the flanges and web of the beam
shall conform to the limits on AISC 341. On this case, on AISC 341 section
6-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
9.4 requires that the beam must be seismically compact (flanges and
web) according to table I-8-1. The beam selected is seismically compact.
Note that abrupt changes of beam flange areas in plastic hinge regions are
not allowed.
Section 6.4.7 (Lateral Bracing): for SMF it should be provided lateral
bracing according to AISC 341 section 9.8
Section 6.4.8 (Protected Zone): for unstiffened case, the protected zone is
determined as the portion of the beam between the face of the column
and a distance equal to the depth of the beam or 3 times the width of
flange from the face of the column, whichever is less.
3. Column Limitations
The end plate shall be connected to the flange of the column. The column
depth must be equal or lesser than the beam depth. The width-thickness
ratio for flanges and web of the column shall conform to the limits in table
I-8-1 of AISC 341. Assume that the column used is seismically compact.
5. Continuity Plates
See section 6.7 of AISC 358 for the requirements of continuity plates for
this type of connections.
6-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Pitch distances are 𝑝𝑓𝑖 and 𝑝𝑓𝑜 as already shown on Figure Figure 6.1-3.
8. Welding Details
The following design steps are taken from section 6.10 of AISC 358-05.
Where: 𝑀𝑝𝑒 = 𝐶𝑝𝑟 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 = beam plastic hinge moment (Re. AISC 358-05, Eq.
2𝑀𝑝𝑒
6.9-3) and 𝑉𝑢 = + 𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 = shear at plastic hinge location.
𝐿′
𝑑
𝑆 = distance from the face of the column to the plastic hinge = min
( + 3𝑏𝑏𝑓 )
2
(for 4 bolt extended unstiffened connection type, 𝑑 is the depth of the beam)
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-4). 𝐿′=𝐿𝑛 − 2𝑆 = distance between plastic hinges,
with 𝐿𝑛 = clear length of the beam.
6-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Note: for the full explanation of the different terms, see section 6.10 of AISC
358-05.
In this case:
𝐹𝑦 +𝐹𝑢
𝐶𝑝𝑟 = = 1.3 > 1.2 → 𝐶𝑝𝑟 = 1.2 (Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 2.4.3-2)
2𝐹𝑦
𝑅𝑦 = 1.5 for A250 ESP steel (similar to ASTM A36), according to AISC 341 table
I-6-1.
𝐿𝑛
Assume 𝐿𝑛 = 4000 𝑚𝑚 → > 7.0. The value of 𝑆 = 225 𝑚𝑚. Therefore 𝐿′ =
𝑑
3550 𝑚𝑚
Note: when using the NCh2369.Of2003 code, the moment connection shall
have at least a strength equal to the strength of the connected elements. It is
possible to use as design moment the value 𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 and it is possible to
include also the effect of the shear 𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 .
10. Define preliminary values for the connection geometry and bolt grade
Use a 4 bolt unstiffened extended end plate moment connection. Try the
following dimensions (and meet also the prequalification limits already shown):
6-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
11. Calculate the required bolt diameter using the corresponding equation
2𝑀𝑓
𝑑𝑏𝑅𝐸𝑄 = (Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-6)
𝜋𝜙 𝑛 𝐹𝑛𝑡 1 + 0
Where: 𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎 for ASTM A490 bolts, 𝜙𝑛 = 0.9, 𝑖 =distance from the
centerline of beam compression flange to the ith tension bolt row (see Figure
Figure 6.1-4). In this case, the connection is symmetric (because 𝑀𝑓 could be
positive or negative, according to the seismic loading). Therefore:
Mnp h0
h1
1.11𝑀𝑓
𝑡𝑝𝑅𝐸𝑄 = (Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-8)
𝜙 𝑑 𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑌𝑝
Where: 𝐹𝑦𝑝 = 250 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (minimum yield stress for the end plate), 𝜙𝑑 = 1.0.
For the determination of 𝑌𝑝 = end-plate yield mechanism parameter, see table
6.2 on AISC 358-05, corresponding to 4 bolt unstiffened end-plate
connections.
6-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
bp
de
pfo
t bf
pfi
s
h0 t bw
h1
Figure 6.1-5: Yield Line Pattern Model. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Table 6.2.
𝑏𝑝 1 1 1 1 2
𝑌𝑝 = + + 0 − + 1 (𝑝𝑓𝑖 + 𝑠)
2 1 𝑝𝑓𝑖 𝑠 𝑝𝑓𝑜 2 𝑔
1
𝑠= 𝑏𝑝 𝑔 = 75.5 𝑚𝑚 (Note that if 𝑝𝑓𝑖 > 𝑠 → 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑝𝑓𝑖 = 𝑠)
2
Tip
It is prudent to check also the condition of “prying” effect. According to the
AISC Design Guide # 4, if the applied force is less than 90% of the end-plate
strength (determined using the yield line analysis), the end-plate is considered
to be “thick” and no prying forces are considered; when the applied load is
greater than ninety percent of the end plate strength, the end plate is
considered to be „thin‟ and the prying forces are assumed to be at a maximum.
For conservative plate thicknesses, assume that no prying force occurs,
therefore:
1.11𝑀𝑛𝑝
𝑡𝑝𝑅𝐸𝑄 =
𝜙𝑑 𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑌𝑝
6-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Calculations give:
𝑹𝑬𝑸
The assumed plate thickness 𝒕𝒑 = 𝟒𝟑 𝒎𝒎 > 𝒕𝒑 is OK.
𝑀𝑓
𝐹𝑓𝑢 = = 1813 𝑘𝑁 (Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-9)
𝑑−𝑡 𝑏𝑓
16. Check shear yielding resistance of the extended portion of the four-bolt
extended unstiffened end-plate (4E)
𝐹𝑓𝑢
< 𝜙𝑑 𝑅𝑛 = 𝜙𝑑 0.6𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑏𝑝 𝑡𝑝 (Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-10)
2
𝐹𝑓𝑢
𝜙𝑑 0.6𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑏𝑝 𝑡𝑝 = 1129 𝑘𝑁 > = 907 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
If the previous equation is not satisfied, increase the end plate thickness until
it is satisfied. In this case there is no need to increase 𝑡𝑝 . OK.
17. Check shear rupture resistance of the extended portion of the four-bolt
extended unstiffened end-plate (4E)
𝐹𝑓𝑢
< 𝜙𝑛 𝑅𝑛 = 𝜙𝑛 0.6𝐹𝑢𝑝 𝐴𝑛 (Re. AISC 358-05, Eq.6.9-11)
2
Calculations give:
𝐹𝑓𝑢
𝜙𝑛 0.6𝐹𝑢𝑝 𝐴𝑛 = 1009 𝑘𝑁 > = 907 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
6-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
If the previous equation is not satisfied, increase the end plate thickness until
it is satisfied. In this case there is no need of increasing 𝑡𝑝 . OK
18. The bolt shear rupture strength of the connection is provided by the bolts
at one (compression) flange
Calculations give:
19. Check the bolt-bearing/tear out of the end plate and column flange
End-plate side:
- Inner bolts:
- Outer bolts:
33
𝐿 𝑐 = 𝑑𝑒 − = 43.5 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 897 𝑘𝑁
2
6-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M30 is 33 mm. See AISC
360-05, table J3.3M.
- Inner bolts:
- Outer bolts:
33
𝐿𝑐 = 𝑑𝑒 − = 43.5 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 668 𝑘𝑁
2
Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M30 is 33 mm. See AISC
360-05, table J3.3M.
20. Design the flange to end plate and web to end plate welds, using the
requirements of the section 6.9.7 of AISC 358-05 code
Use CJP groove welds. The inside face of the flange shall have an 8-mm fillet
weld.
Use fillet welds, E70 electrode. For 8 mm (material thickness of the thinner
part joined) thickness, the minimum weld size is 5 mm according to AISC 360-
05, table J2.4.
6-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
The required weld to develop the bending stress on the beam web near the
tension bolts is (according to AISC Design Guide # 4):
(For E70 electrodes, 𝐹𝑊 = 0.6𝐹𝐸𝑋𝑋 = 289.5 𝑁/𝑚𝑚2 ):
0.6𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑡𝑤𝑏
𝑡𝑤 ≥ = 2.9 𝑚𝑚
2 × 0.707𝐹𝑤
With 𝐹𝑦𝑏 = 250 MPa (beam yield stress), 𝑡𝑤𝑏 = 8 mm (beam web thickness)
The required weld size for resisting the shear 𝑉𝑢 between the beam and the
end-plate is:
𝑉𝑢
𝑡𝑤 ≥ = 5.5 𝑚𝑚
2 × 0.707𝐹𝑤 𝐿𝑣
𝑑
𝐿𝑣 = min − 𝑡𝑓𝑏 , 𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑓𝑏 − 𝑝𝑓𝑖 + 2𝑑𝑏 = 207 𝑚𝑚
2
Note: The applied shear is to be resisted by weld between the minimum of the
following distances: the distance between the mid-depth of the beam and the
compression flange or the distance between the inner row of tension bolts plus
two bolt diameters and the compression flange. (Re. AISC Design Guide # 4
and AISC Manual of Steel of Construction 13th Ed.).
𝑅𝐸𝑄 1.11𝑀𝑓
𝑡𝑐𝑓 = ≤ 𝑡𝑐𝑓 (Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-20)
𝜙 𝑑 𝐹𝑦𝑐 𝑌𝑐
6-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
bcf
h0
tbw
h1
g tp
Figure 6.1-6: Column flange yield line mechanism parameter for four bolt
extended connection type. Adapted from AISC 358-05, table 6.5.
𝑏𝑐𝑓 1 1 2 3𝑐 𝑐 𝑐2 𝑔
𝑌𝑐 = + 0 + 1 𝑠 + + 0 𝑠 + + + = 3452 𝑚𝑚
2 1 𝑠 𝑠 𝑔 4 4 2 2
1
With: 𝑠 = 𝑏𝑐𝑓 𝑔 = 90 𝑚𝑚 and 𝑐 = 0 − 1 = 138 𝑚𝑚
2
𝑅𝐸𝑄
Therefore, 𝑡𝑐𝑓 = 31.7 𝑚𝑚 < 𝑡𝑐𝑓 . So far, there is no need for continuity plates
(web stiffeners).
Note: If the previous equation is not satisfied, increase the column size or add
web stiffeners (continuity plates). If stiffeners are added, previous equation
must be checked using 𝑌𝑐 for the stiffened column flange from table 6.5 of
AISC 358-05 (for four bolt extended end plate connection).
22. If stiffeners are required for column flange flexural yielding, determine the
required stiffener force
2
𝜙𝑑 𝑀𝑐𝑓 = 𝜙𝑑 𝐹𝑦𝑐 𝑌𝑐 𝑡𝑐𝑓
(Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-21)
6-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Therefore, the equivalent column flange design force is 𝜙𝑑 𝑅𝑛 = 𝜙𝑑 𝑀𝑐𝑓 /(𝑑 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓 )
and it shall be used for the design of web stiffeners. In this case, there was
not needing of stiffeners for column flexural yielding.
23. Check the local column web yielding strength of the unstiffened column
web at the beam flanges
Use:
𝑡𝑏𝑓 , 𝑡𝑝 , 𝑡𝑐𝑤 : beam flange thickness, end-plate thickness and column web
thickness (already known).
𝐹𝑦𝑐 = 250 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐶𝑡 = 1.0 (supposing that the distance from the column top to the top face of the
beam flange is greater than the depth of the column. 𝑘𝑐 = 𝑡𝑐𝑓 + 𝑠 = 37 𝑚𝑚.
If the strength requirement is not satisfied, column web continuity plates are
required.
Therefore:
𝜙𝑑 𝑅𝑛 = 652 𝑘𝑁 < 𝐹𝑓𝑢 → Continuity web plates are required
24. Check the unstiffened column web buckling strength at the beam
compression flange
This section applies for forces applied at both flanges of a member at the same
location. On this case, the connection to be designed is an exterior one, so this
limit state does not apply.
25. Check the unstiffened column web crippling strength at the beam
compression flange
The strength requirement is 𝜙𝑅𝑛 ≥ 𝐹𝑓𝑢 , with 𝜙 = 0.75. If this equation is not
satisfied, column web continuity plates are required. In this case, assume that
𝑑𝑐
𝐹𝑓𝑢 is applied a distance greater than from the end of the column. Therefore:
2
6-17
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1.5
2 𝑁 𝑡 𝑐𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑐 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.80𝑡𝑐𝑤 1+3 (Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-29)
𝑑𝑐 𝑡 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑤
With 𝑁 = thickness of beam flange plus 2 times the groove weld reinforcement
leg size (in this case, 𝑁 = 𝑡𝑏𝑓 ). All the other terms have been already
explained.
Doing the calculations, the strength is:
𝑅𝑛 = 735 𝑘𝑁 → 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 551 𝑘𝑁 < 𝐹𝑓𝑢 → Continuity web plates are required
26. If stiffener plates are required for any of the column side limit states, the
required strength is
𝐹𝑠𝑢 = 𝐹𝑓𝑢 − 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1262 𝑘𝑁 (𝐹𝑠𝑢 is a compression force because column web
crippling controls).
6-18
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Vus
P uf 2 P uf 1
Vu
Mu 2 Mu 1
P uf 2 P uf 1
Vus
Figure 6.1-7: Typical panel zones forces. Figure adapted from AISC Design
Guide N°13, Fig. 2-3.
The total panel zone shear 𝑉𝑢 can be determined with the beam flange forces
(𝑃𝑢𝑓𝑖 = 𝑀𝑢𝑖 /(𝑑𝑖 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓𝑖 )) and the story shear 𝑉𝑢𝑠 . According to Figure 6.1-7,
𝑉𝑢 = 𝑃𝑢𝑓 1 + 𝑃𝑢𝑓 2 − 𝑉𝑢𝑠 . On this case, neglect the story shear and compute:
𝑀𝑓
𝑉𝑢 = 𝑃𝑢𝑓 = = 1813 𝑘𝑁 (exterior connection).
𝑑−𝑡 𝑏𝑓
2
3𝑏 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1.0 × 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 (1 + ) = 796 𝑘𝑁 (Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J10-11).
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤
Note: suppose that frame stability is considered in the analysis and that
𝑃𝑢 < 0.75𝑃𝑦 .
Tip
Generally, a better solution than using web doubler plates is to choose a
column with a thicker web, eliminating the need for the doubler plates which
have details that are expensive and difficult to fabricate.
6-19
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑑𝑧 + 𝑤𝑧
𝑡≥
90
The column web thickness is not ok. AISC 341 makes an exception when using
plug welds for the attachment of the doubler plates to the column web. In
that case, the total panel zone thickness must be greater than 8.7 𝑚𝑚. Use
plug welds for doubler plates to column web connection.
Welds to column flanges: use CJP or fillet welds that develop the available
shear strength of the full doubler plate thickness
When placed against column web: doubler plates shall be welded top and
bottom edge to develop the proportion of the total force that is transmitted to
the doubler plate.
When placed away from column web: doubler plates must be placed
symmetrically in pairs and welded to continuity plates to develop the
proportion of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plate.
In this example, doubler plates are placed against the column web (with plug
welds).
Use A250 ESP for the doubler plates, for determining the thickness of the
doubler plates considering them acting on shear yielding and developing the
proportion of the total force transmitted to them:
𝑉𝑢 −𝜙 𝑣 𝑅𝑣
2𝑡𝑑𝑝 ≥ = 17.6 𝑚𝑚.
𝜙0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑤 𝑧
6-20
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Use 𝟐𝒕𝒅𝒑 = 𝟏𝟖 𝒎𝒎 → 𝒕𝒅𝒑 = 𝟗 𝒎𝒎 (OK with minimum requirements for panel zone
thickness)
Ddp
A A
t fc
Section A - A
Bdp
t dp
t dp
sc
dc
Figure 6.1-8: Doubler plate dimensions.
See Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates
for Chapter 6 on this Manual.
In this case, continuity plates are needed. As said on AISC 358-05, Continuity
plates shall also conform to section J10.8 of AISC 360-05 Specification and the
welds shall be in accordance with section 6.7.3 of AISC 358-05.
6-21
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
From the limit states mentioned on the steps above calculate the
difference between the applied force and the minimum available strength
Size the continuity plates: Use A250 ESP for continuity plates. Try
𝒆𝒔 = 𝟑𝟓 𝒎𝒎 (continuity plate thickness), 𝒃𝒔 = 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒎𝒎 (continuity plate
width) and 𝑳𝒔 = 𝒉𝒄 = 𝟑𝟖𝟔 𝒎𝒎 (continuity plate depth, use the column
height between flanges).
es
A A
Section A - A
Ls
bs
tcw bbf
1 1
𝑏𝑠 + 𝑡𝑐𝑤 = 109 𝑚𝑚 ≥ 𝑏𝑏𝑓 = 50 𝑚𝑚 OK
2 3
1 𝑏𝑠
𝑒𝑠 = 35 𝑚𝑚 ≥ 𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑡𝑏𝑓 , = 9 𝑚𝑚 OK
2 15
6-22
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
bs bs
es es 12t w
tw
𝑘𝐿
According to AISC 360 J4.4 Section: = 22.53 < 25 → Use Ch. J
𝑟
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴 = 1827 𝑘𝑁 > 𝐹𝑓𝑢 = 1813 𝑘𝑁 OK
Notes:
For the compression check, it has been used 𝐹𝑓𝑢 instead of 𝑅𝑠𝑢 𝐶𝑂𝑀𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑆𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
because the section considered for resisting the compression takes into
account a portion of the column web. 𝑅𝑠𝑢 𝐶𝑂𝑀𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑆𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁 will be used for the welds for
continuity plates to column flanges unions.
Check the column beam moment ratio according to AISC 341-05 code.
(Assume that the factored axial force on the column is 𝑃𝑢𝑐 = 500 𝑘𝑁) :
∗
𝑀𝑝𝑐
∗ > 1.0 (Re. AISC 341-05, Eq. 9-3)
𝑀𝑝𝑏
With:
6-23
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
∗
𝑃𝑢𝑐 𝑃𝑢𝑐
𝑀𝑝𝑐 = 𝑍𝑐 𝐹𝑦𝑐 − = 2𝑍𝑐 𝐹𝑦𝑐 − = 1580067 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑔 𝐴𝑔
And
∗
𝑑𝑐
𝑀𝑝𝑏 = 𝑀𝑝𝑒 + 𝑉𝑢 𝑆 + = 887946 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚.
2
Therefore:
∗
𝑀𝑝𝑐
∗ = 1.8 > 1.0 OK
𝑀𝑝𝑏
8. Lateral bracing
Assume that with this lateral spacing, the beam can properly support the
loads.
0.02𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑
𝑃𝑏𝑟 = = 26 𝑘𝑁. (Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. A-6-7)
𝑜
Use:
𝑀𝑟 = 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑏 , 𝐶𝑑 = 1.0, 𝑜 = (𝑑𝑏 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓 ) .
1 10𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑
𝛽𝑏𝑟 = = 8.7 𝑘𝑁/𝑚𝑚 (Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. A-6-8)
𝜙 𝐿𝑏 𝑜
Assume that the connection between the beam and the slab is done with shear
welded connectors provided by 300 mm. Therefore, according to AISC 358-05,
supplemental top and bottom flange lateral bracing at hinge location is not
required.
6-24
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Considering the user note in the 9.7 Section of AISC 341-05; column lateral
bracing can be achieved by the use of braces, decks, slabs, and also with
indirect lateral bracing. On this case, the ratio of beam-column moments is
lesser than 2.0, therefore the column does not remains elastic outside the
panel zone.
In this case there is no specific design for column lateral brace (at beam flange
levels). Suppose that the bracing is achieved with a slab and by indirect
bracing. If needed, an specific bracing system design shall be made.
2. Panel zone
As said on B.2.1, the analysis can be done with elastic or plastic methods. The
panel zone shall be retrofitted with doubler plates and/or diagonal stiffeners
(see Figures B.1 and B.2 of the code) if 𝑅𝑢 > 𝜙𝑅𝑣 = 0.75𝑅𝑣 .
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.2.2)
𝑀𝑢 1 𝑀𝑢 2
𝑅𝑢 = + − 𝑉𝑢 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003, Eq. B-1)
𝑑𝑚 1 𝑑𝑚 2
6-25
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
With 𝑀𝑢𝑖 =beam moments (not greater than plastic beam moments, on this
case use 𝑀𝑢 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 = 377250 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚 ) determined using the load combinations
of the code and the amplification of the earthquake term by 2; 𝑑𝑚𝑖 = 0.95𝑑𝑖 ,
𝑉𝑢 =shear force in the column at the level of the union (neglect it as on the
previous design).
Considering then the doubler plates designed on the previous stage (2 plates,
𝑡𝑑𝑝 = 9 𝑚𝑚 ) , calculations give:
According to section B.2.5 of the Chilean code, the minimum thickness of the
column web and doubler plates must be the same as AISC 341.
Doubler plates shall be welded to the column flanges with fillet or CJP groove
welds designed to resist the shear required strength (on seismic frames, the
welds shall resist the total shear strength of the doubler plate). If they are
against the column web, they shall be welded on their bottom and top ends
(and the welds must resist the proportion of the force transmitted to the
doubler plates). If they are away from the column web, doubler plates shall be
placed symmetrically and welded to the continuity plates (and the welds must
resist the proportion of the force transmitted to the each one of the doubler
plates).
Note: As seen, the previous dispositions are quite similar to AISC dispositions.
Refer to Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler
Plates of Chapter 6 on this Manual.
4. Continuity plates
6-26
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
2 𝑀𝑢
Equal to AISC code, 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.9 × 6.25𝑡𝑐𝑓 𝐹𝑦𝑓 = 1440 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑅𝑢 = = 883 𝑘𝑁. See the
𝑑𝑚
additional requirements on B.3.2 to B.3.3
3.-Web crippling
1.5
2 𝑁 𝑡 𝑐𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
Equal to AISC code: 𝑅𝑛 = 0.8𝑡𝑐𝑤 [1 + 3 ]
𝑑𝑐 𝑡 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑤
According to B.3.4. (and note (1)), continuity plates shall be welded to the
web and the loaded flange so to transfer to the web the proportion of the force
carried by the stiffeners:
𝑅𝑛 ,𝑠𝑡
And the minimum total stiffener area shall be 𝐴𝑠𝑡 = = 1948 𝑚𝑚2
𝜙𝐹𝑦 ,𝑠𝑡
1 1
𝑏𝑠 + 𝑡𝑐𝑤 = 109 ≥ 𝑏𝑐𝑓 = 83.3 OK
2 3
6-27
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑦
𝑒𝑠 = 35 𝑚𝑚 > max 𝑡𝑏𝑓 , = 18 𝑚𝑚 OK
250
Compression check:
According to B.7.2, the section resisting the compression is the same as the
previous design (external stiffeners), therefore:
Note: As seen, the previous dispositions are quite similar to AISC dispositions.
Refer to Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler
Plates of Chapter 6 on this Manual.
According to NCh2369.Of2003, section 8.4.4 (R>3 systems): 𝑀𝑝𝑐 / 𝑀𝑝𝑣 > 1.2
for the columns and beams at the union analyzed. (See exceptions when is not
needed to meet the previous inequality at 8.4.4).
The code does not specify the calculation of the moments, so use the plastic
moments of the gross sections. Using this, 𝑀𝑝𝑐 / 𝑀𝑝𝑣 = 4.7 > 1.2 OK.
9. Lateral bracing:
6-28
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Designed connection:
CJP
10
Typ
4 M30 ASTM A490 10
PL 210x740x43 mm
Bolts positions
Note:
Connections for doubler and web plates
pfo= 60 mm
are not designed
de = 60 mm
g= 140 mm
Notes:
All bolts are tightened to a pretension not less than AISC requirement.
However, slip critical connections requirements are not needed in this
case.
Only are permitted ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts.
All of the shear force is assumed to be resisted by the compression side
bolts.
Beam web to end plate welds in the vicinity of the tension bolts are
designed to develop the yield stress of the beam web. This weld strength
is recommended even if the full moment capacity of the beam is not
required for frame strength.
Only the web to end plate weld between the mid-depth of the beam and
the inside face of the beam compression flange may be used to resist the
beam shear (based on judgment).
Yield-line analysis is used for end-plate strength determination
Bolt prying forces are not a consideration, since the required end plate
thickness prevents their development.
6-29
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
6.1.f. References
6-30
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369.Of2003
2. AISC 341-05:
6.2.b. Example
Design a bolted extended and stiffened end plate moment connection for the
beam to column border connection shown in Figure 6.2-1. Sections used are H
450 x 150 x 68.4 for the beam and H 450 x 250 x 149.8 for the column (both
sections are Chilean Shapes). Use standard holes for bolts and A250 ESP steel,
required for constructions subjected to dynamical loading, according to
NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3. Suppose that beams and columns have been
properly designed for resisting the forces given by the load combinations of
the applicable building code (including seismic load).
Note that this connection has been already designed for the unstiffened case
on example 6.1. Therefore, the input data for this example is the same and
many steps of the design will be resumed. Assume the same gravitational
loads applied to the beam from example 6.1.
6-31
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Tip
The 4 bolt unstiffened extended end-plate connection is commonly more used
than the connection to be designed. Nevertheless, the fact of adding a
stiffeners leads to thinner end-plates. The 8 bolt stiffened configuration is
another possibility which stands larger moments than the 4 bolt configuration.
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes.
6-32
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1. Prequalification limits
The minimum and maximum values of the several parameters for the design
of these connections are shown now (the notation of AISC 358 is presented,
see Figure 6.2-2):
Note: the beam flange thickness is 150 mm, which is little lesser than the
minimum value of 152 mm. The difference of 2 mm is accepted
6-33
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
bbf
g
bp
bcf
twb
twc
ts
dc
de
pfo
tfb
pfi
tfc tp
d
c
hst
Lst
6.2-2: Notation (used on AISC 358-05) for the extended end plate beam-to-
column moment connection. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Fig. 6.3.
2. Beam Limitations
3. Column Limitations
6-34
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
5. Continuity Plates
𝑠𝑡
𝐿𝑠𝑡 =
tan 30°
With 𝑠𝑡 = height of the end-plate from the outside of the beam flange to the
end of the end-plate.
The stiffeners shall be terminated at beam flange at the end of the end-plate
with landings of approximately 25 mm long. The stiffener shall be clipped
where it meets the beam flange and end-plate to provide clearance between
the stiffener and the beam flange weld.
When the beam and end-plate stiffeners have the same material strengths,
the thickness of the stiffeners shall be greater than or equal to the beam web
thickness. If not, the thickness of the stiffeners shall be greater than or equal
to the beam web thickness multiplied by the ratio of beam-to-stiffener plate
material yield stress.
6-35
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
9. Welding Details
Additionally, when used, all end-plate stiffener joints shall be made using CJP
groove welds. The exception is when the thickness of the stiffeners is 10 mm
or less, then fillet welds that develop the strength of the stiffener can be used.
(Re. AISC 358-05, section 6.10)
Note that:
𝑠𝑡
𝐿𝑠𝑡 >
tan 30
11. Define preliminary values for the connection geometry and bolt grade
Try the following dimensions (and meet also the prequalification limits already
shown):
6-36
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Notes:
12. Calculate the required bolt diameter using the corresponding equation
𝑑𝑏𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 28.8 𝑚𝑚
For the stiffened case, the 𝑌𝑝 term changes. From table 6.3 of AISC 358-05:
1
𝑠= 𝑏𝑝 𝑔 = 75.4 𝑚𝑚 (Note that if 𝑝𝑓𝑖 > 𝑠 → 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑝𝑓𝑖 = 𝑠)
2
𝑏𝑝 1 1 1 1 2
𝑌𝑝 = + + 0 + + 𝑝 + 𝑠 + 0 𝑑𝑒 + 𝑝𝑓𝑜
2 1 𝑝𝑓𝑖 𝑠 𝑝𝑓𝑜 2𝑠 𝑔 1 𝑓𝑖
Tip
It is prudent to check also the condition of “prying” effect. According to the
AISC Design Guide # 4, if the applied force is less than 90% of the end-plate
strength (calculated using the yield line analysis), the end-plate is considered
to be “thick” and no prying forces are considered; when the applied load is
greater than ninety percent of the end plate strength, the end plate is
considered to be “thin” and the prying forces are assumed to be at a
6-37
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1.11𝑀𝑛𝑝
𝑡𝑝𝑅𝐸𝑄 =
𝜙𝑑 𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑌𝑝
𝑀𝑛𝑝 = “no prying moment” = 2𝑃𝑡 (0 + 1 )
𝜋𝑑 𝑏2
𝑃𝑡 = bolt tensile strength = 𝐹𝑡 ,
4
𝐹𝑡 = 𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎 for ASTM A490 bolts.
Calculations give:
𝑃𝑡 = 551 𝑘𝑁 → 𝑀𝑛𝑝 = 952732 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝑹𝑬𝑸
The assumed plate thickness 𝒕𝒑 = 𝟑𝟓 𝒎𝒎 > 𝒕𝒑 is OK.
𝑀𝑓
𝐹𝑓𝑢 = = 1837 𝑘𝑁 (Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-9)
𝑑−𝑡 𝑏𝑓
17. For the 4 bolt extended stiffened end-plate, select the end plate stiffener
thickness and design the stiffener-to-beam flange and stiffener to-end-
plate welds
𝐹𝑦𝑏
𝑡𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑡𝑏𝑤 (Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-13).
𝐹𝑦𝑠
𝑡𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 8 𝑚𝑚
6-38
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑠𝑡 𝐸
≤ 0.56 (Re. AISC 358-05, Eq. 6.9-14).
𝑡𝑠 𝐹𝑦𝑠
In this case, with the following geometry for the stiffener, all the checks are
OK:
𝐿𝑠𝑡 = 210 𝑚𝑚, 𝑠𝑡 = 120 𝑚𝑚, 𝑡𝑠 = 10 𝑚𝑚
On this case, use CJP groove welds for both connections (stiffener-to-end-
plate and stiffener-to-beam-flange) since the stiffeners thickness is equal
to the critical value of 10 mm.
18. The bolt shear rupture strength of the connection is provided by the bolts
at one (compression) flange
The procedure is the same as the one on example 6.1, calculations give:
19. Check the bolt-bearing/tear out of the end plate and column flange
End-plate side:
20. Design the flange to end plate and web to end plate welds, using the
requirements of the section 6.9.7 of AISC 358-05 code
6-39
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Use CJP groove welds. The inside face of the flange shall have an 8-mm fillet
weld.
The procedure is the same as on example 6.1. Doing the calculations first for
𝑅𝐸𝑄
the unstiffened column flange, 𝑡𝑐𝑓 = 31.9 𝑚𝑚 < 𝑡𝑐𝑓 . So far, there is no needing
of continuity plates (web stiffeners).
22. If stiffeners are required for column flange flexural yielding, calculate the
required stiffener force
In this case, there was no need for stiffening the column web.
23. Check the local column web yielding strength of the unstiffened column
web at the beam flanges
𝜙𝑑 𝑅𝑛 ≥ 𝐹𝑓𝑢
With 𝑅𝑛 = 𝐶𝑡 6𝑘𝑐 + 𝑡𝑏𝑓 + 2𝑡𝑝 𝐹𝑦𝑐 𝑡𝑐𝑤 . Same as example 6.1, calculations give
24. Check the unstiffened column web buckling strength at the beam
compression flange
This section applies for forces applied at both flanges of a member at the same
location. On this case, the connection to be designed is an exterior one, so this
limit state does not apply.
6-40
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
25. Check the unstiffened column web crippling strength at the beam
compression flange
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 551 𝑘𝑁 < 𝐹𝑓𝑢 = 1837 𝑘𝑁 → Continuity web plates are required
26. If stiffener plates are required for any of the column side limit states, the
required strength is
Note that the section used on this example are the same as example 6.1 The
forces obtained (𝐹𝑓𝑢 and 𝐹𝑠𝑢 ) and the end-plate thickness 𝑡𝑝 on this example are
different than on the example 6.1; nevertheless, the procedure for the design
of the panel zone (doubler plates and transverse web stiffeners) and lateral
bracing is the same. No specific design or calculations will be done on this
example.
Column: H 450 x 250 x 149.8
4 M30 ASTM A490
de
pfo
pfi
10
CJP 10
Typ
Note:
Doubler and web plates and their
connections are not designed
hst = 120 mm Bolts positions
pfi = 60 mm
de = 60 mm
g= 140 mm
6-41
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Notes
All bolts are tightened to a pretension not less than AISC requirement.
However, slip critical connections requirements are not needed in this
case.
Only ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts are permitted.
It is assumed that all the shear force is resisted by the compression side
bolts.
Beam web to end plate welds in the vicinity of the tension bolts are
designed to develop the yield stress of the beam web. This weld strength
is recommended even if the full moment capacity of the beam is not
required for frame strength.
Only the web to end plate weld between the mid-depth of the beam and
the inside face of the beam compression flange may be used to resist the
beam shear (based on judgment).
Yield-line analysis is used for end-plate strength calculation.
Bolt prying forces are not a consideration, since the required end plate
thickness prevents their development.
6-42
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369.Of2003
6-43
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
2. AISC 341-05
The required shear strength should be calculated taking into account the
flexural plastic hinges produced by the earthquake (E) load. For more
beam-to-column connections requirements, see section 9.2a
Unless otherwise defined by AISC 358, CJP groove welds of beam flanges,
shear plates, and beam webs to column shall be demand critical welds as
defined in section 7.3b (section 9.2c).
The protected zone is defined in AISC 358. In general, for unreinforced
connections, the protected zone will extend from the face of the column to
one half of the beam depth beyond the plastic hinge point (section 9.2d).
For the design requirements of panel zone of beam – to - column
connections: see section 9.3.
For beam and column limitations, see section 9.4.
Continuity plates shall be consistent with the connection designed
according to AISC 358 (section 9.5).
In beam-to-column connections, check the column-beam moment ratio
(section 9.6) and the lateral bracing (section 9.7 and 9.8).
Some limitations shall be considered for the member shapes, see sections
2.3.1 and 2.3.2 of AISC 358.
When available strengths are calculated according to AISC 358, use for ductile
limit states 𝜙𝑑 = 1.0, and for non-ductile limit states 𝜙𝑛 = 0.9. If AISC 360 is
used for calculating available strengths, use the reduction factors stipulated
there.
Plastic Hinge Location and Probable Maximum Moment at Plastic Hinge (𝑀𝑝𝑟 )
This location is shown for each type of connection. For the 𝑀𝑝𝑟 calculation, see
Eq. 2.4.3-1.
6-44
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Panel and protected zones: for SMF systems, panel zones shall conform to the
minimum requirements of section 9.3 of AISC 341-05. The protected zone
shall be as defined for each prequalified connection and it shall meet the
requirements of section 7.4 of AISC 341-05.
Welding Requirements
Filler metals and welding procedures shall meet the requirements of section
7.3 and Appendix W of the AISC 341-05 code.
For backing at beam to column and continuity plate to column joint, see AISC
358-05, section 3.3.
Bolt Requirements
Use only ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts. They shall be pretensioned high
strength bolts.
(Re. AISC 358-05, 4.1)
6.3.b. Example
Design a reduced beam section (RBS) moment connection for the beam to
column exterior connection shown in Figure Figure 6.3-1. Use A345 ESP steel,
required for constructions subjected to dynamical loading, according to
NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3.
The sections used are H 600 x 300 x 229.2 for the beam and H 450 x 450 x
355.2 for the column (both are Chilean Shapes). Suppose that beams and
columns have been properly designed for resisting the forces produced by the
load combinations of the applicable building code (including seismic loads).
6-45
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
column
doubler plates
(if required)
continuity plates
(if required)
A345 ESP
(Re. Table 3, NCh203.Of.2003)
6-46
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Both sections have seismically compact web and flanges, according to AISC
341-05 Table I-8-1.
Tip
The intention of designing a reduced beam section is to move the plastic hinge
location away from the column face. This is achieved by removing a portion of
the beam flanges and, thus, weakening the beam so as to force the plastic
hinge to occur at a specified location.
1. Prequalification limits
Beam section must comply with the limitations of section 2.3 of AISC 358-
05. Beams shall be rolled wide-flange or built-up I members.
Depth of the beam is limited to W36 for rolled shapes. For built-up
shapes, use the maximum depth for wide flange rolled shapes. (OK)
Weight limited to 447 kg/m: Beam weight is 229.2 kgf/m < 447 kgf/m
(OK).
Flange thickness < 44.5 mm (OK)
Clear span to depth ratio: greater or equal to 7 for SMF systems.
Suppose the clear span to be OK with this.
Width thickness ratios for flanges and web of the beam shall conform to
the limits on AISC 341-05.(OK)
Lateral bracing: according to section 9.8 of AISC 341-05 (SMF systems).
For supplemental lateral bracing at the reduced section, also refer to the
same section. The location of this supplemental lateral bracing shall be
located no longer than d/2 beyond the end of the RBS farthest from the
face of the column (d=beam depth). No attachment shall be made to the
beam in the region extending from the face of the column to end of the
RBS farthest from the face of the column. (See also exception where the
beam supports an structural slab).
Protected zone: from the face of the column to the end of the RBS section
farthest from the column face
6-47
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Column limitations:
Panel zones: comply with the requirement of section 9.3 (SMF systems) of
AISC 341-05.
See 5.4.2a for column-beam moment ratio calculation at this RBS
connection.
Beam flanges to column flange: use of CJP groove welds and conform to
the requirements for demand critical weld in section 7.3 and appendix W
of AISC 341-05.
Weld access holes: according to AISC 360-05 Specification, section J1.6
Beam web shall be connected to the column flange using a CJP groove weld
extending between weld access holes. The single plate shear connection shall
be permitted to be used as backing for the CJP groove weld. Plate thickness
6-48
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
must be at least 10 mm. Weld tabs are not required at the end of the CJP
groove weld at the beam web. Bolt holes in the beam web for the purpose of
erection are permitted.
1. Chose trial values for RBS dimensions 𝑎, 𝑏 and 𝑐 (see Figure Figure 6.3-2):
0.5𝑏𝑏𝑓 ≤ 𝑎 ≤ 0.75𝑏𝑏𝑓
0.65𝑑 ≤ 𝑏 ≤ 0.85𝑑
0.1𝑏𝑏𝑓 ≤ 𝑐 ≤ 0.25𝑏𝑏𝑓
a b
Reduced Beam
Section
Protected Zone
Figure 6.3-2: Notation (used on AISC 358-05) for reduced beam section
moment connection. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Fig. 5.1.
6-49
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
2. Compute the plastic section modulus at the center of the reduced beam
section
𝐹𝑦 +𝐹𝑢
Use 𝐶𝑝𝑟 = = 1.15 and 𝑅𝑦 = 1.1 for A345 ESP steel (similar to ASTM A572 Gr.
2𝐹𝑢
50) according to table I-6-1 of AISC 341-05. Then:
𝑀𝑝𝑟 = 2058573 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
4. Compute the shear force at the center of the RBS‟s at each end of the
beam
Use a free body diagram of the portion of the beam between the centers of the
RBS sections. Consider the 𝑀𝑝𝑟 moments acting at the center of each RBS
section and include gravity loads (use combination 1.2D+1.0L):
Figure 6.3-3: Example of calculation of shear at center of RBS cuts. The lower
image is the free body diagram of the portion of the beam between the RBS’s.
Adapted from AISC 358-05 (Commentary), Fig.C-5.1.
6-50
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
2𝑀𝑝𝑟 𝑤𝐿′
𝑉𝑅𝐵𝑆 = +
𝐿′ 2
And
′
2𝑀𝑝𝑟 𝑤𝐿′
𝑉𝑅𝐵𝑆 = −
𝐿′ 2
Note: Consider 𝑤 = 𝑤𝑢 = factored uniform beam gravity load.
Assume that 𝐿𝑛 =distance between column flanges (nearest to beam ends)
equal to 6000 mm. and:
𝑏
𝑆 = 𝑎 + = 415 𝑚𝑚
2
′
Therefore: 𝑉𝑅𝐵𝑆 = 931 𝑘𝑁 , 𝑉𝑅𝐵𝑆 = 662 𝑘𝑁
Use a free body diagram of the segment of the beam between the center of
the RBS and the face of the column (see the following figure). Therefore:
′
Use 𝑉𝑅𝐵𝑆 = max
(𝑉𝑅𝐵𝑆 , 𝑉𝑅𝐵𝑆 ) in Eq. 5.8-6 of AISC 358-05, the gravity load of the
mentioned segment was neglected (optionally this effect could be included).
Figure 6.3-4: Free body diagram between center of RBS and face of the
column. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Fig. 5.2.
6-51
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
6. Compute the plastic moment of the beam based on the expected yield
stress
𝑀𝑓 ≤ 𝜙𝑑 𝑀𝑝𝑒
2𝑀𝑝𝑟 𝑏
𝑉𝑢 = + 𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 = 𝑉𝑅𝐵𝑆 + 𝑤𝑢 𝑎 + = 952 𝑘𝑁
𝐿′ 2
Check the shear strength of the beam according to Chapter G of AISC 360-05
Specification. According to this chapter, for I members with:
𝐸
= 52 ≤ 2.24 = 53.93 → 𝜙𝑉𝑛 = 1.0 × 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑤 = 1242 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑢
𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
Meeting with AISC 358-05 requirements, section 5.5, use CJP groove welds
(demand critical). Weld access holes geometry must comply with AISC 360-05,
Section J1.6. For weld access holes geometry, select a depth of 40 mm and a
height equal to 25 mm.
6-52
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Meeting with AISC 358-05 requirements, section 5.6; the required force to be
transmitted is 𝑉𝑢 = 952 𝑘𝑁. Then:
Use CJP groove weld for the beam web to column flange connection. Select a
10 mm thick single plate (to support erection loads) that can be used as
backing for the CJP groove weld.
Use for 𝐴𝑔 the beam web area, discounting the weld access holes height:
1. Panel zone
Check the column panel zone according to AISC 358-05, Section 5.4. This
section refers to AISC 341-05, Section 9.3 (SMF Systems):
6-53
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Vus
P uf 2 P uf 1
Vu
Mu 2 Mu 1
P uf 2 P uf 1
Vus
Figure 6.3-5: Typical panel zones forces.
Figure adapted from AISC Design Guide N°13, Fig. 2-3.
The total panel zone shear 𝑉𝑢 can be calculated with the beam flange forces
(𝑃𝑢𝑓𝑖 = 𝑀𝑢𝑖 /(𝑑𝑖 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓𝑖 )) and the story shear 𝑉𝑢𝑠 . According to figure above,
𝑉𝑢 = 𝑃𝑢𝑓 1 + 𝑃𝑢𝑓 2 − 𝑉𝑢𝑠 . On this case, neglect the story shear and compute
𝑀𝑓
𝑉𝑢 = 𝑃𝑢𝑓 = = 4366 𝑘𝑁 (exterior connection).
𝑑−𝑡 𝑏𝑓
2
3𝑏 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
𝜙𝑅𝑣 = 1.0 × 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 (1 + ) = 3074 𝑘𝑁 (Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J10-11).
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤
Note: suppose that frame stability is considered in the analysis and that
𝑃𝑢 < 0.75𝑃𝑦 .
Tip
Generally, a better solution than using web doubler plates is to choose a
column with a thicker web, eliminating the need for the doubler plates which
have details that are expensive and difficult to fabricate.
6-54
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑑𝑧 + 𝑤𝑧
𝑡≥
90
Use CJP or fillet welds that develop the available shear strength of the full
doubler plate thickness.
Doubler plates shall be welded top and bottom edge to develop the proportion
of the total force that is transmitted to the doubler plate.
Use A345 ESP for the doubler plates and for calculating the thickness of
the doubler plates, consider them acting on shear yielding and developing the
proportion of the total force transmitted to them (𝜙 = 1.0):
𝑉𝑢 − 𝜙𝑣 𝑅𝑣
2𝑡𝑑𝑝 ≥ = 16.9 𝑚𝑚
𝜙0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑤𝑧
6-55
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Ddp
A A
t fc
Section A - A
Bdp
t dp
t dp
sc
dc
Figure 6.3-6: Doubler plate dimensions.
See Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates
for Chapter 6 on this Manual.
5. Continuity plates
6-56
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1
For this exterior connection: 𝑒𝑠 ≥ 𝑡𝑏𝑓 = 20 𝑚𝑚.
2
Calculate the concentrated force(s) acting on the beam flange, using the
moment projected at the column flange side (𝑀𝑓 ):
𝑀𝑓
𝑅𝑢 = = 4366 𝑘𝑁 (Tension and compression)
𝑑−𝑡 𝑓𝑏
2
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.9 × 6.25𝑡𝑐𝑓 𝐹𝑦𝑓 = 3105 𝑘𝑁 < 𝑅𝑢
Web crippling:
1.5
2 𝑁 𝑡 𝑐𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.8𝑡𝑐𝑤 1+3 .
𝑑𝑐 𝑡 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑤
6-57
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
According to AISC 360-05 Commentary this limit state does not apply for
moment connections.
This section applies for forces applied at both flanges of a member at the same
location. On this case, the connection to be designed is an exterior one, so this
limit state does not apply.
From last limit states, calculate the difference between the applied force and
the minimum available strength (web local yielding on this case)
𝐶𝑂𝑀𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑆𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
𝑅𝑠𝑢 = 𝑅𝑢 − min 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1692 𝑘𝑁
From the first limit state, calculate the difference between the applied force
and the available strength (flange local bending on this case):
𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
𝑅𝑠𝑢 = 𝑅𝑢 − 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1261 𝑘𝑁
6-58
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
es
A A
Section A - A
Ls
bs
tcw bbf
1 1
𝑏𝑠 + 𝑡𝑐𝑤 = 150 𝑚𝑚 ≥ 𝑏𝑏𝑓 = 100 𝑚𝑚 OK
2 3
1 𝑏𝑠
𝑒𝑠 ≥ 𝑚𝑎𝑥 𝑡𝑏𝑓 , = 20 𝑚𝑚 OK
2 15
1
𝑒𝑠 ≥ 𝑡𝑏𝑓 = 20 𝑚𝑚. OK
2
As said on AISC 360-05, section J10.8, use an effective length of 0.75 (277.5
mm) and a cross section composed of 2 stiffeners and a portion of the web
having a width of 12𝑡𝑤 (exterior stiffener)
bs bs
es es 12t w
tw
6-59
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
2
2𝑏𝑠 𝑒𝑠3 𝑡𝑐𝑤 12𝑡𝑐𝑤 3
𝐼
𝐴 = 2𝑏𝑠 𝑒𝑠 + 12𝑡𝑐𝑤 , 𝐼= + , 𝑟= = 60 𝑚𝑚
12 12 𝐴
Use 𝑘 = 1.0.
𝑘𝐿
According to AISC 360 J4.4 Section = 4.618 < 25 → Use Chapter J.
𝑟
According to Chapter D of AISC 360-05, for each stiffener the tension strength
is:
𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
𝑅𝑠𝑢
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝑏𝑠 𝑒𝑠 = 1280 𝑘𝑁 > = 630 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
Note:
As it can be seen, the section for compression check is a “cross” (including a
portion of the column web) and it is checked for 𝑅𝑢 while the section for
tension check are the two separated stiffeners (no web portion) and they are
𝑇𝐸𝑁𝑆𝐼𝑂𝑁
checked for 𝑅𝑠𝑢 .
See Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates
of Chapter 6 on this Manual.
According to AISC 358-05, Section 5.4; for SMF systems the column-beam
moment ratio shall comply with (assume that the factored axial force on the
column is 𝑃𝑢𝑐 = 1000 𝑘𝑁):
∗
𝑀𝑝𝑐
∗ > 1.0 (Re. AISC 341-05, Eq. 9-3)
𝑀𝑝𝑏
With:
∗
𝑃𝑢𝑐 𝑃𝑢𝑐
𝑀𝑝𝑐 = 𝑍𝑐 𝐹𝑦𝑐 − = 2𝑍𝑐 𝐹𝑦𝑐 − = 5318817 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑔 𝐴𝑔
6-60
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
And:
∗
𝑏 𝑑𝑐
𝑀𝑝𝑏 = 𝑀𝑝𝑟 + 𝑀𝑣 = 𝑀𝑝𝑟 + 𝑉𝑅𝐵𝑆 (𝑎 + + ) = 2654268 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚.
2 2
Therefore:
∗
𝑀𝑝𝑐
∗ = 2.003 > 1.0 OK
𝑀𝑝𝑏
9. Lateral bracing
According to section 9.8 of AISC 341-05, both beam flanges shall be laterally
0.086 𝑟𝑦 𝐸
braced, with a maximum spacing of 𝐿𝑏 = = 3914 𝑚𝑚. (Use 𝑳𝒃 =
𝐹𝑦
𝟑𝟎𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎). Assume that with this lateral spacing, the beam can properly
support the loads.
0.02𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑
𝑃𝑏𝑟 = = 100.2 𝑘𝑁. (Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. A-6-7)
𝑜
1 10𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑
𝛽𝑏𝑟 = = 22.3 𝑘𝑁/𝑚𝑚 (Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. A-6-8)
𝜙 𝐿𝑏 𝑜
Assume that the connection between the beam and the slab is made with
shear welded connectors provided by 300 mm. Therefore, according to AISC
358-05, supplemental top and bottom flange lateral bracing at RBS section is
not required.
6-61
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Tip
The reduction of the beam flange can significantly reduce the stiffness (and
stability) of the beam cross section, creating a greater propensity for LTB
lateral torsional buckling of the beam in the reduced section. The addition of
lateral bracing near the RBS may be required if a structural slab is not present
or if above minimum acceptable performance is desired.
considering the user note in the same section; column lateral bracing can be
achieved by the use of braces, decks, slabs, and also with indirect lateral
bracing. Therefore, there is no need for designing a specific brace for column.
1. Panel zone
As said on B.2.1, the analysis can be done with elastic or plastic methods. The
panel zone shall be retrofitted with doubler plates and/or diagonal stiffeners
(see Figures B.1 and B.2 of the code) if 𝑅𝑢 > 𝜙𝑅𝑣 = 0.75𝑅𝑣
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B.2.2).
6-62
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑀𝑢 1 𝑀𝑢 2
𝑅𝑢 = + − 𝑉𝑢 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003, Eq. B-1)
𝑑𝑚 1 𝑑𝑚 2
With 𝑀𝑢𝑖 =beam moments (not greater than plastic beam moments, on this
case use 𝑀𝑢 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑒 = 1624260 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚 assuming that the plastic hinge is going
to be developed on the RBS section) calculated using the load combinations of
the code and the amplification of the earthquake term by 2; 𝑑𝑚𝑖 = 0.95𝑑𝑖 ,
𝑉𝑢 =shear force in the column at the level of the union (neglect it as on the
previous design).
Considering then the doubler plates designed on the previous stage (2 plates,
𝑡𝑑𝑝 = 10 𝑚𝑚 ), calculations give: 𝜙𝑅𝑣 = 3702 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑅𝑢 = 2850 𝑘𝑁 doubler plate
thickness is OK.
According to section B.2.5, the minimum thickness of the column web and
doubler plates must be the same as AISC 341 code.
Doubler plates shall be welded to the column flanges with fillet or CJP groove
welds designed to resist the shear required strength (on seismic frames, the
welds shall resist the total shear strength of the doubler plate). If they are
against the column web, they shall be welded on their bottom and top ends
(and the welds must resist the proportion of the force transmitted to the
doubler plates). If they are away from the column web, doubler plates shall be
placed symmetrically and welded to the continuity plates (and the welds must
resist the proportion of the force transmitted to the each one of the doubler
plates).
Note:
As seen, the previous provisions are quite similar to AISC provisions. Refer to
Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates of
Chapter 6 on this Manual.
6-63
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
3. Continuity plates
2
𝑀𝑢
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.9 × 6.25𝑡𝑐𝑓 𝐹𝑦𝑓 = 3105 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑅𝑢 = = 2900 𝑘𝑁
𝑑𝑏 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓
Web crippling
According to B.3.4. (and note (1)), the continuity plates shall be welded to the
web and the loaded flange so to transfer to the web the proportion of the force
carried by the stiffeners:
6-64
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑅𝑛 ,𝑠𝑡
And the minimum stiffener total area shall be 𝐴𝑠𝑡 = = 341 𝑚𝑚2 .
𝜙𝐹𝑦 ,𝑠𝑡
1 1
𝑏𝑠 + 𝑡𝑐𝑤 = 150 ≥ 𝑏𝑐𝑓 = 150 OK
2 3
𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑦
𝑒𝑠 = 30 𝑚𝑚 < max 𝑡𝑏𝑓 , = 40 𝑚𝑚 NOT OK
250
Use 𝒆𝒔 = 𝟒𝟎 𝒎𝒎 and keep from the previous design 𝒃𝒔 and 𝑳𝒔 . The stiffener
area is 𝑨𝒔𝒕 = 𝟓𝟓𝟎𝟎 𝒎𝒎𝟐 > 𝑨𝒔𝒕,𝒎𝒊𝒏 /𝟐
Compression check:
According to B.7.2, the section resisting the compression is the same as the
previous design (external stiffeners), therefore:
Note:
As seen, the previous provisions are quite similar to AISC provisions. Refer to
Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates of
Chapter 6 on this Manual.
According to NCh2369.Of2003, section 8.4.4 (R>3 systems): 𝑀𝑝𝑐 / 𝑀𝑝𝑣 > 1.2
for the columns and beams at the union analyzed. (See exceptions of not
meeting the previous inequality at 8.4.4).
The code does not specify the calculation of the moments, so use the plastic
moments of the gross sections. Then:
6-65
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
5. Lateral bracing
Note:
According to the previous checks, the Chilean code is more stringent than the
AISC code only with the minimum thickness requirement of the continuity
plate. AISC is more stringent with the strength requirements for stiffeners.
Designed connection:
c=60mm
a=190mm b=450mm
Column : H 450 X 450 X 355.2
CJP
Beam : H 600 X 300 X 229.2
CJP
2PL 370 x 137.5 x 40 mm
CJP
Notes:
6-66
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369.Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements show in the code.
(Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, 8.5.1)
6-67
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
2. AISC 341-05
The beam web is connected to the columns using a bolted single plate
with bolts in short slotted holes.
The flange plates of the connection are welded to the flange of the column
with complete joint penetration groove welds and bolted to the beam
flanges with high strength bolts.
Top and bottom plates shall be identical.
Beam Limitations:
6-68
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
- Width – thickness ratios for the flanges and web of the beam
shall conform to the limits of section 9.4 of AISC 341-05.
- Beam depth is limited to W36 for rolled shapes. Depth of built up
sections shall not exceed the depth permitted for rolled wide-
flange shapes.
- The weight of the beam shall not exceed 224 kg/m.
- Beam flange thickness is limited to 25 mm.
- The clear span to depth ratio of the beam is limited to be greater
than 9 in SMF.
- Lateral bracing shall be provided at the end of the protected zone
(See Figure 6.4-1) in both inferior and superior flanges of the
beam. The location of the lateral bracing can vary between 𝑑 and
1.5𝑑 (with 𝑑 the depth of the beam) from the farthest bolt with
respect to the face of the column. There is no need to provide
lateral bracing if the beam supports a concrete slab with welded
shear connectors spaced at a maximum of 300 mm. Lateral
bracing shall conform section 9.8 of AISC 341 Seismic Provisions.
Column Limitations:
6-69
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
- Width – thickness ratios for the flanges and web of the column shall
conform to the limits of section 9.4 or 10.4 of the AISC seismic
provisions.
- The beam shall be connected to the flange of the column.
- Lateral bracing of columns shall conform to section 9.7 of the AISC
Seismic Provisions.
Single plate connection can be made with groove weld CJP or two sided
fillets welds or two sided PJP welds.
6.4.b. Example
Design a bolted flange plate moment connection (BFP) for the beam-to-column
connection shown in Figure 6.4-22. Use A345 ESP steel, required for
constructions subject to dynamic loads, according to NCh203.Of2006 , Table 3.
Use 70 ksi electrodes for welds.
The column and the beam are Chilean H 500 x 350 x 165.6 and H 500 x 300 x
132.3 built-up sections. The connection transfers shear and moment. The clear
span of the beam is 8000 mm.
Beam:
𝑉𝐷 = 40 𝑘𝑁
𝑉𝐿 = 20 𝑘𝑁
Column:
𝑃𝑢 = 426 𝑘𝑁
6-70
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Suppose that the beams and columns have been properly designed for
resisting the forces given by the load combinations of the applicable building
code (including seismic load).
H 500X300X132.3
H 500X350X165.6
6.4-2: General view of the connection.
H500x350x165.6
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
A345 ESP
(Re. Table 3, NCh203.Of2006)
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes.
6-71
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝐸
𝜆= < 𝜆𝑝𝑠 = 0.30 = 7.22
tw 𝐹𝑦
𝑏 𝐸
𝜆= < 𝜆𝑝𝑠 = 2.45 = 58.98
2𝑡 𝐹𝑦
In this case, both column and beam comply with the maximum limits.
4. Design Forces
Where 𝑅𝑦 is the ratio of expected yield strength to the minimum specified yield
stress. 𝑍𝑒 is the effective plastic modulus of the section and 𝐶𝑝𝑟 is a factor to
take account for the peak connection strength:
𝐹𝑦 + 𝐹𝑢
𝐶𝑝𝑟 = < 1.2
2𝐹𝑦
𝐶𝑝𝑟 = 1.15 < 1.2 → 𝐶𝑝𝑟 = 1.15
A345 ESP is similar to ASTM A572 Gr 50, according to the table I-6-1 of the
AISC 341 seismic specification, then 𝑅𝑦 = 1.1. Furthermore, considering that
the plastic modulus section is the corresponding to the beam, 𝑍𝑒 = 𝑍𝑥
Therefore:
6-72
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑀𝑝𝑟 = 1558473 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
For the shear design force, consider the plastic hinges at the ends of the
beam:
2𝑀𝑝𝑟
𝑉𝑢 = 1.2𝑉𝐷 + 1.0𝑉𝐿 + = 458 𝑘𝑁
𝐿
For further discussion regarding the calculation of the design forces according
to the Chilean provisions and practice, see the section of additional comments
at the end of this example.
Design the flange plates as plates subjected to tensile force. The force that
each plate shall resist is given by:
1.25𝑀𝑝𝑟
𝐹𝑝 = (Re. Section 7, step 4, AISC 358-05)
𝑑+𝑡 𝑝
The additional 1.25 factor is due to the fact that the plastic hinge will not be
located in the face of the column, but at a distance that depends of the length
of the connection that will cause an increment of the plastic moment for the
contribution of the shear force. This factor shall be verified after the design
procedure of the bolted flange plates. Note that 𝑡𝑝 is the thickness of the
flange plates.
1558473
𝐹𝑝 = 1.25 = 3746 𝑘𝑁
500 + 20
6. Bolts
Use M27 bolts (27 mm of diameter, standard holes of 30 mm). Even though
the NCh2369.Of2003 does not require to verify the connection as a slip critical
type, sometimes project specifications do require it.
6-73
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝜇 = 0.35
𝑠𝑐 = 1.00
𝐷𝑢 = 1.13
Also the nominal tensile strength for M27 ASTM A490 bolts is:
𝜙𝑛 𝑅𝑛 = 132 𝑘𝑁
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection considering slip critical
strength is: 𝑁𝐵 ≥28.37. Use 𝑁𝐵 = 30.
𝐴𝑏 = 573 𝑚𝑚2
𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (Re. AISC360-05, Table J3.2)
Then:
𝜙𝑛 𝑅𝑛 = 214 𝑘𝑁
Then, the number of bolts required for the connection is: 𝑁𝐵 > 17.5.
Use 𝑁𝐵 = 18.
Even though the slip critical limit state controls the design, in this case, due
the excessively large amount of bolts required, it is decided to use the shear
6-74
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
nominal strength of the bolts. Furthermore, slip critical check is not needed by
AISC 358 or NCh2369.Of2003.
Then, use 𝑵𝑩 = 18 for each flange plate. Use rows of two bolts each one.
Considering the size of the bolts that are going to be used, the length of the
connection will be greater than the depth of the beam. This does not
accomplish the requirements of AISC 358 for the prequalified connection, but
it is preferred the use of rows of two bolts instead of limiting the length of the
connection.
For the ductile behavior of the flange plates, following check shall be done:
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑅𝑡 𝐹𝑢 > 𝐴𝑔 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦
With 𝑅𝑦 = 1.1 , 𝑅𝑡 = 1.1 according to the table I-6-1 of the AISC 341 (ASTM
A572 grade 50 for flange plates). Considering two rows of bolts, the effective
area is (𝑑 = 30 𝑚𝑚):
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 300 × 20 − 2 × 𝑑 × 20 = 4800 𝑚𝑚2
Then:
𝑨𝒆𝒇𝒇 𝑹𝒕 𝑭𝒖 = 𝟐𝟑𝟕𝟔 𝒌𝑵 > 𝑨𝒈 𝑹𝒚 𝑭𝒚 = 𝟐𝟐𝟕𝟕 𝒌𝑵 OK
Tip:
Since the effective area is controlled by the diameter and number of the bolts,
it is important that the bolts shall have reasonable diameters in order to
ensure a ductile behavior of the flange plates.
𝐿𝑀𝐼𝑁 = 8 × 72 𝑚𝑚 + 2 × 48 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑑𝑐
With 𝑑𝑐 = 12 𝑚𝑚 the assumed spacing between the column and the beam,
then:
𝐿𝑀𝐼𝑁 = 684 𝑚𝑚
6-75
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Then the plate PL 500 x 300 x 20 does not accomplish with the required
spacing. Try a PL 690 X 300 X 20 plate.
Then the connection does not accomplish with the maximum length
requirement from AISC 358-05, but as discussed above, this fact will not be
considered in the design.
Interior bolts
𝐿𝑐 = 72 𝑚𝑚 − 30 𝑚𝑚 = 42 𝑚𝑚
6-76
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Exterior bolts
30
𝐿𝑐 = 54 𝑚𝑚 − = 39 𝑚𝑚
2
𝜙𝑛 𝑅𝑛 = 379 𝑘𝑁 < 524 𝑘𝑁 → 𝜙𝑛 𝑅𝑛 = 379 𝑘𝑁
Since the beam flange is thicker than each flange plate, this limit state does
not control the design:
𝑡𝑏𝑓 = 22 𝑚𝑚 > 𝑡𝑝 = 20 𝑚𝑚
Now that the dimensions of the flange plate connections are known, the tensile
force in the plates can be estimated accurately. The shear force is estimated,
considering a free body diagram of the beam between the two hinges, which
are located at the ends of the flange plate connections on the ends of the
beam.
2𝑀𝑝𝑟
𝑉 = 1.2𝑉𝐷 + 1.0𝑉𝐿 +
𝐿
𝐿 = 8000 𝑚𝑚 − 2 × 𝐿𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑛𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = 8000 𝑚𝑚 − 2 × 636 𝑚𝑚 = 6728 𝑚𝑚
𝑉 = 531 𝑘𝑁
Then the moment expected at the face of the column flange is:
𝑀𝑓
𝐹𝑝𝑓 = = 3646 𝑘𝑁
𝑑 + 𝑡𝑝
6-77
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Then the 1.25 factor used before was conservative, and the number of bolts
calculated on the previous steps is conservative.
The gross tensile area of each flange plate is: 𝐴𝑔 = 𝐵𝑡 = 300 × 20 = 6000 𝑚𝑚2 :
Where 𝐴𝑛 is the net area of the plate, which considers the reduction of the
section because of bolt holes, the nominal dimension for the holes for a M27
bolt is 𝑑 = 30 𝑚𝑚 , and taking into account the damage:
𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 = 30 𝑚𝑚 + 2 𝑚𝑚 = 32 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑛 = 𝐵 − 2 × 𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡 = 9440 𝑚𝑚2 < 0.85𝐴𝑔 = 10200 𝑚𝑚2
𝜙𝑛 𝑅𝑛 = 3823 𝑘𝑁 > 3511 𝑘𝑁 OK
The nominal strength for the block shear rupture limit state is given by:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 ≤ 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔𝑣 + 𝑈𝑏𝑠 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑡 (Re. AISC360-05, J4-5)
𝜙𝑛 = 0.9 (Re. AISC358 2.4.1)
6-78
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Where 𝑈𝑏𝑠 = 1.0 in this case, according to the commentary in the AISC 360-05
specification (AISC 360-05 C-J4.2). The values of 𝐴𝑛𝑣 , 𝐴𝑛𝑡 and 𝐴𝑔𝑣 are obtained
from the following figure:
Then:
According to the provisions of the section J4.4 of the AISC 360-05, the
compressive strength depends of the slenderness of the plate 𝐾𝐿/𝑟 :
𝑆1 = 60 𝑚𝑚
𝐼
𝑟=
𝐴
𝑡3𝐵
𝐼= = 1600000 𝑚𝑚4
12
𝐴 = 12000 𝑚𝑚2
𝑟 = 11.54 𝑚𝑚
6-79
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝐾𝐿 0.65𝑆1
= = 3.37
𝑟 𝑟
𝐾𝑙
Since < 25, the nominal strength is given by:
𝑟
𝑃𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔
𝜙𝑑 = 1.00
𝜙𝑑 𝑃𝑛 = 4140 𝑘𝑁 > 3511 𝑘𝑁 OK
𝑉𝑢 = 𝑉 = 531 𝑘𝑁
For the detail of the design of the shear tab, see section 3.1, Shear Tab
Connection, of this manual. The result of this design is:
Use a PL 450 X 100 X 10 plate, welded to the column flange with 6 mm two
fillet weld size.
The panel zone shall be verified according to section 7.4 of AISC 358-05
supplement N°1, which refers to 9.3 of AISC 341-05. According to section 9.3
of AISC 341-05 Seismic Provisions.
6-80
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
According to section 9.3 of AISC 341-05, the required minimum shear strength
of the panel zone shall be calculated from the summation of the shear
produced by the expected plastic hinge moments at the columns faces.
The shear strength (according to the limit state of shear yielding) is given by
the following:
(Re. Section J10.6 AISC 360-05)
If 𝑃𝑢 ≤ 0.75𝑃𝑦 :
2
3𝑏 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 1 + (Re. AISC 360-05, J10-11)
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤
If 𝑃𝑢 > 0.75𝑃𝑦 :
2
3𝑏 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑓 𝑃𝑢
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 1 + 1.9 − 1.2 (Re. AISC 360-05, J10-12)
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 𝑃𝑐
Where,
𝑃𝑢 : 𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑡𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛
𝑏𝑐𝑓 : 𝑤𝑖𝑑𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑓𝑙𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒
𝑑𝑏 : 𝐵𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑑𝑒𝑝𝑡
𝑃𝑦 : 𝐴𝑥𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑦𝑖𝑒𝑙𝑑 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑡𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛
𝑑𝑐 : 𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑑𝑒𝑝𝑡
𝑡𝑐𝑓 : 𝑇𝑖𝑐𝑘𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑡𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑓𝑙𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑒
𝑡𝑤 : 𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑤𝑒𝑏 𝑡𝑖𝑐𝑘𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠
If the panel zone cannot comply with the above requirements, strength shall
be provided with doubler plates, that must be designed according to the
provisions of AISC 360-05, J10-9. Doubler plates must resist 𝑅𝑢 − 𝜙𝑣 𝑅𝑛 .
Calculation of 𝑅𝑢 :
For the calculation of the shear solicitation in the panel zone, consider the
following figure (for a general interior connection):
6-81
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Vus
P uf 2 P uf 1
Vu
Mu 2 Mu 1
P uf 2 P uf 1
Vus
6.4-6: Typical panel zones forces.
Figure adapted from AISC Design Guide N°13, Fig. 2-3.
𝑀𝑢𝑖 is the plastic moment of the beam. Then, for this example, in which there
is only one beam arriving to the column (exterior connection):
𝑀𝑓 1909865
𝑉𝑢 = = = 3995 𝑘𝑁
𝑑𝑏 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓 500 − 22
Assuming that 𝑃𝑢 < 0.75𝑃𝑦 , the strength of the panel zone is:
2
3𝑏 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 1 + = 1099 𝑘𝑁 < 𝑉𝑢 NOT OK
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤
Doubler plates are required. Their design will follow provisions of AISC 360-05,
chapter G:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑤
𝜙 = 0.9
𝐴𝑤 = 2𝑤𝑧 𝑡𝑑𝑝
𝑤𝑧 = 500 − 2 × 25 = 450 𝑚𝑚
With 𝑤𝑧 the width of the panel zone of the column between column flanges.
6-82
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Then:
𝑉𝑢 − 𝜙𝑣 𝑅𝑛
2𝑡𝑑𝑝 ≥ = 31.08 𝑚𝑚
0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑤𝑧
𝑡𝑑𝑝 > 15.54 𝑚𝑚
See Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates
for Chapter 6.
Where 𝑑𝑧 is the depth of the panel zone between continuity plates, then:
𝑑𝑧 = 500 − 2 × 22 = 456 𝑚𝑚
456 + 450
𝑡≥ = 10𝑚𝑚
90
Then the column web is not ok, but using doubler plates that are plug welded
to the column web, the thickness considered is the summation of the doubler
plates and the web of the column, so the panel zone thickness is OK.
𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑅𝑦𝑏
𝑡𝑐𝑓 ≥ 0.4 1.8𝑏𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑏𝑓 (Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-1)
𝐹𝑦𝑐 𝑅𝑦𝑐
𝑏 𝑏𝑓
𝑡𝑐𝑓 ≥ (Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-2)
6
Where 𝑡𝑐𝑓 is the minimum required thickness of the column flange. Then, we
have:
6-83
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Continuity plates have to be designed for a force equal to 𝑅𝑢 − 𝜙𝑅𝑛 , where 𝜙𝑅𝑛
is the nominal strength of the column flange or the column web according to
the following limit states:
2
𝑅𝑛 = 6.25𝑡𝑐𝑓 𝐹𝑦𝑓 (Re. AISC 360-05. J10-1)
𝜙 = 0.90
Then,
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1347 𝑘𝑁
Consider that the concentrated force is applied at a distance to the end of the
column greater than the depth of the element, the nominal resistance is given
by:
𝑅𝑛 = 5𝑘 + 𝑁 𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡𝑤 (Re. AISC 360-05. J10-2)
𝜙 = 1.00
Considering that the column web is reinforced by the doubler plates, the
thickness 𝑡𝑤 is:
𝑡𝑤 = 𝑡𝑐𝑤 + 2𝑡𝑑𝑝 = 40 𝑚𝑚
Additionally, 𝑘 is the distance from the face of the flange to the web toe of the
fillet weld. Then, considering that for the column the value of 𝑘 is 30 mm, and
the value of N is the length of bearing, that in this case corresponds to the
thickness of the flange of the beam, 𝑁 = 22 𝑚𝑚. However, the value of N
cannot be less than k for beam end reactions, so use 𝑁 = 𝑘 = 30 𝑚𝑚, then:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 2484 𝑘𝑁
6-84
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Web Crippling
1.5
𝑁 𝑡𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡 𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.80𝑡𝑤2 1 + 3 (Re. AISC 360-05. J10-4)
𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤
𝜙 = 0.75
Them considering 𝑁 = 30 𝑚𝑚, and 𝑡𝑤 the thickness of the column web including
doubler plates, we have:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 8600 𝑘𝑁
Then,
𝑅𝑠𝑢 = 𝑃𝑢𝑓 − 𝜙𝑅𝑛
𝑀𝑓
𝑃𝑢𝑓 = = 3966 𝑘𝑁
𝑑𝑏 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓
𝑅𝑠𝑢 = 2619 𝑘𝑁
According to the AISC 358-05, thickness of the continuity plates must comply
with the following provisions:
1
𝑡𝑐𝑝 ≥ 𝑡𝑏𝑓 (Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4a)
2
6-85
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
According to the AISC 358 provisions of the section 2.4.4, continuity plates
must comply with the provisions of section J10 of the AISC 360-05. Therefore,
the continuity plate shall be designed as a stiffener, which is designed as an
element subjected to tensile forces, according to chapter D, and as element
subjected to compressive forces, according to the chapter E and section J4.4 of
AISC 360-05.
Tensile yielding:
Then, the required thickness, considering that the width of both continuity
plates is 𝑏𝑐𝑝 = 342 𝑚𝑚, then:
𝑅𝑠𝑢
𝑡𝑐𝑝 ≥ = 24.66 𝑚𝑚
𝜙𝐹𝑦 𝑏𝑐𝑝
Tensile fracture:
According to section E6.2 and J4.4 of AISC 360-05, the nominal strength is:
6-86
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑘𝐿
If ≤ 25:
𝑟
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 (Re. AISC 360-05, J4-6)
𝑘𝐿
If > 25: the design must be made according to chapter E of the AISC 360-05.
𝑟
Section J10.8 of AISC 360-05 establishes that the effective length for the
buckling verification is 0.75, where is the length of the stiffener; the area of
the stiffener must be considered as a cross section, with the two continuity
plates and an orthogonal section corresponding to 25𝑡𝑤 for exterior stiffeners or
12𝑡𝑤 for interior stiffeners (see Figure 6.4-7).
12tw or 25tw
Stiffener Stiffener
𝐼𝑦𝑦
𝑟= = 55.63
𝐴
6-87
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑘𝐿
= 6.05
𝑟
The width of the continuity plate plus one half of the thickness of the column
shall be not less than one third of the width of the flange of the beam or
moment connection plate that delivers the force:
𝑏𝑐𝑝 𝑡𝑤 𝑏 𝑏𝑓
+ = 175 𝑚𝑚 > = 100 𝑚𝑚 OK
2 2 3
𝑏𝑐𝑝 𝑡𝑤 𝑏𝑝
+ = 175 𝑚𝑚 > = 100 𝑚𝑚 OK
2 2 3
The thickness of the continuity plate shall not be less than one half the
thickness of the flange or moment connection that transmits the force and
greater or equal than the width of the continuity plate divided by 15:
𝑡 𝑏𝑓
𝑡𝑐𝑝 = 25 𝑚𝑚 > = 11 𝑚𝑚 OK
2
𝑡𝑝
𝑡𝑐𝑝 = 25 𝑚𝑚 > = 20 𝑚𝑚 OK
2
𝑏𝑐𝑝 /2
𝑡𝑐𝑝 = 25 𝑚𝑚 > = 11.4 𝑚𝑚 OK
15
Finally the continuity plate shall extend at least one half of the column depth.
Following section 7.3.1 of the AISC 358 supplement, lateral bracing must be
provided according to 9.8 for SMF of the AISC 341 Seismic Provisions. Thus,
lateral bracing must be provided at spacing not greater than 𝐿𝑏 = 0.086𝑟𝑦 𝐸/𝐹𝑦
and braces must meet the provisions of Appendix 6 of the AISC 360-05,
considering 𝑀𝑟 = 𝑅𝑦 𝑍𝐹𝑦 and 𝐶𝑑 = 1.0:
6-88
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1 10𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑
𝛽𝑏𝑟 = (Re. AISC 360-05, A-6-8)
𝜙 𝐿𝑏 𝑜
𝜙 = 0.75
Provide lateral bracing only in the inferior flange of the beam, because it is
supposed that the beam stand a slab that provides lateral bracing for the
superior flange. Furthermore, suppose that the inferior flange has lateral
bracing at both sides of the beam, so design the braces only for tensile force
solicitations.
𝑀𝑟 = 1355194 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝑜 = 500 − 22 = 478 𝑚𝑚
𝑃𝑟 = 56.7 𝑘𝑁
0.086𝑟𝑦 𝐸
𝐿𝑏 = , 𝑟𝑦 = 76.7 𝑚𝑚
𝐹𝑦
𝐿𝑏 = 3823 𝑚𝑚
Then:
𝑘𝑁
𝛽𝑏𝑟 = 9.88
𝑚𝑚
Tensile yielding:
𝑃𝑏𝑟 𝛽𝑏𝑟
𝐴𝑔 ≥ max , 𝐿
0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐸 𝑏𝑟
6-89
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝐴𝑔 ≥ 189 𝑚𝑚2
Try a tubular section D1 7/8, with a thickness of 1.5 mm. The area of this
section is 217 mm2.
According to the section 7.4 of the AISC 358 supplement N°1, we have that
the column- beam ratio shall conform to the requirements of the section 9.6 of
the AISC 341 Seismic Provisions for SMF. The code establishes the following:
𝑀𝑝𝑐
≥ 1.0
𝑀𝑝𝑏
Then, we have:
𝑀𝑝𝑐
= 1.61 > 1.0 OK
𝑀𝑝𝑏
6-90
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Designed connection:
18 M27 A490
5 M27 A490
PL 450X110X10
Doubler plate t = 16 mm
H 500X300X132.3
H 500X350X165.6
6.4-8: Designed connection.
1. Panel Zone
𝑀𝑢 1 𝑀𝑢 2
𝑅𝑢 = + − 𝑉𝑢 (Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, B-1)
𝑑𝑚 1 𝑑𝑚 2
Where 𝑑𝑚𝑖 correspond to 0.95𝑑𝑖 , where 𝑑𝑖 is the height of the beam 𝑖. Consider
only for this example that 𝑉𝑢 = 0 and that 𝑀𝑢 is 𝑀𝑓 (For the use of 𝑀𝑢 according
to the Chilean practice see the discussion at the end of this example):
𝑅𝑢 = 3460 𝑘𝑁
According to section B2.2, the available strength of the panel zone is:
2
3𝑏 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑝 1 + if 𝑃𝑢 ≤ 0.75𝑃𝑦 (Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, B-2)
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑝
𝜙 = 0.75
Where 𝑡𝑝 is the total thickness of the panel zone, including doubler plates,
then:
𝑡𝑝 = 2 × 16 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑡𝑐𝑤 = 40 𝑚𝑚
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 3308 𝑘𝑁 < 3460 𝑘𝑁
6-91
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑡𝑝 = 2 × 20 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑡𝑐𝑤 = 48 𝑚𝑚
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 3925 𝑘𝑁 > 3460 𝑘𝑁 OK
2. Continuity plates
2
𝑅𝑛 = 6.25𝑡𝑐𝑓 𝐹𝑦𝑓 (Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, B3.1)
𝜙 = 0.90
Then,
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1347 𝑘𝑁
Where 𝑘 is the distance from the face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet.
Then considering that for the column the value of 𝑘 is 30 mm, and the value of
N is the length of bearing that in this case corresponds to the thickness of the
flange of the beam, 𝑁 = 22 𝑚𝑚. However the value of 𝑁 cannot be less than 𝑘
for beam end reactions, so we take 𝑁 = 𝑘 = 30 𝑚𝑚, then:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 2980 𝑘𝑁
6-92
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Web Crippling
1.5
𝑁 𝑡𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡 𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.80𝑡𝑤2 1 + 3 (Re. NCh2369. Of 2003, B-7)
𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤
𝜙 = 0.75
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 12255 𝑘𝑁
Then, the force of design for the continuity plates is given by:
Then, the design force is lesser than the calculated with the AISC
requirements; however the doubler plates of the connections have to be
increased.
Note: As seen, the previous provisions are quite similar to AISC provisions.
Refer to Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler
Plates of Chapter 6.
6-93
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
The width of each continuity plate plus one half of the column web shall be
greater than one third of the width of the flange of the column or plate of
moment connection that delivers the concentrated load:
𝑏𝑐𝑝 𝑡𝑤 𝑏 𝑐𝑓
+ = 175 𝑚𝑚 > = 116 𝑚𝑚 OK
2 2 3
The thickness of the continuity plate shall be greater than the thickness of the
flange of the beam or the flange that transmit the concentrated force and
greater than its own width multiplied by 𝐹𝑦 /250, with 𝐹𝑦 in MPa:
Additionally, the thickness of the continuity plate shall be no lesser than the
thickness of the element of the moment connection that transmits the
concentrated force to the column:
Then, the thickness of the continuity plate has to be increased to 𝑡𝑐𝑝 = 40 𝑚𝑚.
5 M27 A490
PL 450X110X10
Doubler plate t = 20 mm
H 500X300X132.3
H 500X350X165.6
6.4-9 Designed connection, with additional criteria from NCh2369Of.2003.
6-94
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
The BFP moment connection is the most typical connection in the Chilean
practice; because of that, it is important to give some additional comments
regarding this connection.
The BFP connections present advantages for the Chilean construction practice.
Since the number of qualified professionals on steel construction is limited on
Chile, the most favorable connections are the ones that are simple and require
less constructive details to be executed at the construction site. The BFP
connection has the advantage of requiring that the welded parts, such as the
shear tab plate or the connection of the flange plates to the column, can be
done a the shop, which significantly reduces the amount of qualified
professionals required on site, to obtain a connection that has good behavior
under cyclic loads.
1. Design Forces
The latter does not considers effects such as strain hardening and the actual
expected yield stress of the available steel plates. These effects are considered
by the AISC seismic provisions by amplifying the plastic moment developed at
the beam by the coefficients 𝐶𝑝𝑟 and 𝑅𝑦 .
Therefore, the design moment to design the connection, according to the
Chilean provisions, is at least:
𝑀𝑝 = 𝑍𝑥 𝐹𝑦
In the example developed in this section, the design moment according to the
AISC provisions was:
𝑀𝑝 = 1558473 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝑀𝑝 = 1231994 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
6-95
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
which is approximately 25% smaller than the design moment obtained with
the AISC provisions.
The shear design force has to be calculated from the plastic moment that can
be developed at the ends of the beam (it is a capacity design), assuming that
plastic hinges develop at certain sections. Also, gravity loads are applied
simultaneously with the seismic loads.
NCh2369.Of2003 does not give any indication regarding the position where the
plastic hinges (neither establishes any criterion for designing a protected zone,
as the AISC provisions does). The only requirement is that the plastic hinge
must be located at a prudent distance from the face of the column (Re.
Section 8.4.1). Since there are no provisions regarding the exact location of
the plastic hinge, the use of the recommendations of the AISC 358-05 seems a
valid alternative. The indication for BFP connections is that the plastic hinge is
located at the end of the bolt group of the connection. Then, the shear design
force would be:
2𝑀𝑝
𝑉 = 𝑉𝑢 𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐 +
𝐿
𝐿 = 𝐿𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 − 2𝐿𝑝
Where 𝐿𝑝 is the distance from the plastic hinge to the face of the column, and
𝐿𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 is the length of the beam between column faces. The force 𝑉𝑢 𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑐
corresponds to the shear load calculated from load combinations that does not
include the seismic effect, such as self weight and live loads.
The location of the plastic hinge at a section far from the end of the beam will
induce a larger moment at the face of the column, which corresponds to the
shear design force multiplied by the distance from the face to the plastic
hinge.
Since the design moment according to the Chilean provisions is smaller than
the AISC moment, the required length of the connection will be smaller, and
then the design shear load will be smaller. Therefore, the amplification of the
required moment strength due to the distance between the plastic hinge and
the column will be lesser than the required moment strength obtained in the
case of the AISC provisions.
The use of the Chilean design provisions will result in smallest BFP
connections, mostly because these connections do not take into account the
6-96
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Anyway, it is important that at the stage of the project, when the basis of
design are established, to have a discussion in order to decide the use of
Chilean practice and provisions or the use of the AISC codes.
2. Detailing requirements
For the BFP connections, AISC 358-05 establishes some detailing requirements
such as:
The first two requirements are not established in the Chilean code. The CJP
welding requirement is established in section 8.5.5 of NCh2369.Of2003, and
the limitations for width-thickness ratios are established in section 8.4.3 of
NCh2369.Of2003, which are slightly less demanding than AISC.
3. Design verifications
General verifications
Flange plates:
6-97
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Shear tab:
The main difference between the Chilean and AISC provisions is that the latter
considers, for prequalified BFP moment connections, an additional requirement
in order to ensure the ductile behavior of the connection. The additional
requirement is given by forcing that the tensile rupture limit state has to be
greater than the tensile yielding limit state, considering the factors 𝑅𝑡 and 𝑅𝑦
for each limit state respectively, as seen on the solved example previously.
Panel Zone
For the design of the panel zone, the required verifications have to be done
according to the provisions of Appendix B of NCh2369Of.2003. These
provisions are, in general, the same as established in the AISC 341-05 Seismic
Provisions, and in AISC 358-05 Supplement N°1.
However, some differences arise from the calculation of the design force that
the panel zone must resist. The design force according, to Appendix B of the
NCh2369Of.2003 is given by:
𝑀𝑢 1 𝑀𝑢 2
𝑅𝑢 = + − 𝑉𝑢 (Re. B-1, NCh2369.Of2003)
𝑑𝑚 1 𝑑𝑚 2
This design force is obtained from equilibrium of the free body diagram of the
beam-to–column connection. 𝑀𝑢1 and 𝑀𝑢2 correspond to the moments of the
beams that arrive to the connection, calculated from the load combinations
established in NCh2369Of.2003, considering that the seismic load is amplified
by 2.0, but the moments need not exceed the plastic moments of the beams.
The force 𝑉𝑢 corresponds to the shear force in the column.
Although AISC 341-05 considers the same free body diagram than the Chilean
provisions, AISC 341-05 establishes that this free body diagram must be done
6-98
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
considering the projected moments from the plastic hinges, whereas the
Chilean provisions use the moments provided by the load combinations.
The other difference in the calculation of the design force for the panel zone,
are the values of 𝑑𝑚1 and 𝑑𝑚2 , which are recommended to be 0.95 times the
depth of the beams arriving to the connection, whereas the AISC provisions
consider the distance between centers of the flange plates of the beams.
If the panel zone resistance 𝑅𝑣 is smaller than the design force 𝑅𝑢 , continuity
plates shall be provided. The value of 𝑅𝑣 is calculated from the same equations
for both Chilean and AISC provisions (see section 6.4.c and 6.4.d of this
chapter), but the reduction factor considered in the Chilean provision is:
𝜙𝑣 = 0.75
Whereas the AISC provisions establish that 𝜙𝑣 = 1.00. Then, the Chilean
provisions use smaller design forces, but considers also a lesser panel zone
resistance.
For the continuity plate design, the limit states considered are the same for
both Chilean and AISC provisions:
6-99
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
4. Additional requirements
Lateral bracing
Column-beam ratios
6-100
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1. NCh2369.Of2003
Use high strength bolts (ASTM A325 or ASTM A490). Arc welding
electrodes shall comply with the requirements show in the code.
(Re. NCh2369, 8.5.1)
In column – beams joints, both inferior and superior flange must have
lateral bracing designed for a force equal to 0.02𝐹𝑦 𝑏𝑓 𝑡.
(Re. NCh2369, 8.5.4)
The design of the panel zone must be according to the provisions of the
appendix B of the NCh2369.Of2003 (Beam-column connection design on
rigid steel frames).
6-101
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
2. AISC 341-05
Beam Limitations:
6-102
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
- The clear span to depth ratio of the beam is limited to be greater than
7 in SMF.
- Lateral bracing shall be provided at the end of the protected zone
(see Figure 6.5-1) in both inferior and superior flanges of the beam.
The location of the lateral bracing can be vary between d and 1.5d
(with d the depth of the beam) from the face of the column. There is
no need to provided lateral bracing if the beam support a concrete
slab with welded shear connectors spaced at a maximum of 300 mm.
Lateral bracing shall conform section 9.8 of AISC 341 Seismic
Provisions.
Column Limitations:
Panel zones shall conform to the requirements of section 9.3 for SMF of
the AISC 341 Seismic Provisions.
6-103
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
The column – beam ratios are limited by the requirements of section 9.6
∗
of the AISC 341 Seismic Provisions. The summation 𝑀𝑝𝑏 shall be taken
equal to (𝑀𝑝𝑟 + 𝑀𝑣 ), where 𝑀𝑝𝑟 is computed according to the provisions of
section 8.7 of the AISC 358 supplement and 𝑀𝑣 is the additional moment
product of the shear amplification at the plastic hinge to the centerline of
the column.
The single plate shear connection shall be welded to the column flange
and the welds must stand a shear strength of at least 𝑝 𝑡𝑝 0.6𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦𝑝 , where
𝑝 is the height of the plate and 𝑡𝑝 is the thickness of the plate.
The single plate must be connected to the beam web with fillet welds. The
size of the fillet weld shall be the thickness of the single plate minus 2
mm. The fillets must extend along the sloped top and bottom portions of
the plate and along the full single plate heigth. The fillets must end at a
distance no greater than 25 mm but not less than 13 mm from the edge
of the access hole.
The beam web must be connected with the column flange with a CJP
groove weld. This welds shall be provided over the full length of the web
between the access holes and must comply with the requirements of the
section 7.3 and the appendix W of the AISC Seismic Provisions. Weld tabs
are not required.
6-104
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
single plate to
beam web weld
6.5.b. Example
Beam:
𝑉𝐷 = 40 𝑘𝑁
𝑉𝐿 = 20 𝑘𝑁
Column:
𝑃𝑢 = 500 𝑘𝑁
6-105
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
H500X300X132.3
H500X350X165.6
6.5-3: General view of the connection.
3. Section properties
H500x350x165.6
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
H500x300x132.3
(Re. Table 2.1.1 ICHA Manual for the Design of Steel Structures)
The limitations of the width – thickness ratios are given in table I-8-1 of AISC
341-05.
𝑏 𝐸
𝜆= < 𝜆𝑝𝑠 = 0.30 = 7.22
2𝑡 𝐹𝑦
6-106
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝐸
𝜆= < 𝜆𝑝𝑠 = 2.45 = 58.98
𝑡𝑤 𝐹𝑦
Column flange:
Column web:
Beam flange:
Beam web:
𝜆 = 57 < 𝜆𝑝𝑠 OK
4. Design forces
𝑀𝑝𝑟 = 𝐶𝑝𝑟 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑒
In this case, according to section 8.7 of AISC 358 supplement, 𝐶𝑝𝑟 shall be
taken equal to 1.4. For A345ESP according to the table I-6-1 of the AISC 341
Seismic Provisions, considering that the A345ESP is similar to an ASTM A572
grade 50, then 𝑅𝑦 = 1.1. Finally 𝑍𝑒 = 𝑍𝑥 , so the probable moment is:
𝑀𝑝𝑟 = 1897271 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
Since the plastic hinge is located at the face of the column, the effective
moment will be:
6-107
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑀𝑓 = 𝑀𝑝𝑟
Considering that the plastic hinge is immediately adjacent to the face of the
column, the shear force is:
2𝑀𝑝𝑟
𝑉 = + 𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦
𝐿
𝑉𝑔𝑟𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑡𝑦 = 1.2𝑉𝐷 + 1.0𝑉𝐿 = 68
𝑉 = 542 𝑘𝑁
According to section 8.4 of the AISC 358 supplement n°1, the column - beam
ratio shall conform to the requirements of the section 9.6 of the AISC 341
Seismic Provision for SMF. The code establishes the following:
𝑀𝑝𝑐
∗ ≥ 1.0
𝑀𝑝𝑏
𝑀𝑝𝑏 = (𝑀𝑝𝑟 + 𝑀𝑣 )
1. Design Force
According to the provisions of the section 8.6 of the AISC 358 supplement, the
shear strength of the single plate shear connection has to be greater than
𝑝 𝑡𝑝 (0.6𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦𝑝 ). To calculate the value of 𝑝 (the height of the plate that resist
shear), we fix the dimension of the access holes.
6-108
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝐿𝑎 = 38 𝑚𝑚
𝐻𝑎 = 25 𝑚𝑚
Note: For the dimensions of the access holes, conservatively it was not
considered for the design the minimum overlap of 6 mm in access holes.
Therefore:
𝑏𝑝 = 𝐿𝑎 + 50 𝑚𝑚 + 12 𝑚𝑚 = 100 𝑚𝑚
The 50 mm come from the AISC 358 supplement n°1 provisions and the 12
mm are for tolerance issues.
Then, considering that the gross shear area of the plate is: 𝐴𝑔 = 𝑝 𝑡 = 406 ×
12 = 4872 𝑚𝑚2 , we have:
6-109
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
4. Weld shear
The weld used for the connection between the plate and the column flange
consist one weld at each side of the plate connection. The eccentricity between
the weld and the line of application of the shear, is taken as a half of the width
of the single plate connection:
𝑒 = 50 𝑚𝑚
Then, the weld is subject to a shear force and a moment given by:
Since there are shear and moment acting on the connection, use the elastic
method for the calculation of the maximum stress for the weld:
(Re. Part 8 AISC Manual of Steel Construction)
𝑀 𝑤𝑒
𝑓𝑥 =
𝐼𝑥 2
𝑉𝑢
𝑓𝑦 =
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓
𝐹𝑢 = 𝑓𝑥2 + 𝑓𝑦2
Where 𝐼𝑥 and 𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 are the inertia and the effective area of the weld. Use 10
mm fillet weld size, which complies with maximum fillet weld size; the
height of the weld 𝑤𝑒 is equal to the length of the plate minus two times the
thickness of the plate, 𝑤𝑒 = 382 mm.
6-110
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
3
𝑤𝑒 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓
𝐼𝑥 = = 65683797 𝑚𝑚4
12
𝐴𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝑡𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑤𝑒 = 5401 𝑚𝑚2
𝑓𝑥 = 113 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝑓𝑦 = 144 𝑀𝑃𝑎
𝐹𝑢 = 183 𝑀𝑃𝑎
According to the AISC 360-05, table J2.5, the nominal strength for a weld is:
𝐹𝑤 = 0.60𝐹𝑒𝑥𝑥
𝜙 = 0.75
Then,
𝝓𝑭𝒘 = 𝟐𝟏𝟔 𝑴𝑷𝒂 > 183 𝑀𝑃𝑎 OK
5. Panel Zone
The panel zone must be verified according to section 8.4 of AISC 358-05
Supplement N°1, which refers to sections 9.3 or 10.3 of the AISC 341 Seismic
Provisions.
According to section 9.3 of AISC 341, the required shear strength of the panel
zone shall be calculated from the summation of the projected expected plastic
hinge moments at the column faces.
The shear strength (according to the limit state of shear yielding) is given by
the following:
(Re. Section J10.6 AISC 360-05)
If 𝑃𝑢 ≤ 0.75𝑃𝑦 :
2
3𝑏 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 1 + (Re. AISC 360-05, J10-11)
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤
If 𝑃𝑢 > 0.75𝑃𝑦 :
2
3𝑏 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑓 𝑃𝑢
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 1 + 1.9 − 1.2 (Re. AISC 360-05, J10-12)
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 𝑃𝑐
6-111
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Where,
If the shear strength is not enough, doubler plates shall be provided, which
must be designed according to AISC 360-05, J10-9, which refers to the
requirements of the chapter G of the AISC 360-05. The doubler plates must
resist 𝑅𝑢 − 𝜙𝑣 𝑅𝑛 .
6. Calculation of 𝑅𝑢
For the calculation of the shear forces in the panel zone, consider the following
figure.
Vus
(Puf )2 (Puf ) 1
Vu
(M u)2 (M u)1
(Puf )2 (Puf ) 1
Vus
6.5-4: Typical panel zones forces. Figure adapted from AISC Design Guide
N°13, Fig. 2-3.
The shear forces in the columns can be estimated assuming that the inflection
point is located at the middle of the story height of the column. However, the
effect of the column shear is neglected, which is a conservative assumption.
The shear design force for the panel zone is:
6-112
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑀𝑢𝑖 is the plastic moment of the beam. For this example, there is only one
beam at the column (exterior connection):
𝑀𝑓 1897271
𝑉𝑢 = = = 3969 𝑘𝑁
𝑑𝑏 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓 500 − 22
Assuming that 𝑃𝑢 < 0.75𝑃𝑐 , the resistance of the panel zone is:
2
3𝑏𝑐𝑓 𝑡𝑐𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤 1 + = 1099 𝑘𝑁 < 𝑉𝑢
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑤
Doubler plates are required; their design will follow the provisions of chapter G
of AISC 360-05:
𝑅𝑛 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑤
𝜙 = 0.9
𝐴𝑤 = 2𝑤𝑧 𝑡𝑑𝑝
𝑤𝑧 = 500 − 2 × 25 = 450 𝑚𝑚
Where 𝑤𝑧 is the width of the panel zone of the column between column
flanges.
Then,
𝑉𝑢 − 𝜙𝑣 𝑅𝑛
2𝑡𝑑𝑝 ≥ = 30.81 𝑚𝑚
0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑤𝑧
𝑡𝑑𝑝 > 15.4 𝑚𝑚
See Welded Connection Commentary for Continuity Plates and Doubler Plates
for Chapter 6.
6-113
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝑡 ≥ (𝑑𝑧 + 𝑤𝑧 )/90
Where 𝑑𝑧 is the depth of the panel zone between continuity plates, then:
𝑑𝑧 = 500 − 2 × 22 = 456 𝑚𝑚
456 + 450
𝑡≥ = 10𝑚𝑚
90
Then the column web is not ok. But using doubler plates that are plug welded
to the column web, the thickness considered is the summation of the doubler
plates and the web of the column:
9. Continuity plates
𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑅𝑦𝑏
𝑡𝑐𝑓 ≥ 0.4 1.8𝑏𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑏𝑓 (Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-1)
𝐹𝑦𝑐 𝑅𝑦𝑐
𝑏 𝑏𝑓
𝑡𝑐𝑓 ≥ (Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4-2)
6
Where 𝑡𝑐𝑓 is the minimum thickness of the column flange. Then, we have:
2
𝑅𝑛 = 6.25𝑡𝑐𝑓 𝐹𝑦𝑓 (Re. AISC 360-05. J10-1)
𝜙 = 0.90
6-114
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Then:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1347 𝑘𝑁
Consider that the concentrated force is applied at a distance to the end of the
element greater than the depth of the element; the nominal resistance is given
by:
Where 𝑘 is the distance from the face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet.
Then considering that for the column the value of 𝑘 is 30 mm, and the value of
N is the length of bearing that in our case corresponds to the thickness of the
flange of the beam, 𝑁 = 22 𝑚𝑚. However the value of 𝑁 cannot be less than 𝑘
for beam end reactions, so we take 𝑁 = 𝑘 = 30 𝑚𝑚, then we have:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 2484 𝑘𝑁
Web Crippling
1.5
𝑁 𝑡𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡 𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.80𝑡𝑤2 1 + 3 (Re. AISC 360-05. J10-4)
𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤
𝜙 = 0.9
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 10321 𝑘𝑁
6-115
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Then,
𝑅𝑠𝑢 = 𝑃𝑢𝑓 − 𝜙𝑅𝑛
𝑀𝑓
𝑃𝑢𝑓 = = 3969 𝑘𝑁
𝑑𝑏 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓
𝑅𝑠𝑢 = 2622 𝑘𝑁
According to the AISC 358-05, the thickness of the continuity plates must
accomplish with the following provisions:
For exterior connections:
1
𝑡𝑐𝑝 ≥ 𝑡𝑏𝑓 (Re. AISC 358-05, 2.4.4a)
2
According to the AISC 358 provisions, section 2.4.4, continuity plates must
comply with the provisions of section J10 of AISC 360-05. Therefore, the
continuity plate shall be designed as a stiffener, which is designed as an
element subjected to tensile forces according to chapter D of AISC 360-05,
and as an element subjected to compressive forces, according to chapter E
and section J4.4 of AISC 360-05.
Tensile yielding:
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 (Re. AISC 360-05, D2-1)
𝜙 = 0.9
Then, the required thickness, considering that the width of both continuity
plates is 𝑏𝑐𝑝 = 342 𝑚𝑚, then:
𝑅𝑠𝑢
𝑡𝑐𝑝 ≥ = 24.69 𝑚𝑚
𝜙𝐹𝑦 𝑏𝑐𝑝
6-116
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Tensile fracture:
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒 (Re. AISC 360-05, D2-2)
𝜙 = 0.75
According to the provisions of the section E6.2 and J4.4 of the AISC 360-05,
we have that the nominal strength is:
𝑘𝐿
If ≤ 25 then 𝑅𝑛 = 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 (Re. AISC 360-05, J4-6)
𝑟
𝑘𝐿
If > 25 then the design must be made according to the provisions of chapter
𝑟
E of AISC 360-05.
Stiffener Stiffener
6-117
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝐼𝑦𝑦
𝑟= = 55.63
𝐴
𝑘𝐿
= 6.05
𝑟
Then, design according to the provisions of the section J4 of the AISC 360-05
results in:
𝑅𝑛 = 𝐴𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓 𝐹𝑦 = 9573 𝑘𝑁
𝑀𝑓
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 8616 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑃𝑢𝑓 = = 3969 𝑘𝑁 OK
𝑑 𝑏 −𝑡 𝑏𝑓
The width of the continuity plate plus one half of the thickness of the column
shall be not less than one third of the width of the flange of the beam or
moment connection plate that delivers the force:
𝑏𝑐𝑝 𝑡𝑤 𝑏 𝑏𝑓
+ = 175 𝑚𝑚 > = 100 𝑚𝑚 OK
2 2 3
The thickness of the continuity plate shall not be less than one half the
thickness of the flange or moment connection that transmits the force and
greater or equal than the width of the continuity plate divided by 15:
𝑡 𝑏𝑓
𝑡𝑐𝑝 = 25 𝑚𝑚 > = 11 𝑚𝑚 OK
2
𝑏𝑐𝑝 /2
𝑡𝑐𝑝 = 25 𝑚𝑚 > = 11.4 𝑚𝑚 OK
15
Finally the continuity plate shall extend at least one half of the column depth,
which in this case is accomplished because the continuity plate extends in all
the depth of the column.
6-118
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Following the provisions of section 8.3.1 of the AISC 358 supplement, lateral
bracing must be provided according to 9.8 for SMF of the AISC 341 Seismic
Provision. Thus, lateral bracing must be provided at a spacing not greater than
𝐿𝑏 = 0.086𝑟𝑦 𝐸/𝐹𝑦 , and the braces must meet the provisions of Appendix 6 of
AISC 360-05, considering a design moment equal to 𝑀𝑟 = 𝑅𝑦 𝑍𝐹𝑦 , and 𝐶𝑑 = 1.0:
1 10𝑀𝑟 𝐶𝑑
𝛽𝑏𝑟 = (Re. AISC 360-05, A-6-8)
𝜙 𝐿𝑏 𝑜
𝜙 = 0.75
Provide lateral bracing only at the bottom flange of the beam. Furthermore,
suppose that the inferior flange has lateral bracing at both sides of the beam,
so design the braces only for tensile forces.
𝑀𝑟 = 1355194 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝑜 = 500 − 22 = 478 𝑚𝑚
𝑃𝑟 = 56.7 𝑘𝑁
0.086𝑟𝑦 𝐸
𝐿𝑏 = , 𝑟𝑦 = 76.7 𝑚𝑚
𝐹𝑦
𝐿𝑏 = 3823 𝑚𝑚
Then:
𝑘𝑁
𝛽𝑏𝑟 = 9.88
𝑚𝑚
The resistance to tensile forces is given by tensile yielding:
6-119
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Then, the required area for the cross section of the brace in tension is (from
strength and stiffness requirements):
𝑃𝑏𝑟 𝛽𝑏𝑟
𝐴𝑔 ≥ max , 𝐿
0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐸 𝑏𝑟
𝐴𝑔 ≥ 189 𝑚𝑚2
Then a tubular section D1 7/8, with a thickness of 1.5 mm, may be used. The
area of this section is 217 mm2.
The beam is subjected to a shear force 𝑉 = 542 𝑘𝑁; then, according to the
provisions of chapter G of AISC 360-05:
Designed Connection
CJP
Contuinity plate t = 25 mm
PL t = 12 mm 10
10
Doubler plate t = 16 mm
H500X300X132,3
H500X350X165,6
6.5-6: General view of the designed connection.
6-120
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
1. Panel Zone
𝑀𝑢 1 𝑀𝑢 2
𝑅𝑢 = + − 𝑉𝑢 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B-1)
𝑑𝑚 1 𝑑𝑚 2
Where 𝑑𝑚𝑖 corresponds to 0.95𝑑𝑖 , and 𝑑𝑖 is the height of the beam i. Consider
for this example that 𝑉𝑢 = 0 and that 𝑀𝑢 is 𝑀𝑓 :
𝑅𝑢 = 3994 𝑘𝑁
2
3𝑏 𝑐𝑓 𝑡 𝑐𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.60𝐹𝑦 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑝 1 + 𝑖𝑓 𝑃𝑢 ≤ 0.75𝑃𝑦 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B-2)
𝑑𝑏 𝑑𝑐 𝑡𝑝
𝜙 = 0.75
Where 𝑡𝑝 is the total thickness of the panel zone, including doubler plates,
then:
𝑡𝑝 = 2 × 16 𝑚𝑚 + 𝑡𝑐𝑤 = 40 𝑚𝑚
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 3308 𝑘𝑁 < 3994
2. Continuity plates
2
𝑅𝑛 = 6.25𝑡𝑐𝑓 𝐹𝑦𝑓 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B3.1)
6-121
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
𝜙 = 0.90
Then,
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1347 𝑘𝑁
Where 𝑘 is the distance from the face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet.
Then considering that for the column the value of 𝑘 is 30 mm, and the value of
N is the length of bearing that in our case corresponds to the thickness of the
flange of the beam, 𝑁 = 22 𝑚𝑚. However, the value of N cannot be less than 𝑘
for beam end reactions, so it is used 𝑁 = 𝑘 = 30 𝑚𝑚. Resulting in:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 3477 𝑘𝑁
Web Crippling
1.5
𝑁 𝑡𝑤 𝐸𝐹𝑦𝑤 𝑡 𝑓
𝑅𝑛 = 0.80𝑡𝑤2 1 + 3 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003, B-7)
𝑑 𝑡𝑓 𝑡𝑤
𝜙 = 0.75
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 15064 𝑘𝑁
6-122
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
Then, the force of design for the continuity plates is given by:
Then, the design force increases but does not control the design.
Note: As seen, the previous provisions are quite similar to AISC provisions.
The width of each continuity plate plus one half of the column web shall be
greater than one third of the width of the flange of the column or plate of
moment connection that delivers the concentrated load:
𝑏𝑐𝑝 𝑡𝑤 𝑏 𝑐𝑓
+ = 200𝑚𝑚 > = 166 𝑚𝑚 OK
2 2 3
The thickness of the continuity plate shall be greater than the thickness of the
flange of the beam or the flange that transmit the concentrated force and
greater than its own width multiplied by 𝐹𝑦 /250, with 𝐹𝑦 in MPa:
6-123
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
CJP
Contuinity plate t = 25 mm
PL t = 12 mm 10
10
Doubler plate t = 24 mm
H500X300X132,3
H500X350X165,6
6.5-7 Designed connection considering additional criteria of NCh2369Of.2003.
6-124
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
There are many solutions for the detailing of continuity plates welding. No
specific design will be shown; but some requirements and information tips are
listed down.
1. Tension stiffeners
2. Compression stiffeners
6-125
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
At the end of weld adjacent to the column web/flange juncture, weld tabs for
continuity plates shall not be used, except when permitted by the engineer of
record. Unless specified by the engineer of record that they be removed, weld
tabs shall not be removed when used in this location.
6-126
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
a) The sum of the design strengths in tension of the contact areas of the
continuity plates to the column flanges that have attached beam
flanges.
b) The design strength in shear of the contact area of the plate with the
column web
c) The design strength in shear of the column panel zone
d) The sum of the expected yield strengths of the beam flanges
transmitting force to the continuity plates.
There are many solutions for the detailing of doubler plates welding. No
specific design will be shown; but some requirements and information tips are
listed down.
6-127
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 6: MOMENT CONNECTIONS
For seeing examples of different welding configurations for the doubler plates
(to column flanges and at their ends), refer to Section 4.4 of AISC Design
Guide # 13. Also consult Ch.6 (Design Examples).
References:
6-128
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
7. COLUMN SPLICES
7.1. Bolted Column Splice for SCBF
1. NCh2369.Of2003
(Re.NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.1)
(Re.NCh2369.Of2003, 8.5.9)
- Splices must be dimensioned for the design forces obtained from the
load combinations (NCh2369.Of2003, 4.5) in which the earthquake
must be amplified by 2.0.
2. AISC 341-05
General requirements:
(Re.8.4, AISC 341-05)
7-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Most stringent conditions between these two codes will be used for the
determination of the design forces (M, V and N).
7.1.b. Example
Design an all bolted column splice for a special concentrically braced frame for
the connection shown in Figure 7.1-1 and Figure 7.1-2. Use A250 ESP steel,
required for constructions subjected to dynamic loading, according to
NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3.
The upper and the lower columns are Chilean H350X350X175.1 built-up
sections. Assume that the column clear height is 𝐿𝑛 =3700 mm. The columns
have been designed for resisting the forces given by the load combinations of
the applicable building code (including the seismic load) and the ends are not
prepared for full contact in bearing. Suppose that the loads on the columns
are:
𝑉𝐷 = 50 𝑘𝑁, 𝑉𝐿 = 20 𝑘𝑁, 𝑉𝐸 = 60 𝑘𝑁
7-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
web plate
gap
Outter Inner
flange flange
plate plate
tw
d
Column Section
b1
t1
t2
b3
tf
t3 b2
bf
7-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
H350X350X175.1
A250 ESP:
(Re. Table 3, NCh203.Of.2003)
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎, 𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎
2. Design forces
𝑃𝑢 𝑖 = 833 𝑘𝑁 (Compression).
𝑃𝑢 𝑖𝑖 = −179 𝑘𝑁 (Tension).
𝑃𝑢
According to AISC 341-05, section 8.3, if > 0.4, without the consideration
𝜙 𝑐 𝑃𝑛
of the amplified seismic load, the required axial and tensile strength should
take into account the Ω0 factor on the load combinations given by the
applicable building code. In this case, the NCh2369.Of2003, has mandatorily
7-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
In order to comply with AISC 341-05, section 13.5; use 50% of the column
nominal strength 𝑀𝑛 . Suppose that the column reaches its plastic capacity
(𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 = 801000 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚).
Then
𝑀2 = 0.5𝑀𝑛 = 0.5𝑀𝑝 = 400500 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
ii. The 100% of 𝑀𝑛 (the column strength capacity is always larger than
𝑀𝑢 ) could be used for the design of this splice. This is recommendable
for a quick design in a design stage where splice locations are not
defined and the loads are not well known.
7-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Using AISC 341-05, the lower and the upper column are the same, hence:
2𝑀𝑝𝑐 2𝑀𝑝𝑐
V2 = =
𝐻 𝐿𝑛
𝑀𝑝𝑐 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 = 801000 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
2𝑀𝑝𝑐
i. Note that 𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 = > 𝑉𝑢 = 𝑉 1 at the splice location and this condition
𝐿𝑛
meets the requirements of AISC 341-05 (see 8.4 comments of the
code). 𝑉𝑢 = 𝑉 1 is obtained according to NCh2369.Of2003.
All the forces, including the axial forces 𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑄 (compression) or 𝑇𝑅𝐸𝑄 (tension),
are transferred from the upper shaft to the lower shaft via the bolted splice
plates.
M M
V V
Compresion Case P Tension Case T
P1 P2 T1 T2
P3 T3
7-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Suppose that the required shear force (𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 ) will be transferred entirely by the
web splice plate.
It is assumed that the moment is resisted entirely by the flange splices, and
that the axial load is distributed among the web and flange splices
proportionately to the relative areas.
𝑃 𝑅𝐸𝑄 𝐴𝑓 𝑀𝑅𝐸𝑄
𝑃1,2 𝑅𝐸𝑄 = ± (Axial forces transferred through the flanges).
𝐴 𝑑 −𝑡 𝑓
𝑃 𝑅𝐸 𝑄 𝑑−2𝑡 𝑓 𝑡 𝑤
𝑃3 𝑅𝐸𝑄 = (Axial force transferred through the web).
𝐴
Same as above:
𝑇𝑅𝐸𝑄 𝐴𝑓 𝑀𝑅𝐸𝑄
𝑇1,2 𝑅𝐸𝑄 = ± (Axial forces transferred through the flanges).
𝐴 𝑑−𝑡 𝑓
𝑇𝑅𝐸𝑄 𝑑−2𝑡 𝑓 𝑡 𝑤
𝑇3 𝑅𝐸𝑄 = (Axial force transferred through the web).
𝐴
With 𝐴𝑓 = 𝑏𝑓 𝑡𝑓 the area of one flange of the column shape and 𝐴 the total area
of the column shape.
Tips:
i. There are other ways of distributing forces. You can use any
reasonable way.
ii. The maximum compression and tension cases on flanges and the
compression and tension cases on the web shall be checked.
7-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
5.a.-Compression case
P1 REQ (kN) 1559
P2 REQ (kN) -905
P3 REQ (kN) 179
5.b.-Tension case
Through flanges:
𝑃𝑓 = 1559 𝑘𝑁 , 𝑇𝑓 = 1303 𝑘𝑁
Through web:
𝑃𝑤 = 179 𝑘𝑁 , 𝑇𝑤 = 39 𝑘𝑁, 𝑉𝑤 = 433 𝑘𝑁
On each flange, these flange forces will be transferred by an inner flange splice
plate (total area of the two plates is 𝐴𝑖𝑓 = 2𝑏2 𝑡2 ) and by an outer splice flange
plate (total area of 𝐴𝑜𝑓 = 𝑏1 𝑡1 ). Hence, divide the flange forces using the same
concept of relative areas as shown before.
Tip:
7-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Web bolts:
Calculate the maximum force on a bolt for eccentric shear and axial force (see
Figure 7.1-4).
𝑉𝑤 = 433 𝑘𝑁, max 𝑃𝑤 , 𝑇𝑤 = 179 𝑘𝑁
Try M24 bolts, 𝑵𝑩 =8 bolts and 𝑵𝑹= 2 rows. Number of bolts per row 𝒏=4.
e2
e4 e4
e3
e1
y e1
x
e1
e3 A
g
Py
Px
Figure 7.1-4: Bolts positions on web splice plate. Bolt A has the larger load.
Use a gap 𝒈 = 𝟓 𝒎𝒎. Therefore, using the midline of the gap, the distance from
the line of action of 𝑉𝑤 to the gravity center of the bolts arrangement is
𝑔
𝑒𝑥 = + 𝑒3 + 1.5𝑒1 = 152.5 𝑚𝑚. Use the classical elastic method for the analysis of
2
the eccentric shear bolted connection.
7-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
𝑁𝐵 = number of bolts = 8.
𝑃𝑤
𝑃𝑥 = = 90 𝑘𝑁
2
𝑉𝑤
𝑃𝑦 = = 217 𝑘𝑁
2
V F
F
F F/2 F/2
Figure 7.1-5: Forces scheme on the web splice. Frontal and lateral view.
𝑀𝑂 = 𝑃𝑦 𝑒𝑥 = 33014 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝑟𝑖2 = 𝑥𝑖2 + 𝑦𝑖2 = 69000 𝑚𝑚2
𝑃𝑥 𝑀0 𝑦𝑖
𝑅𝑥𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = + = 35 𝑘𝑁
𝑁𝐵 𝑟𝑖2
𝑃𝑦 𝑀0 𝑥𝑖
𝑅𝑦𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = + = 77 𝑘𝑁
𝑁𝐵 𝑟𝑖2
2 2
𝑅𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 𝑅𝑥𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 + 𝑅𝑦𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 85 𝑘𝑁
7-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Bolts check:
For conservative calculations, use for slip-critical connection type check, class
A surface (𝜇 = 0.35), and for bearing type connections, consider threads
included on the shear plane.
Therefore:
𝑘𝑁
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 86 > 𝑅𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 85 𝑘𝑁 OK
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
Note:
It is not an obligation to do the slip critical connection check in bolted connections.
If it is desired to have a rigid connection, slip critical check is recommended. In
this example, we will follow the design with the number of bolts obtained from the
slip critical check.
𝑘𝑁
𝑅𝑛 = 2.4𝑑𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 230
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
For single shear on the most loaded bolt, check the following:
7-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Compressive force:
𝑃𝑤 = 179 𝑘𝑁
3𝑏
𝑡3 3
𝐼 12 𝑘𝐿
𝑟𝑀𝐼𝑁 = = = 2.89 𝑚𝑚 → = 32.91 > 25 → Use Ch. E.
𝐴 𝑡 3 𝑏3 𝑟 𝑀𝐼𝑁
𝑘𝐿 𝐸 𝜋2𝐸
= 32.91 < 4.71 = 133 , therefore with 𝐹𝑒 = 𝑘𝐿 2
= 1823 𝑀𝑃𝑎:
𝑟 𝑀𝐼𝑁 𝐹𝑦
𝑟
𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 0.658𝐹 𝑒 𝐹𝑦 = 236 𝑀𝑃𝑎
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. E7-2)
𝑃𝑤
𝜙𝑃𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝐴𝑔 = 0.9𝐹𝑐𝑟 𝑏3 𝑡3 = 425 𝑘𝑁 > = 90 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
39
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝑏3 𝑡3 = 450 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑇𝑤 = = 20 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
7-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-2)
𝑇𝑤
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 426 𝑘𝑁 > = 20 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
e1
e1
e1
𝑉𝑤
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1.0 × 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 300 𝑘𝑁 > = 217 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
7-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
𝑉𝑤
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 256 𝑘𝑁 > = 217 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
2 4
𝑃𝑊 /2 𝑉𝑊 /2
+ ≤ 1.0
𝜙𝑃𝑦 𝜙𝑉𝑦
With
Then:
2 4
𝑃𝑊 𝑉𝑊
+ = 0.31 ≤ 1.0 OK
𝜙𝑃𝑦 𝜙𝑉𝑦
Split the forces according to the areas of inner and outer plates:
Try the following dimensions:
7-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
𝑃𝑓 𝐴𝑔1
𝑃𝑓𝑜 = = 828 𝑘𝑁
𝐴𝑔1 + 2𝐴𝑔2
𝑇𝑓 𝐴𝑔1
𝑇𝑓𝑜 = = 692 𝑘𝑁
𝐴𝑔1 + 2𝐴𝑔2
𝑃𝑓 2𝐴𝑔2
𝑃𝑓𝑖 = = 731 𝑘𝑁
𝐴𝑔1 + 2𝐴𝑔2
𝑇𝑓 2𝐴𝑔2
𝑇𝑓𝑖 = = 611 𝑘𝑁
𝐴𝑔1 + 2𝐴𝑔2
Bolts design:
Verify the shear on connection for friction type and bearing type failure. Try
M20, ASTM A490 bolts.
Therefore:
𝑘𝑁 max 𝑃 𝑓𝑜 ,𝑇𝑓𝑜
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 60 → 𝑁𝐵 = = 13.75. Use 𝑵𝑩 = 𝟏𝟔 bolts in 𝑵𝑹 = 𝟒 rows.
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡 𝜙𝑅 𝑛
Note:
It is not an obligation to do the slip critical connection check in bolted connections.
If it is desired to have a rigid connection, slip critical check is recommended. In
this example, we will follow the design with the number of bolts obtained from the
slip critical check.
7-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
𝑘𝑁
𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 ≤ 2.4𝑑𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 230
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
Use 𝜙 = 0.75 (LRFD), 𝐿𝑐 = clear distance in the direction of the force, between
the edge of the hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the material,
𝑡 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛(𝑡1 , 𝑡2 , 𝑡𝑓 ) = 12 𝑚𝑚 , 𝐹𝑢 = 400 𝑀𝑃𝑎, 𝑑=nominal bolt diameter = 20 mm.
Try:
𝑒1 = 65 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒2 = 60 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒3 = 40 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒4 = 45 𝑚𝑚,
𝑒5 = 𝑏1 − 2𝑒2 − 2𝑒4 = 130 𝑚𝑚.
7-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
bf
tw
b2 b2
e3
e1
e1
e1 e4 e4
e3
e4 e2 e5 e2 e4
b1
22 𝑘𝑁
Edge bolts: 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒3 − = 29 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 167
2 𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
𝑘𝑁 𝑘𝑁
Interior bolts: 𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒1 − 22 = 43 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 247 → 𝑅𝑛 = 230
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡 𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M20 is 22mm. See AISC
360-05, table J3.3M.
7-17
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Flange plates:
Compressive force:
𝑃 𝑓𝑖
Per each one of the inner plates: = 365 𝑘𝑁
2
𝑡3
2𝑏2
= 24.54 < 25 → use Ch. J
𝐼 𝑘𝐿
𝑟𝑀𝐼𝑁 = = 12
= 3.46 𝑚𝑚 →
𝐴 𝑡 2 𝑏2 𝑟 𝑀𝐼𝑁
𝑃 𝑓𝑖
𝜙𝑃𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 405 𝑘𝑁 > OK
2
Tensile force:
𝑇𝑓𝑖
Per each one of the inner plates: = 305 𝑘𝑁
2
𝑇𝑓𝑖
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝑏2 𝑡2 = 405 𝑘𝑁 > = 305 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-1)
Tensile rupture on splice plate:
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-2)
𝐴𝑛 = 𝐴𝑔 − 2𝑡2 𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶
𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 = 22 𝑚𝑚 𝑛𝑜𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑜𝑙𝑒 + 2 𝑚𝑚 𝑑𝑎𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑒 = 24 𝑚𝑚
7-18
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
e2
e3
e1
e1
e1
2
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 2𝑡2 3𝑒1 + 𝑒3 = 5640 𝑚𝑚
2
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐴𝑔𝑣 − 7𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡2 = 3624 𝑚𝑚
2
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 𝑒2 𝑡2 − 𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡2 = 432 𝑚𝑚
𝑇𝑓𝑖
𝑅𝑛 = 1043 𝑘𝑁 > 1019 𝑘𝑁 → 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 764 𝑘𝑁 > = 305 𝑘𝑁
2
- Compressive force:
𝑃𝑓𝑜 = 828 𝑘𝑁
7-19
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
𝑡3
1𝑏1
𝐼 12 𝑘𝐿
𝑟𝑀𝐼𝑁 = = = 3.46 𝑚𝑚 → = 24.54 < 25 → use Ch. J
𝐴 𝑡 1 𝑏1 𝑟 𝑀𝐼𝑁
- Tensile force:
𝑇𝑓𝑜 = 692 𝑘𝑁
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-2)
𝐴𝑛 = 𝐴𝑔 − 4𝑡1 𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶
𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 = 22 𝑚𝑚 𝑛𝑜𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝑜𝑙𝑒 + 2 𝑚𝑚 𝑑𝑎𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑒 = 24 𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑛 = 2928 𝑚𝑚2 ≤ 0.85𝐴𝑔 = 3468 𝑚𝑚2
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 878 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑇𝑓𝑜 = 692 𝑘𝑁 OK
7-20
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
e3
e1
e1
e1
T
2e 2 + e5
2
𝐴𝑔𝑣 = 2𝑡1 3𝑒1 + 𝑒3 = 5640 𝑚𝑚
2
𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 𝐴𝑔𝑣 − 7𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡1 = 3624 𝑚𝑚
2
𝐴𝑛𝑡 = 2𝑒2 + 𝑒5 𝑡1 − 3𝑑𝐶𝐴𝐿𝐶 𝑡1 = 2136 𝑚𝑚
𝑅𝑛 = 1724 𝑘𝑁 > 1700 𝑘𝑁 → 𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1275 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑇𝑓𝑜 = 692 𝑘𝑁 OK
7-21
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Locate the center of the splice at 1.5 m from the top flange of the bottom
beam.
H 350x350x175.1
A-A Section
A
(gap)
32 M20 ASTM A490
PL 200x605x8mm
PL 340x425x12mm
2PL 150x425x12mm
Final tips:
i. If the upper column and the lower column of the splice were of
different sizes (specially different heights), filler plates would be
needed for the correct positioning of the flange cover plates.
ii. The approximation done in this example, for considering that the
bending moment is completely transferred through the flanges of the
column, is not far away from reality. Note that also it has been made
an approximation for the distribution of axial forces, according to
their relative areas principle. Any other reasonable principle or model
for the distribution of forces could be used.
7-22
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
1. NCh2369.Of2003:
2. AISC 341-05:
General requirements:
(Re. 8.4, AISC 341-05)
7-23
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
For SMF systems: When column splices are not made with groove welds, they
shall have a required flexural strength that is at least equal to R y Fy Zx (LRFD) or
R y Fy Zx /1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the smaller column. The required shear
strength of column web splices shall be at least equal to 𝑀𝑝𝑐 /𝐻 (LRFD) or
𝑀𝑝𝑐 /1.5𝐻 (ASD), as appropriate, where 𝑀𝑝𝑐 is the sum of nominal plastic
flexural strengths of the column above and below the splice.
7.2.b. Example
The design procedure for this column splice is the same shown in example 7.1.
In this example, the difference is only in the design forces between SMF
systems (more stringent design moments in AISC 341-05) in comparison with
SCBF systems, because in SMF systems the columns resist bigger moments
especially due to earthquake action. Refer to example 7.1 for the design
procedure of a general column splice.
7-24
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
1. NCh2369.Of2003
2. AISC 341-05
General requirements:
(Re. 8.4, AISC 341-05)
- For PJP groove welds, the available strength shall at least equal to
200% the required strength.
7-25
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Note that according to AISC 341 Commentary, a CJP groove weld may
be considered as satisfying this previous requirement.
The centerline of the splice for column splices made with fillet welds
or PJP groove welds shall be located 1200 mm or more away from the
beam-to-column connection. When the column clear height between
beam-to-column connections is less than 2400 mm, splices shall be
located at half the clear height.
Most stringent conditions between these two codes will be used for the
determination of the design forces (M, V and N).
7.3.b. Example
Design a fully welded column splice for a special concentrically braced frame
for the connection shown in Figure 7.3-1. Use A250 ESP steel, required for
constructions subjected to dynamic loading, according to NCh203.Of2006
code, Table 3. Use E70 electrodes for welded connections.
The upper and the lower columns are Chilean H 350 X 350 X 175.1 built-up
sections. Assume that the clear height of the column is 𝐿𝑛 =3700 mm. The
columns have been designed for resisting the forces given by the load
combinations of the applicable building code (including the seismic load).
Suppose that the loads on the columns are:
𝑉𝐷 = 50 𝑘𝑁, 𝑉𝐿 = 20 𝑘𝑁, 𝑉𝐸 = 60 𝑘𝑁
7-26
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
tf
A250 ESP:
(Re. Table 3, NCh203Of.2003)
2. Design forces
7-27
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
ii. 0.9D ± 1.1E, but the E term shall be amplified by 2.0, according to
NCh2369.Of 2003, 8.5.9; therefore the combination used is: 0.9D ±
2.2E.
𝑃𝑢 𝑖 = 833 𝑘𝑁 (Compression).
𝑃𝑢 𝑖𝑖 = −179 𝑘𝑁 (Tension).
𝑃𝑢
According to AISC 341-05, section 8.3, if > 0.4, without the consideration
𝜙 𝑐 𝑃𝑛
of the amplified seismic load, the required axial and tensile strength should
take into account the Ω0 factor on the load combinations given by the
applicable building code. In this case, the NCh2369.Of2003, has mandatorily
amplified the earthquake E term by a 2.0 factor, so it is not necessary to do
this check for determine the most stringent condition between these two codes.
Then:
𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑄 𝑖 = 833 𝑘𝑁 (Compression)
𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑄 𝑖𝑖 = −179 𝑘𝑁 (Tension)
Note that an axial net tensile load of one combination has been obtained,
considering the amplified seismic load. According to AISC 341-05 code, if
groove welds are used for the splice, the condition of having an available
strength of each flange splice at least of 0.5𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑓 (LRFD) is immediately OK.
In order to accomplish AISC 341-05, section 13.5; use 50% of the column
nominal strength 𝑀𝑛 . Suppose that the column reaches its plastic capacity
(𝑀𝑛 = 𝑀𝑝 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 = 801000 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚).
7-28
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Then
𝑀2 = 0.5𝑀𝑛 = 0.5𝑀𝑝 = 400500 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
iv. The 100% of 𝑀𝑛 (the column strength capacity is always larger than
𝑀𝑢 ) could be used for the design of this splice. This is recommendable
for a quick design in a design stage where splice locations are not
defined and the loads are not well known.
Using AISC 341-05, the lower and the upper column are the same, hence:
2𝑀𝑝𝑐 2𝑀𝑝𝑐
V2 = =
𝐻 𝐿𝑛
𝑀𝑝𝑐 = 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 = 801000 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
2𝑀𝑝𝑐
i. Note that 𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 = > 𝑉𝑢 = 𝑉 1 at the splice location and this condition
𝐿𝑛
meets the requirements of AISC 341-05 (see 8.4 comments of the
code). 𝑉𝑢 = 𝑉 1 is obtained according to NCh2369.Of2003.
7-29
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
3. Welds used
As said before, try CJP groove welds for splice webs and flanges.
Assume that the shear force is transferred completely by the web CJP weld
splice. Use weld access holes with a height of 2.0𝒕𝒘 =32 mm (comply with
recommendations of AISC 360-05, Section J1.6 and Chilean practice) and
depth equal to 25 mm.
For CJP groove welds subjected to shear force, according to AISC 360-05
Table J2.5, the strength of the joint is controlled by the base metal (web
metal). Therefore, according to AISC 360-05 section J4:
Shear yielding:
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-3)
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 1.0 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑤 = 0.6𝐹𝑦 𝑡𝑤 (𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑓 − 64 𝑚𝑚) = 566 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 433 𝑘𝑁 OK
Shear rupture:
(Re. AISC 360-05, Eq. J4-4)
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑛𝑣 = 0.6𝐹𝑢 𝑡𝑤 𝑑 − 2𝑡𝑓 − 64 𝑚𝑚 = 680 𝑘𝑁 > 𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 433 𝑘𝑁 OK
It has been assumed that the column sections are designed for the loads given
by NCh2369.Of2003 load combinations. Therefore the sections can resist
𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑄 𝑖 = −179 𝑘𝑁 (tension) and also 𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑄 𝑖 = 833 𝑘𝑁 (compression). CJP
groove welds are capable of developing 𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑄 𝑖 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑃𝑅𝐸𝑄 (𝑖𝑖). OK
Assume that the moment is taken entirely by the flanges of the columns,
therefore the required force on each one will be:
𝑀𝑅𝐸𝑄
𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = = 1232 𝑘𝑁
𝑑 − 𝑡𝑓
For CJP groove welds subjected to tension force normal to weld axis, according
to AISC 360-05 Table J2.5, the strength of the joint is controlled by the base
metal (flange metal). Therefore, according to AISC 360-05 section J4:
7-30
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Tensile yielding:
Tensile rupture:
From AISC 360-05 J2.6 section, for A250 ESP steel (similar to ASTM A36) a 70
ksi electrode can be used. The complete information for matching filler metals
for CJP groove welds subjected to tension normal to weld axis is given in AWS
D1.1. The filler metal must also comply with AISC 341-05 Seismic Provisions,
section 7.3.
Locate the center of the splice at 1.5 m from the top flange of the bottom
beam. The geometry of the access holes is shown on the following figure:
Upper Column
25mm
2,0 tw
Lower Column
CJP
Note: The radius must give a soft transition. Use R > 10mm
7-31
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
i. There are other (welded) solutions instead the one presented in this
example (CJP groove welds for web and flanges). For example, it is
possible to use a welded web plate for transferring the required
shear. Note that according to NCh2369.Of2003, if groove welds are
used; they shall be CJP type.
ii. Note that this type of solution for the column splice is not very
popular in seismic areas because it is a field welded connection. It is
preferable to use a bolted connection or a shop welded connection.
7-32
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
1. NCh2369.Of2003
2. AISC 341-05
General requirements:
(Re. 8.4, AISC 341-05)
- For PJP groove welds, the available strength shall at least equal to
200% the required strength.
7-33
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 7: COLUMN SPLICES
Note that according to AISC 341 Commentary, a CJP groove weld may
be considered as satisfying this previous requirement.
The centerline of the splice for column splices made with fillet welds
or PJP groove welds shall be located 1200 mm or more away from the
beam-to-column connection. When the column clear height between
beam-to-column connections is less than 2400 Mm, splices shall be
located at half the clear height.
For SMF systems: “Column splices must comply with the requirements
of section 8.4a. Where groove welds are used to make the splice,
they shall be CJP type and must comply with the requirements of
section 7.3b. Weld tabs shall be removed. When column splices are
not made with CJP welds, they shall have a required flexural strength
of 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 (LRFD) or 𝑅𝑦 𝐹𝑦 𝑍𝑥 /1.5 (ASD), as appropriate, of the smaller
column. The required shear strength of column web splices, shall be
at least equal to 𝑀𝑝𝑐 /𝐻 (LRFD) or 𝑀𝑝𝑐 /1.5𝐻 (ASD), as appropriate,
where 𝑀𝑝𝑐 is the sum of nominal plastic flexural strengths of the
column above and below the splice”.
The design procedure for this column splice is the same shown in example 7.3.
In this example, the difference is only in the design forces between SMF
systems (more stringent design moments from AISC 341-05) in comparison
with SCBF systems, because in SMF systems the columns resist bigger
moments especially due to earthquake action. Refer to example 7.3 for the
design procedure of a general welded column splice.
7-34
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
8. BEAM SPLICES
8.1. Beam Parallel Splice – All Bolted Splice Plates
1. NCh2369.Of2003
2. AISC 341
3. AISC 360
Tip:
(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, chapter 12).
8-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Some authors recommend design for at least 50% of the member capacity
(0.5𝜙𝑀𝑝 and 0.5𝜙𝑉𝑝 ), but always check that the design forces are larger than
𝑀𝑢 and 𝑉𝑢 from load combinations.
8.1.b. Example
Design the connection of the all bolted beam splice shown in Figures 8.1-1 and
8.1-2. Use A345 ESP steel, required for constructions subjected to dynamical
loading, according to NCh203.Of2006 code, Table 3.
Both beams are Chilean H450 x 200 x 112.7 built-up sections. Use standard
holes for bolts. Suppose that the beams have been properly designed for
resisting the forces given by the load combinations of the applicable building
code (including seismic load). These loads, at the location of the splice, are:
Suppose that the splice location has been defined previously (many factors
affect the location of beam splices, such as the length of the members limited
by the transportation, or by the capacity of the assembly equipment).
8-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
b1
t1
t2
b2 b2
b3
t3
A345 ESP:
(Re. Table 3, NCh203.Of.2003)
BOLTS: ASTM A490, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes.
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎, 𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎
2. Design Forces
Use conservatively the total capacity of the beam for the shear force and
moment. Assume that the section reaches the plastic capacity. Therefore:
Note that these design forces are meeting the requirements of AISC360-05
code, J6 section. This is because always 𝜙𝑉𝑝 > 𝑉𝑢 and 𝜙𝑀𝑝 > 𝑀𝑢 . 𝑉𝑢 and 𝑀𝑢 are
8-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
obtained from the applicable building code load combination; in this case,
NCh2369.Of2003.
Assume that the shear is completely transferred by the web plates, and that
the moment is completely transferred by the flanges, with a couple of tension
and compression forces.
Tip:
If there is also axial force acting on the beam (neglected in this example), it
should be divided, according to a relative areas principle, among the flanges
and web. A common assumption is that flanges also carry the entire axial load.
Tip:
It is always preferable the use of 2 identical web plates at each side of the
beam’s web, because with this, a symmetrical distribution of shear force in the
plane of the beam web is obtained, the bolts are subjected to double shear
and therefore it is possible to reduce the number of bolts in the connection and
the inherent eccentricity out of the plane.
𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 745 𝑘𝑁
Web bolts:
Try M24 bolts. Try 𝑵𝑩 = 9 bolts, and 𝑵𝑹 = 3 rows. Number of bolts per row:
𝒏 = 3.Place the bolts:𝑒1 = 80 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒2 = 120 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒3 = 45 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒4 = 50 𝑚𝑚. Then, the
web plate dimensions are:
8-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
e4
A
e2
y
b3 V
req
x
e2
e4
e3 e1 e1 e3
Figure 8.1-3: Bolts positions on the web plate. Bolt A has the larger load.
Suppose a gap between the two parts of the connected beam 𝒈 = 𝟓 𝒎𝒎. Using
the midline of the gap, the distance from the line of action of 𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 to the center
𝑔
of gravity of the arrangement of bolts is 𝑒𝑥 = + 𝑒3 + 𝑒1 = 127.5 𝑚𝑚. Use the
2
classical method (elastic) for the analysis of the eccentric shear bolted
connection.
𝑃𝑥 = 0 𝑘𝑁
𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄
𝑃𝑦 = = 373 𝑘𝑁
2
𝑀0 = 𝑃𝑦 𝑒𝑥 = 47507 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
𝑟𝑖2 = 𝑥𝑖2 + 𝑦𝑖2 = 124800 𝑚𝑚2
𝑃𝑥 𝑀0 𝑦𝑖
𝑅𝑥𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = + = 46 𝑘𝑁
𝑁𝐵 𝑟𝑖2
𝑃𝑦 𝑀0 𝑥𝑖
𝑅𝑦𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = + = 72 𝑘𝑁
𝑁𝐵 𝑟𝑖2
2 2
𝑅𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 𝑅𝑥𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 + 𝑅𝑦𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 85 𝑘𝑁
8-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Bolts check:
For conservative calculations, use for slip-critical connection type check, class
A surface (𝜇 = 0.35), and for bearing type connections, consider threads
included in the shear plane.
Therefore:
𝑘𝑁 𝑘𝑁
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 86 > 𝑅𝑖𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 84 OK
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡 𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
Note:
It is not an obligation to do the slip critical connection check in bolted connections.
If it is desired to have a rigid connection, slip critical check is recommended. In
this example, we will follow the design with the number of bolts obtained from the
slip critical check.
𝑘𝑁
𝑅𝑛 = 2.4𝑑𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 207
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
𝑘𝑁 𝑘𝑁
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 155 > 84 OK
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡 𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
8-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
For single shear on the most loaded bolt, check the following:
𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄
= 373 𝑘𝑁
2
8-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Use inner and outer flange plates. The force 𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 will be divided according
to a relative area principle.
Try the following dimensions for the flange cover plates:
Tip:
In small beam sections, typically with one flange (outer) plate, it is possible to
transfer the required flexural strength. In this case, it has been decided to use
100% of the element capacity, leading to the use of two flange plates (outer
and inner plates). With this configuration, the number of bolts is reduced
because they are subjected to double shear.
𝑖𝑛𝑛𝑒𝑟 2𝐴𝑔2
Forces on the inner plates (for both plates): 𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 818 𝑘𝑁
𝐴𝑔1 +2𝐴𝑔2
𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝐴𝑔1
Force on the outer plate: 𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 1150 𝑘𝑁
𝐴𝑔1 +2𝐴𝑔2
Note that the forces on the outer plate are greater than the forces on the inner
plate (therefore, use the force on the outer plate for the different checks).
Flange bolts
Check the shear on the connections as friction type and also bearing type
connections. Try M24, ASTM A490 bolts.
8-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Therefore:
𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑟
𝑘𝑁 𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 86 → 𝑁𝐵 = = 13.37 .Use 𝑵𝑩 = 𝟏𝟒 bolts in 𝑵𝑹 = 2 rows. (Number of
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡 𝜙𝑅𝑛
bolts per row 𝑛 = 7 bolts).
Note:
It is not an obligation to do the slip critical connection check in bolted connections.
If it is desired to have a rigid connection, slip critical check is recommended. In
this example, we will follow the design with the number of bolts obtained from the
slip critical check.
For single shear on bolts, use the maximum shear force (between inner or
𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑟
outer flange plates):𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄
Check the following:
𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑟
𝜙𝐹𝑛𝑣 𝐴𝑏 𝑁𝐵 ≥ 𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 , 𝜙 = 0.75 (LRFD) (Re. AISC360-05, J3.6)
𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑟
𝐹𝑛𝑣 𝐴𝑏 𝑁𝐵 = 1967 𝑘𝑁 ≥ 𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 1150 𝑘𝑁 OK
𝑘𝑁
𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 ≤ 2.4𝑑𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 622
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J3-6a)
Use 𝝓=0.75, 𝑳𝒄 =clear distance in the direction of the applied force, between
the edge of the hole and the edge of the adjacent hole or edge of the plate,
𝑡 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛(𝑡𝑓 , 𝑡1 , 𝑡2 ) = 24 𝑚𝑚, 𝑭𝒖 = 450 𝑀𝑃𝑎, 𝒅=nominal bolt diameter = 24 mm.
Try:
𝑒1 = 75 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒2 = 120 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒3 = 40 𝑚𝑚, 𝑒4 = 40 𝑚𝑚
8-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
b1
e2
e3
6 @ e1
e3
g
b2 b2
tw e4 e4
Edge bolts:
27 𝑘𝑁
𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒3 − = 31.5 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡 𝐹𝑢 = 408
2 𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
Interior bolts:
𝑘𝑁
𝐿𝑐 = 𝑒1 − 27 = 48 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡 𝐹𝑢 = 622
𝑏𝑜𝑙𝑡
Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M24 is 27 mm. See
AISC360-05, table J3.3M.
Inner plates: (2PL) 𝑏2 = 80 𝑚𝑚, 𝑡2 = 24 𝑚𝑚, 𝐴𝑔2 = 1920 𝑚𝑚2 , 𝐿2 = 𝑔 + 2(6𝑒1 + 2𝑒3 ) =
1085 𝑚𝑚
8-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Tensile force:
𝑖𝑛𝑛𝑒𝑟
𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 /2 = 408 𝑘𝑁 (Per each one of the inner plates)
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-2)
6 @ e1
T
Figure 8.1-5: Block shear for inner flange plates.
8-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Compressive force
𝑖𝑛𝑛𝑒𝑟
𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 /2 = 408 𝑘𝑁 (Per each one of the inner plates)
𝑏2 𝑡 23
𝐼 12 𝑘𝐿
𝑟𝑀𝐼𝑁 = = = 6.93 𝑚𝑚 → = 12.26 < 25 → 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝐶. 𝐽
𝐴 𝑏2 𝑡2 𝑟𝑀𝐼𝑁
𝜙𝑃𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 596 𝑘𝑁 > 408 𝑘𝑁 OK
Tensile force:
𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑟
𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 1150 𝑘𝑁 (On the outer plate)
𝜙𝑅𝑛 = 0.75𝐹𝑢 𝐴𝑒
(Re. AISC360-05, Eq. J4-2)
8-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
e3
6 @ e1
Compressive force
𝑜𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑟
𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 1150 𝑘𝑁 (On the outer plate)
𝑏1 𝑡 13
𝐼 12 𝑘𝐿
𝑟𝑀𝐼𝑁 = = = 7.79 𝑚𝑚 → = 10.9 < 25 → 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝐶. 𝐽
𝐴 𝑏1 𝑡1 𝑟𝑀𝐼𝑁
𝜙𝑃𝑛 = 0.9𝐹𝑦 𝐴𝑔 = 1677 𝑘𝑁 > 1150 𝑘𝑁 OK
8-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Symmetrical connection
2 PL 340x505x8 A - A section
18 M24 A
Same connection
on the top flange
A
2PL 80x1085x24 28 M24
1PL 200x1085x27 BOLTS: ASTM A490
Note:
The designer should note that bolt holes in flanges (and web) may prohibit the
development of a full strength connection at that point. In the example done,
it has been assumed that the forces are obtained from the beam full capacity
(conservative assumption).
On AISC360-05 Manual, Section G8: Beam and Girders with web openings:
The effect of web openings on the nominal shear strength of steel and
composite beams shall be calculated (there is a reduction on web area 𝐴𝑤 ).
Adequate reinforcement shall be provided when the required strength exceeds
the available strength of the member at the opening.
8-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
1. NCh2369.Of2003
2. AISC 341
3. AISC 360
Tip:
(Re. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, chapter 12).
8-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Notes:
For ductile limit states, 𝜙𝑑 = 1.0. For non-ductile limit states, 𝜙𝑛 = 0.9.
Welding Requirements:
Filler metals and welding procedures shall meet the requirements of section
7.3 and Appendix W of the AISC341-05 code.
For “Backing at beam to column and Continuity plate to column joint”, see
AISC358-05, section 3.3.
Bolts Requirements:
Use only ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts, and they shall be pretensioned high
strength type. (Re. AISC 358-05, 4.1)
8.2.b. Example
Design a bolted extended and unstiffened end plate moment splice for the
beam connection shown in Figure 8.2-1. Use A345 ESP steel, required for
constructions subjected to dynamical loading, according to NCh203.Of2006
code, Table 3.
Both beams are Chilean H500 x 200 x 85.7 built-up sections. Use standard
holes for bolts. Suppose that the beams have been properly designed for
resisting the forces given by the load combinations of the applicable building
8-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
code (including seismic load) and that the sections are compatible with
AISC341 requirements. These loads, at the location of the splice, are:
Suppose that the splice location has been previously defined. Many factors
affect the location of beam splices, such as the length of the members, limited
by transportation issues; or by the capacity of the assembly equipment).
Tip:
8-17
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
A345 ESP:
(Re. Table 3, NCh203.Of.2003)
BOLTS: ASTM A490 Bolts, threads included in the shear planes, STD holes.
𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎, 𝐹𝑛𝑣 = 414 𝑀𝑃𝑎
2. Design Forces
Conservatively, use the total capacity of the beam for the shear force and
moment. Assume that the section can reach the plastic capacity.
Tip:
Note that these design forces meet the requirements of AISC360-05 code, J6
section. This is because always 𝜙𝑉𝑝 > 𝑉𝑢 and 𝜙𝑀𝑝 > 𝑀𝑢 . 𝑉𝑢 and 𝑀𝑢 are obtained
from the applicable building code load combination; in this case,
NCh2369.Of2003. Even though both of the limit states for calculating the
design forces are ductile, the strength reduction factors 𝜙 are not related with
𝜙𝑑 and 𝜙𝑛 shown above; they are related with the factors of AISC 360-05
Specification.
Assume that the shear is completely transferred by the bolts of the end plates,
and that the moment is completely transferred by the flanges, with a couple of
tension and compression forces.
𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 828 𝑘𝑁
8-18
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
𝑀𝑅𝐸𝑄
𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = = 1395 𝑘𝑁
𝑑 − 𝑡𝑓
Tip:
If there is also axial force acting on the beam (neglected in this example), it
should be divided according a relative areas principle, among the flanges and
the web. A common assumption is that the flanges also carry the entire axial
load.
3. Design procedure
Try a 4 bolt, unstiffened extended end plate for splicing the two parallel
beams, shown in Figure 8.2-1.
Prequalification limits:
(Re. AISC358, Supplement N°1 (2009); Table 6.1)
The minimum and maximum values of the several parameters for the design
of these connections are shown now (the notation of AISC358 is presented):
8-19
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
bbf
g
bp
t wb
t fb
de Pfo
Pfi
tp
d
Figure 8.2-2: Notation (used on AISC 358-05) for the extended end plate
beam moment splice. Adapted from AISC358-05, Fig. 6.2.
Beam Limitations:
(Re. AISC358-05, section 6.4)
See also 6.4.5 (Clear span to depth ratio), 6.4.7 (Lateral Bracing) and 6.4.8
(Protected Zone) on AISC358-05.
Pitch Distances:
(Re. AISC358-05, Section 6.9.2)
8-20
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Welding Details:
(Re. AISC358-05, Section 6.9.7)
Beam web to end-plate joint shall be made using fillet welds or CJP groove
welds. When fillet welds are used, they shall be designed to develop the full
strength of the web in tension, from the inside face of the flange to 150 mm
beyond the bolt row farthest from the beam flange.
The beam flange to end-plate joint shall be made using a CJP groove weld
without backing. The CJP groove weld shall be made such that the root of the
weld is on the beam web side of the flange. The inside face of the flange shall
have a 8-mm fillet weld. These welds shall be demand critical.
Backgouging of the root is not required in the flange directly above and below
the beam web for a length equal to 1.5𝑘1 . A full-depth PJP groove weld shall be
permitted at this location.
4. Design steps
For this connection, do not follow the step (1) presented on AISC358 code.
Use the values calculated above.
𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 828 𝑘𝑁
𝑀𝑅𝐸𝑄 = 672543 𝑘𝑁 − 𝑚𝑚
Select the option for the extended end plate moment connection and
establish preliminary values for the connection geometry and bolt
grade.
8-21
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Where: 𝑀𝑓 = 𝑀𝑅𝐸𝑄 , 𝐹𝑛𝑡 = 780 𝑀𝑃𝑎 for ASTM A490 bolts, 𝜙𝑛 = 0.9, 𝑖 =distance
from the centerline of the compression flange to the ith tension bolt row. In
this case, the connection is symmetric (because 𝑀𝑓 could be positive or
negative, according to the seismic loading). Therefore:
2Pt
Mnp
h0
h1
8-22
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
1.11𝑀𝑓
𝑡𝑝𝑅𝐸𝑄 =
𝜙𝑑 𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑌𝑝
(Re. AISC358, Eq. 6.9-8)
Where: 𝑀𝑓 = 𝑀𝑅𝐸𝑄 , 𝐹𝑦𝑝 = 345 𝑀𝑃𝑎 (minimum yield stress for the end plate),
𝜙𝑑 = 1.0.
de
pfo
t bf
pfi
s
h0 t bw
h1
Figure 8.2-4: Yield Line Pattern Model. Adapted from AISC 358-05, Table 6.2.
𝑏𝑝 1 1 1 1 2
𝑌𝑝 = + + 0 − + 1 (𝑝𝑓𝑖 + 𝑠)
2 1 𝑝𝑓𝑖 𝑠 𝑝𝑓𝑜 2 𝑔
1
𝑠= 𝑏𝑝 𝑔 = 89 𝑚𝑚 (Note that if 𝑝𝑓𝑖 > 𝑠 → 𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑝𝑓𝑖 = 𝑠)
2
8-23
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
Tip:
It is prudent to check also the “prying” effect. According to the AISC Design
Guide N°4, if the applied force is less than 90% of the end-plate strength
(calculated using the yield line analysis), the end-plate is considered to be
“thick”, and no prying forces are considered. When the applied load is greater
than ninety percent of the end plate strength, the end plate is considered to be
“thin”, and the prying forces are assumed to be at a maximum. For
conservative plate thickness design, assume that no prying force occurs,
therefore:
1.11𝑀𝑛𝑝
𝑡𝑝𝑅𝐸𝑄 =
𝜙𝑑 𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑌𝑝
Calculations give:
𝑀𝑓
𝐹𝑓𝑢 = 𝑅𝑅𝐸𝑄 = = 1395 𝑘𝑁
𝑑 − 𝑡𝑏𝑓
(Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-9)
𝐹𝑓𝑢
< 𝜙𝑑 𝑅𝑛 = 𝜙𝑑 0.6𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑏𝑝 𝑡𝑝
2
(Re. AISC 358, Eq. 6.9-10)
𝐹𝑓𝑢
𝜙𝑑 0.6𝐹𝑦𝑝 𝑏𝑝 𝑡𝑝 = 1397 𝑘𝑁 > = 698 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
8-24
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
If the previous equation is not satisfied, increase the end plate thickness until
it is satisfied. In this case, there is no need of increasing 𝑡𝑝 . OK
𝐹𝑓𝑢
< 𝜙𝑛 𝑅𝑛 = 𝜙𝑛 0.6𝐹𝑢𝑝 𝐴𝑛
2
(Re. AISC358-05, Eq.6.9-11)
Calculations give:
𝐹𝑓𝑢
𝜙𝑛 0.6𝐹𝑢𝑝 𝐴𝑛 = 1200 𝑘𝑁 > = 698 𝑘𝑁 OK
2
If the previous equation is not satisfied, increase the end plate thickness until
it is satisfied. In this case there is no need of increasing 𝑡𝑝 . OK
𝑉𝑢 = 𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 < 𝜙𝑛 𝑅𝑛 = 𝜙𝑛 𝑛𝑏 𝐹𝑣 𝐴𝑏
(Re. AISC358-05, Eq. 6.9-15)
8-25
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
𝑟𝑛𝑖 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 ≤ 2. 4𝑑𝑏 𝑡𝐹𝑢 for each inner bolt and 𝑟𝑛𝑜 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 ≤ 2.4𝑑𝑏 𝑡𝐹𝑢 for each
outer bolt. The upper limit is 2.4𝑑𝑏 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 875 𝑘𝑁
Inner bolts:
Outer bolts:
30
𝐿 𝑐 = 𝑑𝑒 − = 45 𝑚𝑚 → 𝑅𝑛 = 1.2𝐿𝑐 𝑡𝐹𝑢 = 729 𝑘𝑁
2
Note: The diameter of the standard hole for the bolt M27 is 30 mm. See
AISC360-05, table J3.3M.
Design the flange to end-plate and web to end-plate welds, using the
requirements of section 6.9.7 of the AISC358-05 code.
Use CJP groove welds. The inside face of the flange shall have an 8-mm fillet
weld.
Use fillet welds, E70 electrode. For a 30 mm thick end-plate, the minimum
weld size is 8 mm according to AISC360-05, table J2.4.
The weld required to develop the bending stress on the beam web, near the
tension bolts, is (according to AISC Design Guide # 4):
0.6𝐹𝑦𝑏 𝑡𝑤𝑏
𝑡𝑤 ≥ = 4.04 𝑚𝑚
2 × 0.707𝐹𝑤
With 𝐹𝑦𝑏 = 345 MPa (beam yield stress), 𝑡𝑤𝑏 = 8 mm (beam web thickness).
8-26
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
The weld size required for resisting the shear 𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄 between the beam and the
end-plate is:
𝑉𝑅𝐸𝑄
𝑡𝑤 ≥ = 8.72
2 × 0.707𝐹𝑤 𝐿𝑣
(Re. AISC Design Guide # 4 and AISC Manual of Steel of Construction 13th
Ed.).
A A - A section
Web CJP
CJP Web
A 2PL 740x225x30
8-27
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 8: BEAM SPLICES
8.2.d. References
8-28
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
9. STOPPERS
9.1. Up-lift Clamps
Up-lift clamps are intended for systems of mobile equipment over rails with
wheels (for example cranes), as in Figure 9.1-1. The objective of the up-lift
clamps is to prevent falling of the equipment produced by the lifting of it due
to the action of vertical seismic forces. The design of the up-lift clamp is done
only to stand the vertical seismic forces of the equipment or by the use of
minimum up-lift forces, which are provided by the project specifications. Either
case considered, there is no need to consider loads in any other direction.
For the design of the up-lift clamps there are no specific provisions in the
Chilean code nor in international codes, but, since up-lift clamps are intended
to avoid up-lift of equipment with wheels over rails, the design of these
devices shall be done according to the seismic vertical forces obtained for the
design of support of equipment (Refer to chapter 10, section 10.1 of this
Manual for the calculation of seismic forces on equipment).
𝐹𝑣 = 𝐶𝑣 𝑊𝑒
9-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
Where 𝑊𝑒 is the weight of the equipment over the rail, including overloads. If
there are mobile loads acting over the equipment (the case of cranes), it is
important to consider the most adverse position of this load for the location of
the up-lift clamp in consideration. However, the probability of having an
earthquake at the maximum operation loads are acting is minimum, and
therefore a minimum operation load, provided by the project specifications
should be considered.
An elastic design of the up-lift clamp should be considered, not taking into
account the possible ductile behavior of the element. Therefore, for the
calculation of the vertical seismic coefficient, 𝐶𝑣 , the response modification
factor to obtain 𝐶𝑣 must be equal to 1.0.
As was said above, up-lift clamps must be designed only for vertical forces. To
consider this, it is required to take into account the general disposition of the
up-lift clamp. An example is shown in Figure 9.1-2:
Lifting forces acting on the equipment can induce collision between the bottom
part of the up-lift clamp (the hook) and the element of the substructure of the
9-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
equipment to which the rail is attached. Thus, the hook of the up-lift clamp is
subjected to a force equal to the lifting force of the equipment.
For the design, the interaction between the stresses produced by the axial load
(corresponding to the vertical seismic load) and the bending moment on
section A-A (see Figure 9.1-3) must be verified. The bending moment is
produced by the vertical seismic load that it is applied at a distance 𝑑 from the
center of the section A-A.
Figure 9.1-3: Specifications to obtain moment and axial force on the up-lift
clamp.
𝐶𝑣 𝑊𝑒
𝐹= (axial force on A-A section)
𝑛 𝑢𝑐
𝐶𝑣 𝑊𝑒
𝑀= 𝑑 (bending moment on A-A section)
𝑛 𝑢𝑐
If 𝐴 is the area of the section A-A and 𝑆 the elastic modulus, the stresses are:
Bending Stress
𝑀
𝜎𝑏 =
𝑆
Axial Stress
𝐹
𝜎𝑎 =
𝐴
9-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
𝜎𝑏 ≤ 𝜎𝑏𝑎𝑑𝑚
𝜎𝑎 ≤ 𝜎𝑎𝑎𝑑𝑚
𝜎𝑎 𝜎𝑏
+ ≤ 1.0
𝜎𝑎𝑎𝑑𝑚 𝜎𝑏𝑎𝑑𝑚
Also, for up-lift clamps that touch stoppers connected to concrete (see Figure
9.1-1), it is important to leave enough space to properly install the adhesive
anchor bolts and develop the ultimate force on concrete, the prying action on
the stoppers as needed and the interference between the head of the anchor
bolts and the up-lift clamp.
9-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
Unfortunately, there are no clear provisions on Chilean codes for the support
of equipment and, additionally, stopper systems differ from one equipment to
the others, so engineers must take special care in the design process and
adapt to each particular situation. One problem found on the February 27 th
Chile earthquake was the damage of several nonstructural components (for
example, mechanical equipment) due to the poor design of their supports and
the lack of specific requirements for this design (some provisions are found on
NCh2369.Of2003 and NCh433.Of2009).
9.2.b.1. Anchorage
When seismic stoppers that are anchored to concrete are needed, refer to
dispositions of section 8.6 of the NCh2369.Of2003 code.
9-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
9-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
Section 11.5.1: Pipe systems and ducts of large dimensions shall be equipped
with expansion joints and supports that warrant their seismic stability and that
simultaneously allow for thermal deformations.
Between the thrust rollers and the rims, a free space shall be left in order to
facilitate the operation. The design of the rim and the rollers must consider the
possibility of longitudinal impact when this free space is closed. It is allowed to
design the rollers and their mechanisms as sacrifice elements that can fail
during an earthquake; in this case the manufacturer must provide detailed
repair instructions in a reduced time to prevent damages of the kiln in the
cooling process.
9-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
Figure 9.2-2: Typical details of kilns and rotatory dryers. Taken from
NCh2369.Of2003, Figure A.11.
9-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
According to ASCE7-10 code, the transfer of the seismic inertial forces shall be
such that a continuous load path of sufficient strength and stiffness between
the component and the supporting structure shall be provided. Local elements
of the structure, including connections, shall be designed and constructed for
the component forces that control the design of the elements or their
connections.
The idea is that if damage due to the control of large seismic displacements is
expected at the stoppers, then they shall be easily replaceable elements
(stoppers are “seismic fuses”). For example, for the February 27th earthquake,
some boiler stoppers were subjected to inelastic behavior and they dissipated
a large amount of energy, which is very good according to the seismic design
philosophy. If stoppers were not reparable or inspectable, their design should
be done considering larger seismic forces (for example using a smaller R
reduction factor than the value used for the design of steel members).
9-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
Other general requirements for support of equipment are listed on section 13.6
of ASCE 7-10 (Mechanical and Electrical Components).
This document has some examples of typical causes of damage and the
corresponding seismic protective measures for nonstructural components
(mechanical, electrical and plumbing components) on chapter 6, section 6.4. It
may be in the reader’s interest to study those examples of risk mitigation for
different equipment or piping.
In FEMA E-74 document, in the Pressure Piping Section (6.4.3), Floor Mounted
Supports Subsection (6.4.3.5), there are several examples of damage of
piping and adjacent supports due to poor seismic restraint. A picture is
presented below:
Figure 9.2-3: Damage to piping, stud wall and finishes due to movement of
poorly restrained floor-mounted piping in the 1994 magnitude-6.7 Northridge
Earthquake. Taken from FEMA E-74, Figure 6.4.3.5-2.
9-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
Another example is the use of guide plates as part of the supporting structure
for pipes. These guide plates slide in one direction and hold the pipe on the
perpendicular direction. As pipes may be subjected to thermal expansion,
principally on the longitudinal direction due to their length, stoppers and
support structures must accommodate these movements, but limit the seismic
movements of the pipe in order to avoid damage.
9-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
9-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
Boiler can be roughly described as a large suspended mass hanging from the
“roof” of the boiler supporting structure. Stoppers connect the boiler with
lateral resisting frames in order to restrain seismic displacements in the
horizontal plane (lateral motion of the boiler). They are designed to provide
energy dissipation through nonlinear behavior when large seismic events
occur. Therefore, stoppers transmit those inertia lateral forces to the structure
and they are expected to be “seismic fuses”, in a way that they can easily
reach plastic behavior and therefore they should be easy replaceable
elements.
The complete system that restrains the lateral movement between the boiler
and the support structure is composed of guideposts (supporting columns),
buckstays (beams pararallel to boiler casing) and the stoppers. Stoppers are
fixed to buckstays and they have a restraint with the guideposts on the
corresponding lateral direction.
9-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
Figure 9.2-6: Seismic stoppers damage details. (a) General view, 2 levels. (b)
Detail of Damage at buckstay connection. Taken from EQCO Report: NVTS
Boiler System – Damage Report.
If ductile behavior is expected on the load path of the seismic loads due to the
inertial forces coming from the boiler, stoppers are the appropriate elements
to dissipate energy. The recommended design procedure of the stoppers, their
connections and surrounding elements should be the following:
a) Design the stopper with the loads obtained from analysis (integrated
model). If the stopper cannot be easily replaced, use R=1.
b) Compute capacity of the stopper.
c) Use the capacity of the stopper as the forces to design the guide post, the
buckstays and all the connections between the different elements. Therefore,
9-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
all the other elements connected to the stoppers shall be at least capable to
transfer this load.
9.2.d. References
9-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 9: STOPPERS
9-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
In this section we will discuss the provisions for calculation of seismic forces
acting on equipment as defined in the Chilean Seismic Code for Industrial
Structures, NCh2369.Of2003.
For the calculation of the design force, the code establishes several
alternatives, according to the mathematical model of the structure.
𝑄𝑝 𝑅1
𝐹𝑝 = 1.2 < 𝑃𝑝 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-1)
𝑅𝑝
10-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Where:
𝑄𝑝 : Shear force in the base of the equipment or secondary structure,
according to the structural analysis of the building, including seismic
forces reduced by the R factor defined in NCh2369.Of2003.
𝑄𝑜 𝑄𝑜
𝑅1 = 𝑅 if <1
𝑄𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑄𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑄𝑜
𝑅1 = 𝑅 if >1
𝑄𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑄𝑜
𝑅1 = 0.5𝑅 if < 0.5
𝑄𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑄𝑜 is the shear force on the base of the structure and 𝑄𝑚𝑖𝑛 is the minimum
value for the base shear force, established in section 5.4.5 of the code.
𝑃𝑝 : Corresponds to the weight of the equipment.
𝑅𝑝 : Response modification factor taken from table 7.1 of the code:
- Storage Racks
4
- Secondary structures
10-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
For the case of elastic behavior, 𝑅𝑝 can be used as 1.0. The values of the table
7-1 of the NCh2369.Of2003 Chilean code are maximum values; some cases
may require lower values.
Also, the reason for including the factor 𝑅1 /𝑅𝑝 is to change the response
modification factor for the design of the equipment from 𝑅 to 𝑅𝑝 .
The decision of considering or not the effect of the equipment on the structure
depends of the influence that the equipment produces on the response of the
building. There is influence of the equipment on the response if the stiffness or
the inertia of the equipment is determinant for the behavior of the whole
structure or for a local part of it. So, even if the stiffness and inertia of the
equipment are small in comparison with the whole structure, if they influence
locally in the structure, then they have to be included in the building model.
(Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section C5.3.1.5).
Unfortunately, the code does not give any guidance for this purpose and only
establishes the fact that it must be considered (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section
5.3.1.5).
𝑎 𝑝 𝐾𝑝
𝐹𝑝 = 3.0 𝑃𝑝 < 𝑃𝑝 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-2)
𝑅𝑝
Where 𝑅𝑝 and 𝑃𝑝 were defined in the previous section. Note that values for this
equation are different for each direction of analysis.
10-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
- If 𝑇𝑝 and 𝑇 ∗ are known, (𝑇 ∗ corresponds to the period that has the highest
equivalent translational mass in the direction of analysis) in which the
secondary element may enter in resonance. 𝑇 ∗ cannot be less than 0.06
seconds for the calculations shown:
0.5
𝐾𝑝 = 0.5 + (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-4)
1−𝛽 2 + 0.3𝛽 2 2
Where:
𝛽=1 if 0.8𝑇 ∗ ≤ 𝑇𝑝 ≤ 1.1𝑇 ∗
𝑇𝑃
𝛽 = 1.25 if 𝑇𝑝 < 0.8𝑇 ∗
𝑇∗
𝑇𝑝
𝛽 = 0.91 if 𝑇𝑝 > 1.1𝑇 ∗
𝑇∗
b) When a modal dynamic analysis of the building has not been done, the
horizontal seismic force can be calculated as:
𝑎 𝑘 𝐾𝑝
𝐹𝑝 = 0.7 𝑃𝑝 < 𝑃𝑝 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-5)
𝑅𝑝
Finally, for the calculation of the horizontal force, the value of 𝑎𝑘 is needed,
which, in this case, has not being obtained from a modal dynamic analysis of
the structure without considering the equipment mass on the main structure,
so use the following expression that the Chilean code recommends:
𝐴0 𝑍𝑘
𝑎𝑘 = 1+3 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 7-6)
𝑔 𝐻
10-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
𝐴0
𝑎𝑘 = 4
𝑔
The expressions of ASCE 7 could also be used to define the horizontal seismic
force for equipments.
0.4 𝑎 𝑝 𝑆𝐷𝑆 𝑊𝑝 𝑧
𝐹𝑝 = 𝑅𝑝 1+2 (Re. ASCE 7 Equation 13.3-1)
ℎ
𝐼𝑝
Where 𝑎𝑝 is the component amplification factor, which varies from 1.0 to 2.5
(for the selection of this value, see tables 13.5-1 or 13.6-1 of ASCE 7); 𝑆𝐷𝑆 is
the short period spectral response acceleration, which is defined in section
11.4 of ASCE 7; 𝐼𝑝 is the importance factor, which varies from 1.0 to 1.5; 𝑊𝑝 is
the operating weight of the equipment; 𝑅𝑝 is the response modification factor
for the equipment, which varies from 1 to 12; 𝑧 is the height of the point of
attachment between the equipment and the structure; and ℎ is the height of
the structure with respect the base.
ASCE 7 considers the height of the structure ℎ as the average roof height with
respect to the base level.
10-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
0.8𝐴0 𝑃𝑝
𝐹𝑝𝑚𝑖𝑛 = (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 7.2.5)
𝑔
If the structure and the equipment have been integrated in the same model,
which considers satisfactorily the interaction between the building and the
equipment and the dynamical properties of the equipment, there is no need of
using sections 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 of the NCh2369. Of2003.
10-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Then, the vertical seismic force for the support of the equipment is:
𝐹𝑣𝑝 = 𝐶𝑣 𝑃𝑝
The seismic coefficient for the cases that fall on the category of the section
5.1.1a of the code is also of our interest since in those cases the suspension
bars and support elements for equipment (in the case of hanged equipment)
can be included. In those cases the seismic coefficient can be obtained from:
𝐴0
𝐶𝑣 = (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 5.5.1a)
𝑃
And the vertical seismic force must be calculated according to the following
expression:
𝐹𝑣 = ±𝐶𝑣 𝐼𝑃
Where 𝑃 is the sum of the permanent loads and live loads on the support and 𝐼
is the importance coefficient which is defined according to the 4.3.1 and 4.3.2
of the NCh2369.Of2003.
In the case of equipment directly supported to the ground, and also if the
equipment is sufficiently stiff and robust (this considers a fundamental period
for the equipment less than 0.06 seconds, including the effects of the
connection to the respective foundation), it is possible to design using a static
analysis, with forces obtained from the following seismic coefficients:
10-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
𝐴0
𝐶ℎ = 0.7 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 5.6)
𝑔
𝐴0
𝐶𝑣 = 0.5 (Re. NCh2369.Of2003 section 5.6)
𝑔
𝐹𝑝ℎ = 𝐶ℎ 𝑃𝑝
𝐹𝑝𝑣 = 𝐶𝑣 𝑃𝑝
Also, it can be possible to calculate seismic forces with the same input as if the
equipment/secondary structure were a main structure on the ground.
Future provisions that will be used in Chile, (based on ASCE 7 code) are the
MINVU NTM 001-2010 for the seismic design of nonstructural components. It
has other expressions (but similar) than those presented on this section for
the calculation of seismic forces on equipment, and with detail in the
calculation procedure.
10.1.e. References
10-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
For designing the anchorage of the skids it is important to take note of the
following tips:
The design loads for the equipment can be calculated using section
10.1 of this Manual (or similar reasonable provisions). Note that it is
important to do a review of the equipment drawing (from vendor) and
define values of some important parameters like: plan dimension of
the equipment base frame; height of the equipment; location, size,
and embedment length of the anchor bolts; weight of the equipment
(distinguish between operating and non-operating conditions); and
location of the center of gravity of the equipment (where design
forces are applied). It is also important to take into account any other
forces due to the interaction with other components (for example,
with pipes attached to the equipment).
10-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Design forces from load combinations shall be used to check the skid
beams, the anchorage of these skids and the supporting structural
element. Note that the skids for the equipment must have enough
strength and stiffness to resist those forces and minimize
deformations that could be dangerous for the mounted equipment. If
needed, stiffeners may be added to transfer large loads.
Note that if bolts are under tension, then the prying effect usually needs to be
considered to calculate the required thickness of the skid flange and the bolt
diameter, so there is sufficient stiffness and strength in the connecting
elements and in the bolts. A reference for this topic is the AISC Manual of
Steel Construction (13th Ed.), Chapter 9: “Design of Connecting Elements”.
Prying action calculations have been made for other examples of this Manual.
If ductility is needed on the anchor bolts (when there are large seismic forces),
it may be necessary to provide an exposed length for the bolts (same as the
column base plate requirement when large seismic effects are expected) and
add a stiffener on the skid member to resist the tension force that is being
developed on the anchors. Note that skid steel members must resist the
seismic design forces due to the presence of the equipment. If anchorage is
made on concrete, the design must be made according to ACI code (ACI358
and/or ACI349) and it must provide a ductile behavior, avoiding brittle
10-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Figure 10.2.b-3: Example of exposed length for anchor bolt when ductility is
required.
When none of the details from Figure 10.2-3 (exposed length for the anchor
bolts or stiffeners on the channel skid beam) are present, the head of the
anchor is tightened to the top surface of the bottom flange of the skid beam.
When this occurs, force amplification has to be considered on the design
verification of flanges and anchor bolts due to prying effect and the lack of
exposed length required by section 8.6.2 of NCh2369.Of2003. These
10-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
amplifications of forces will directly affect the diameter of the bolts and the
detailing and anchoring of them, even more if ductile behavior is necessary.
For transferring the seismic shear, typically the friction force shall not be
considered to help the shear base resistance. If needed, shear keys (for
concrete foundation) must be designed, or seismic stoppers could be included.
Grout thickness shall not be considered on the bearing lateral resistance of a
concrete foundation.
10.2.c. References
10-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
When an anchor rod is installed after placing concrete, making a hole in the
hardened concrete with a drill-bit, it is called "Post installed anchor". Some
types of post-installed anchor bolts are presented in the following figure:
The most widely used anchors for seismic restraints are the undercut and the
adhesive anchors.
According to HILTI Manual (2009), there are 3 basic principles which make an
anchor rod hold in a base material when subjected to a tensile force:
Friction (when expansion forces are present, friction between anchor and hole
wall is provided), keying (anchors rely on the interlock of the anchor with
deformations in the hole wall to resist the applied tension), and bonding (when
adhesive bonding is provided between the anchor and the hole wall). These
principles are generally combined in real situations.
10-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
When anchor bolts are subjected to shear forces, most of them develop their
shear resistance due to bearing against the hole wall near the surface of the
base material.
In this section the different possible failure modes will be presented but not
specific code requirements will be shown.
This chapter is not meant to explain in detail the different failure modes (and
their corresponding equations) of the anchor bolts and the concrete. The
reader is encouraged to study them with attention. According to ACI318-11,
Appendix D, the following failure modes (where applicable) shall be
considered:
(Re. ACI318-11, D.4.1)
10-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
10-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
The design of the anchors shall meet table D.4.1.1 of ACI318-11 and, for
earthquake loading, the design shall satisfy D.3.3. Note that when both tensile
and shear forces are present, proper tension-shear interaction must be
considered according to D.7. For more general provisions and strength
reduction factors for the different limit states, see section D.4 of the code.
For calculating the design tensile and shear strengths (considering the various
applicable limits states), see section D.5 and D.6 of Appendix D.
10-16
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
concrete fracture (a non-ductile failure mode) if the edge distance is small, the
anchor is placed in a group of tension-loaded anchors with reduced spacing, or
the anchor is loaded in shear instead of tension. In the common case where
anchors are subject primarily to shear, response governed by the steel
element may be non-ductile if the deformation of the anchor is constrained by
rigid elements on either side of the joint. Designing the attachment so that its
response is governed by a deformable link in the load path to the anchor is
encouraged. This approach provides ductility and over strength in the
connection while protecting the anchor from overload. Ductile bolts should only
be relied upon as the primary ductile mechanism of a system if the bolts are
designed to have adequate gauge length (unbonded strained length of the
bolt) to accommodate the anticipated nonlinear displacements of the system
at the design earthquake”.
Section 8.6.2: When anchor bolts are subjected to tension, they must
meet some minimum lengths in order to make easier their inspection
and reparation, and the thread must have enough length to be able to
tighten the nuts. See the following figure:
When anchor bolts do not meet the previous requirement, they must
be designed to stand load combinations in which the seismic forces
have been amplified by the maximum value between 0.5R and 1.5
10-17
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Note that the value of R mentioned above is the same value used for
the analysis and design of the structure or the design of an
equipment anchored by bolts. Also note that only seismic forces must
be amplified, not all the loads in the load combination. The mode of
failure of the each system must be of ductile type; if not, the R value
shall be reduced.
10-18
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Force calculation
D.3.1: Anchors and anchor groups shall be designed for critical effects of
factored loads obtained from an elastic analysis. Plastic analysis approaches
are permitted where nominal strength is controlled by ductile steel elements,
provided that deformational compatibility is taken into account.
On the other hand, if the anchor strength is governed by ductile yielding of the
anchor steel, the analysis based on the theory of elasticity is conservative.
Some references for plastic analysis approaches are shown in the Commentary
of the code.
One main objective of this chapter is to focus on the ductile design of the
anchorage to concrete. There were some changes between the 2008 and 2011
ACI 318 provisions. The most important provisions will be summarized. The
reader is encouraged to carefully study the provisions of Appendix D and its
commentary.
ACI318-08
Section D.3.3.3:
Anchor design strength related to concrete failure modes must take into
account an additional reduction factor of 0.75 (therefore, tensile resistance is
𝟎. 𝟕𝟓𝜙𝑁𝑛 and shear resistance is 𝟎. 𝟕𝟓𝜙𝑉𝑛 ). The resistance must be calculated
assuming cracked concrete (unless proven otherwise).
10-19
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Sections D.3.3.4, D.3.3.5 and D.3.3.6: In these provisions, the ductile failure
behavior is achieved designing in two ways:
Also, the code provides a third option when ductile behavior could not be
achieved (for example due to geometrical or material restrictions):
ACI318-11
In this version of the code, the requirements are separated between tensile
and shear loading. The code requirements for ductile behavior are now clearly
specified and these provisions are more explicit than the ones presented on
2008 version. According to the seismic design philosophy, it is advisable to use
those provisions, because it is expected that they will lead to ductile behavior
of the connection.
10-20
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Anchors and their attachments shall satisfy one option from (a) trough (d).
10-21
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Option (a) should be used only when the anchor yield behavior is well
defined and where the interaction of the yielding anchor with other
elements in the load path has been adequately addressed.
In option (b), the force associated with the steel attachment (for
example an angle, base plate or web tab), should be the expected
strength rather than the specified yield strength of the steel.
This section refers to the calculation of the anchor tensile design strength for
resisting earthquake forces, for the limit states listed in table D.4.1.1
including concrete (brittle) limit states. It shall be assumed for the calculations
that the concrete is cracked, unless it can be demonstrated that the concrete
remains uncracked (see RD.3.3.4.4 commentary).
10-22
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
Anchors and their attachments shall satisfy one option from (a) trough (d). A
summary is presented:
When anchor bolts are subjected to both tension and shear forces, they shall
be designed to satisfy the requirements of D.7 (tension-shear interaction),
with the anchor design tensile strength calculated from D.3.3.4.4.
10-23
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 10: SUPPORT OF EQUIPMENT
10.3.g. References
10-24
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 11: EXPANSION JOINTS
One of the most common mistakes in seismic design is to consider that the
seismic displacements are produced by seismic forces modified by the
response modification factor R. This common mistake leads to
underestimations of the actual displacements that the structure will undertake,
thus, when the expansion joint design is made, this design is for an smaller
level of displacement. It is important that the calculation of displacements
shall be done according to the provisions of the applicable code, in this case
the Chilean code.
𝑄𝑜 𝑄𝑜
𝑅 0.5 < < 1.0
𝑄𝑚𝑖𝑛 𝑄𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑄𝑜
𝑅1 = 0.5 𝑅 ≤ 0.5
𝑄𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑄𝑜
𝑅 ≥ 1.0
𝑄𝑚𝑖𝑛
This provision takes into account the fact that the reduction of the seismic
forces because of the ductile behavior of the structure, which is expressed with
the factor 𝑅, is not applicable to deformations, which are calculated
considering the elastic response of the structure, but without the use of a
11-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 11: EXPANSION JOINTS
i j
Two structures separated by a gap 𝑆. To avoid the impact between the two
frames produced by the seismic displacements, the minimum gap that has to
be provided is given by the greater of the following values (Re. Section 6.2.1
of the NCh2369.Of2003):
2
𝑆= 𝑅1𝑖 𝑑𝑑𝑖 2 + 𝑅1𝑗 𝑑𝑑𝑗 + 𝑑0𝑖 + 𝑑0𝑗 (Re. 6-2 NCh2369.Of2003)
𝑆 = 0.002 ℎ𝑖 + ℎ𝑗 (Re. 6-3 NCh2369.Of2003)
𝑆 = 30 𝑚𝑚
Where 𝑑𝑑𝑖 and 𝑑𝑑𝑗 are the seismic displacements of each structure calculated
considering the response modification factor 𝑅 (which can be different for each
structure); 𝑅1𝑖 and 𝑅1𝑗 are the response modification factors for each structure
as defined in section 6.1 (explained above); 𝑑0𝑖 and 𝑑0𝑗 are the non-seismic
deformations for service loads; and ℎ𝑖 and ℎ𝑗 are the heights of the considered
level for each structure, measured from their respective base levels.
The first expression takes into account the fact that the maximum seismic
displacements for each building will not generally occur at the same time, so
that expression is a less conservative alternative than using:
11-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 11: EXPANSION JOINTS
This above expression is considered in some codes like the New Zealand code.
2
The application of the rule 𝑅1𝑖 𝑑𝑑𝑖 2 + 𝑅1𝑗 𝑑𝑑𝑗 is of common practice in Chile
and is a better estimate of probable relative displacements between structures
than the summation of the maximums values of the seismic displacements.
(Re. C6.2 of the NCh2369.Of2003).
Note that when the relative displacement between two points of a system is
needed (e.g. story drifts, allowable deformation between boiler and the
structure of the boiler support) and dynamic analysis is used, that relative
displacement cannot be estimated as the difference of the maximum
displacement at each point; it has to be calculated using the combination of
the relative deformation for each mode or, if it is not possible to do the latter,
as the addition of the maximum displacement of each point, which is a
conservative alternative.
If the two structures are connected, an expansion has to be considered for the
connection, which must be capable to withstand demand of seismic
deformations, but also the thermal expansion effects (and also deformations
from other sources, different from seismic origins).
Expansion joint
Connection
i j
11-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 11: EXPANSION JOINTS
If the connection has a significant stiffness with respect to the structures which
it is attached to, the response of the buildings, and therefore, the relative
displacement between them, will depend of the properties of the connection.
Therefore, the connection and thus, the two structures connected with the
proper stiffness and inertia of the connection, have to be part of the structural
analysis. In this case, it is not possible to use directly the expressions of
section 6.1 of the Chilean code without considering the connection; the
displacement and the design force in the expansion joint must be obtained
directly from the structural analysis (use section 6.1 of the Chilean code).
i K ej j
Unfortunately, the Chilean code does not give any criterion to establish the
flexibility or stiffness of the connection. In the case of pipes, the code only
says that if the weight of the pipes is small in comparison with the structures
that they connect, it is not necessary to consider the pipe in the analysis;
otherwise, it must be done an analysis that includes the properties of the pipe
(Re. section 11.5.2 of the NCh2369.Of2003).
Summarizing:
11-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 11: EXPANSION JOINTS
Tip:
The design of the expansion joint must be done for all seismic displacements
simultaneously; this is longitudinal, vertical and transverse displacement.
Also, consider that the calculated seismic displacement that is used for the
design does not have sign, so it has to be considered as positive or negative
(in all possible combinations between the calculated displacements). If it is
possible, more accurate analysis, like time-history analysis, is encouraged to
use in order to calculate more realistic displacements between the structures.
Once the displacements are known, the design of the expansion joint will
depend on the properties of it. If the expansion joint is only a sliding support
between the structures, the design must be concentrated in calculating the
required dimensions of the support. If, for example, in a pipe that connects
two structures, the design will depend of the requirements established by the
pipe supplier.
11-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 11: EXPANSION JOINTS
Single system: 𝑋 = 𝑒 ⋅ 𝑛
Double system: 𝑋 = 2 ⋅ 𝑒 ⋅ 𝑛
𝑒
Single system: 𝑌 = 𝑛 ⋅ 𝐶 ⋅ ⋅ 𝐷𝑝
3
𝑒
Double system (universal type): 𝑌 = 2 ⋅ 𝑛 ⋅ 𝐿1 − 𝑐 ⋅ ⋅ 𝐷𝑝
𝛼
𝑒
Double system (hinged, gimbal type): 𝑌 = 2 ⋅ 𝑛 ⋅ 𝐿2 ⋅
𝐷𝑝
𝑒
𝜃 = 2 ⋅ 180 ⋅ ⋅𝐷
𝜋 𝑝
Where the difference between a single system and a double system is given by
the number of bellows used. 𝐷𝑝 is the diameter of the bellow, 𝑒 is the allowable
expansion amount per one corrugation of bellows; 𝑛 is the number of
corrugations of the bellow; 𝐶 is the length of the bellow; 𝑊 is the distance
between corrugations; 𝐿1 is the total length of bellows containing intermediate
pipe of double system; 𝐿2 is the distance between hinge pins of hinged type
and 𝛼 is the factor depending on the ratio of bellows length of double system
bellows to total on.
𝑒 ≥ 𝑒𝑥 + 𝑒𝑦 + 𝑒𝜃
11-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 11: EXPANSION JOINTS
Single system:
𝑋
𝑒𝑥 =
𝑛
𝑌
𝑒𝑦 = 3 ⋅ 𝐷𝑝 ⋅ ⋅𝐶
𝑛
𝜃
𝑒𝜃 = 𝐷𝑝 ⋅ 𝜋 ⋅ ⋅ 𝑛 ⋅ 180
2
Double system:
𝑋
𝑒𝑥 =
2𝑛
𝑌
𝑒𝑦 = 𝛼 ⋅ 𝐷𝑝 ⋅ ⋅ 𝑛 𝐿1 − 𝐶
2
3𝐿2 − 3𝐶𝐿
𝛼= 2
3𝐿 − 6𝐶𝐿 + 4𝐶 2
11-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 11: EXPANSION JOINTS
11.4. References
The document that presents the future provisions that will be used in Chile,
(based on the ASCE 7 code) is MINVU NTM 001-2010 for the seismic design of
nonstructural components. Additional tips for expansion joints and seismic
damage mitigation can be found on the FEMA E-74 document.
11-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
12. CRANES
12.1. General description of bridge cranes
The objective of this chapter is to briefly explain the most important aspects
on the design of the supporting structures for crane bridges (classification of
the systems, design loads, design process, etc.), introducing some code
provisions and references, and also some tips that could be helpful for the
designer. It is expected that the reader closely examine the various references
that are presented, when looking for more detail in the subject.
12-1
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
Once classified, the report shows the loading conditions and the approximate
number of loading cycles for each class (see table 5.1 of the report). Then the
document refers to the allowable stress range for repeated loads, as specified
on AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (ASD) – 1989.
The crane classification as stated on CMAA 70 document “is based on the load
spectrum reflecting the actual service conditions as closely as possible”. For
the definition of the load spectrum, it is encouraged to read the document. In
simple words, cranes classification is made according to the service conditions
of the most severely loaded part of the crane. The individual parts which are
clearly separated from the rest or forming a self-contained structural unit, can
be classified into different loading groups if the service conditions are fully
known.
12-2
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
provision and they are recommended for use by the authors of the Design
Guide. A more detailed discussion about fatigue damage and crane runway
fatigue considerations is written on sections 12.1 and 12.2 of AISC Design
Guide 7.
There are not specific requirements in Chilean codes for the design of crane
supporting structures. There are only some few related references on chapter
11 “Specific Structures” of NCh2369.Of2003.
12-3
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
12-4
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
Crane loading conditions generally are not well defined in building codes.
There are some code provisions that specify the manner of calculating different
crane induced loads and load combinations. It has to be noted that different
results when using different design codes, so the designer should use
judgment, and project specifications must provide the specific code provisions
to be used in a given project. In this section, some general and common
provisions are shown.
Some common international provisions for crane loads are specified on ASCE 7
code and AISE Technical Report N°13. The first document can be used with the
Strength Design and the Allowable Stress Design methods, and the second
recommendations are based on ASD.
12-5
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
Because of the motion of the crane and the lifting and lowering of the
suspended load, additional vertical inertia forces shall be included. Two
different provisions of common crane design related documents are presented:
ASCE 7
Percentage
Crane type
Monorail cranes (powered) 25
Cab-operated or remotely operated bridge cranes (powered) 25
Pendant-operated bridge cranes (powered) 10
Bridge cranes or cranes with hand-geared bridge, trolley, and hoist 0
Table 12-1: Increase applied to the maximum wheel loads to obtain the
vertical impact force, according to ASCE 7-2010.
12-6
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
ASCE 7
According to this report, the lifted load is the total weight lifted by the hoist,
including working loads, all the hooks, the lifting beams, magnets and other
appurtenances required for service, but excluding the weight of the column,
ram or other material handling device which is rigidly guided in the vertical
direction during hoisting action. For pendant operated cranes, side thrust is
taken as 20% of the maximum wheel load on the driving wheels (typically half
of the total wheels). Also, radio-operated cranes shall be considered the same
as cab-operated cranes for vertical impact, side thrust and traction
determination.
12-7
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
ASCE 7
According to section 3.4.3 of AISE Technical Report N° 13, the load applied to
the crane stop shall be included in the design of the runway girders, their
connections and the supporting framework. The bumper force is dependent on
the energy-absorbing device used in the crane bumper. Generally, the crane
supplier provides the bumper force.
According to section 3.9 of AISE Technical Report N°13, the seismic mass of
cranes and trolleys that lift a suspended load need to be considered in the
calculation of the seismic load, including only the empty weight of the
equipment. This is different from the requirements of NCh2369.Of2003 shown
above in this document. It is important to take into account the interaction
between the equipment and the crane building, and that there are vertical
accelerations present on large seismic events, so special attention must be
considered to avoid the uplifting of the cranes. Other considerations with
respect to seismic loads must be discussed within each project specifications.
12-8
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
As indicated on AISC Design Guide N°7, when one crane is being analyzed,
each span must be designed for the most severe loading with the crane in the
worst position for each element that is affected.
Chilean code NCh2369.Of2003, for example, only indicates that if various
cranes are present, they must be analyzed unloaded and parked for the worst
effects. If considering the crane loads as service live loads (SC) or special
operating live loads (SO), the combinations with other effects (wind,
earthquake, live loads, etc.) are addressed on section 4.5 of the Chilean code.
Other references for cranes induced loads and load combinations are the CMAA
Specification N°70 and N°74, and the MBMA Low Rise Building Systems
Manual.
As examples indicated showed in the AISC Design Guide N°7, other load
combinations (not shown on AISE Technical Report N°13) that have been used
by engineers include:
12-9
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
Some basic information that has to be taken into account for the design
process is listed below:
Type of crane to be used.
Operating conditions.
Building type and the dimensions of the place where the bridge crane
is going to be installed in order to size the length of the principal
beam (bridge crane) and have some other required dimensions (for
example, the head-room clearance available above the specified
crane level).
Consider properties and location of safety and maintenance devices
for the service condition of the crane: railings, access routes and
stairs, adequate walkways, etc.
Crane required characteristics: number of cranes required, lifting
height, maximum rated load, self-weight, length of the bridge crane,
estimated number of lifts in time period , hoisting speed, travelling
speed, method of crane control (for example cabin on crane, pendant
control unit, remote control, etc.), system of power supply, support
conditions and details, details of the clearances required between the
crane and the structure, runway length, runaway girder spans, etc.
Vendors should give the specific information required by the project
engineer. For example, maximum wheel loads, wheel spacing, trolley
weight, etc.
Crane runway girders will be subjected to the following internal forces and
moments that must be considered on the design:
12-10
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
Note that when fatigue is critical on any limit state (especially on higher
service levels for the crane, according to CMAA 70 classification), it must be
considered because this type of elements and their connections are subjected
to repeated cycles of loading during their life time. There are also serviceability
limit states, used to control relative and absolute lateral movements of the
runways that will be discussed later on this section.
Generally, crane runway girders are made from rolled or welded H sections (W
sections), and when required, a channel cap is added on the top flange to
increase the strength of the section. There are other options also for the cross
section of the runway girder, for example a plate or triangulated box girder.
Note that fatigue restrictions are more severe for built-up shapes. As indicated
on AISC Design Guide N°7, the difference between a rolled shape vs. a built-
up member using continuous fillet welds is a reduction in the allowable fatigue
stress.
12-11
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
2. - Obtain the worst load conditions (moving the crane to various positions)
for the runway beams and their connections.
5.- Check the bi-axial-bending interaction on the top flange. Typically, axial
forces on the beam girder due to longitudinal force generate stress levels that
can be neglected (if desired, an additional check could be done for the
longitudinal stress, considering the full cross sectional area of the beam).
Chapter H of AISC 360-05 can be used to verify interaction. A typical design
assumption is that only the top flange resists the lateral crane loads.
6.- Check web sidesway buckling (see AISC 360-05, section J10.4) in order to
prevent buckling in the tension flange of a beam where the flanges are not
restrained by bracings or stiffeners and are subjected to concentrated loads.
This failure mode can be prevented by an adequate design of the lateral
bracing or stiffeners located at the load point.
7.- Additional checks (not specified in the Design Guide, but that could be
performed)
12-12
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
Other design tips for runway beams are included in the AISC Design Guide
N°7. See sections 18.2 (Plate Girders), 18.3 (Simple Span vs. Continuous
Runways), 18.4 (Channel Caps), 18.5 (Runway Bracing Concepts), 18.6
(Crane Stops), 18.7 (Crane Rail Attachments) and 18.8 (Crane Rails and Crane
Joints); in the AISE Technical Report N°13, section 5.8 (Crane Runway
Girders); and in CMAA Specification N° 70, section 3.5 (Design Limitations).
There are additional recommendations for the design of these elements, their
bracings, welding, stiffeners, etc.
There are different options for the type of column that supports a runway
girder. They can be bracketed, stepped, laced or battened as shown in the
following figure:
12-13
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
brackets shall not be used to support runway girders with total reactions at the
column larger than 50 kips (222 kN).
As said on AISC Design Guide N° 7, the eccentric crane loads (the critical
bending case occurs generally when the crane is not centered over the column
but located just to one side) and lateral loads produce moments in the column.
The calculation of the moments in the columns requires a complete frame
analysis in order to obtain reliable results. Two parameters that have marked
effect on column moments are the base fixity and the amount of load sharing
with adjacent bents (discussed and exampled on the Design Guide).
Some preliminary design methods and final design procedures for this type of
columns, including solved examples, are shown on sections 20.2 and 20.3 of
the AISC Design Guide N°7.
12-14
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
Medium: Lifts up to 30 ton. 2- If a column which changes of section after supporting the crane
bridge beam is used, study the dimensions so that the column is an H
shape with enough depth for placing the crane bridge beam and giving
free space for operation. Besides, at least 250 mm must stay free so to
continue the column upward.
12-15
MANUAL OF SEISMIC STEEL CONNECTIONS. CHAPTER 12: CRANES
12.10. References
http://www.jherbertcorp.com/crane-bridge.htm
http://www.dearborncrane.com
12-16